Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 296

C-200MT

SOFTWARE USERS GUIDE

Copyright 2000 by Gerber Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.


This document may not be reproduced by any means, in whole or in part, without the
written permission of the copyright owner.
This document is part of the proprietary articles furnished to document Gerber Technologys
C-200MT software for GERBERcutters.
In consideration of the furnishing of the information contained in this document, the party to
whom it is given assumes its control and custody and agrees to the following:
1. The information contained herein is given in confidence and any part thereof shall not be
copied or reproduced without the written consent of Gerber Technology, Inc.
2. This document or the contents herein under no circumstances shall be used in the
manufacture or reproduction of the article shown and the delivery shall not constitute
any right or license to do so.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
Gerber Technology, Inc., its subsidiaries and affiliates shall not be liable for errors in this
documentation or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with furnishing, or
use of this material.
COMMAND, G (stylized logo), GERBER BRISTLE SQUARE, GERBERcutter,
GERBERmover, Knife Intelligence, and MARKAMATIC are registered trademarks of
Gerber Technology, Inc.
AccuMark, AccuPlot, Booster PAK, GERBERmarker, GERBERplanner, GERBERsaver,
GERBERspreader, IMPACT, MicroMark, and POWER Processor are trademarks of Gerber
Technology, Inc.
Windows NT is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Other company names, brand names, and product names mentioned in this book are
recognized as trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
Gerber Technology, Inc.
24 Industrial Park Road West
Tolland, CT 06084 USA
Version 1.6.x or greater
Printed in USA 1/00
Document Number: 86885000

ii

Contents
Safety Precautions
Dangerous Procedure Warnings..................................................................1
Do Not Perform Maintenance Alone..........................................................1
Live Circuits ...............................................................................................1
Turn Power Off Before Maintenance.........................................................2
S-3200/5200/7200 and GT 3250/5250/7250 Cutters .........................2
GTxL Cutter ........................................................................................2
Laser Origin Light ......................................................................................3
Additional Precautions...............................................................................3
Moving Machinery...............................................................................3
Replacing Parts...................................................................................3
Knife Blade..........................................................................................3
Clothing ...............................................................................................4
Compressed Air ..................................................................................4
Lint ......................................................................................................4
Equipment Training.............................................................................4
Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere .....................................4
Use Caution When Handling the Monitor ...........................................4

What's Inside
C-200MT Software User's Guide...................................................................1
Safety Precautions..............................................................................1
Getting Acquainted .............................................................................1
Basic Cut Processing..........................................................................1
Advanced Cutting Features ................................................................1
Recovery.............................................................................................1
Customizing Setups ............................................................................1
Parameter Manager ............................................................................1
Cut File and Report Utilities ................................................................2
Queue Manager ..................................................................................2
CutView Utility.....................................................................................2
Cutter Information Database (CIDB)...................................................2
Routine Maintenance ..........................................................................2
Optimizing Cutter Performance ..........................................................2
Diagnostics .........................................................................................2
Glossary..............................................................................................2
Parameters .........................................................................................2
Error Messages...................................................................................3
Input Codes.........................................................................................3
Documentation for Your GERBERcutter .....................................................3
Conventions ...................................................................................................4
Customer Support .........................................................................................4

Getting Acquainted
C-200MT Software for GERBERcutters .......................................................1
Multitasking .........................................................................................1
Supported by C-200MT .............................................................................1
GERBERcutters ..................................................................................1
Native Languages ...............................................................................2
Networks .............................................................................................2
Accessing the Program .............................................................................2
Closing the Program..................................................................................3

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Contents 1

C-200MT Main Cutter Control Screen ..........................................................4


Menu Bar ...................................................................................................5
Tool Bar .....................................................................................................5
Icon Keys and BCP Buttons ......................................................................5
Cut File Information Button........................................................................7
Queue Information Button .........................................................................7
System Setup Button.................................................................................7
Two Line Output Display ...........................................................................8
Settings Options ........................................................................................8
Status Bar ..................................................................................................8
Gauges on Main Screen............................................................................9
Knife Speed Gauge.............................................................................9
Cut Speed Gauge ...............................................................................9
Knife Wear Gauge ..............................................................................9
Knife Intelligence Gauge...................................................................10
Vacuum Level Gauge .......................................................................10
Percent Complete Gauge .................................................................10
Feed Rate Slider ...............................................................................10
File Display Area .....................................................................................11
File Display Options ..........................................................................11
Piece Colors in File Display Area .....................................................12
Options for GERBERcutter Systems .........................................................12
Right Side Option ....................................................................................13
Conveyorized Take-off Table (CTOT) .....................................................13
Lateral Drive Option.................................................................................13
Resealer Option.......................................................................................14
Bristle Cleaner Options ...........................................................................14
Bar Code Reader.....................................................................................14
POWER Processor GPP-200..................................................................15
AccuMatch...............................................................................................15
Hardware...........................................................................................15
Software ............................................................................................15
Drill Options .............................................................................................16
Drill Options Electric .....................................................................16
Drill Options Pneumatic/Electric ...................................................16
Centering and Alignment Options ...........................................................17
Y Edge Alignment Option..................................................................17
Automatic Tube Centering Option ....................................................17

Basic Cut Processing


Cut Processing Diagram
Turning on the Cutter ....................................................................................2
Enabling Servo Power ...................................................................................2
Initializing the Cutter .....................................................................................3
Positioning the First Bite ..............................................................................3
Selecting a Setup ...........................................................................................4
Opening a Cut File/Marker ............................................................................5
Default Directories/Storage Areas.............................................................5
Changing AccuMark Parameter Tables ....................................................6
Using Rerun....................................................................................................8
Turning on the Vacuum.................................................................................8
Positioning the Laser Light...........................................................................9
Setting the Marker Origin ..............................................................................9
Selecting Cutting Speed..............................................................................10
Turning on the Knife Motor.........................................................................10
Processing a Cut File/Marker......................................................................10

2 Contents

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Trim Cut ........................................................................................................11

Cutter Parameter Table Editor


Advanced Cutting Features
Biting and Advanced Cutting Features......................................................1
Using Dry Run ...........................................................................................2
Fabric Alignment........................................................................................2
Marker Stacking.........................................................................................3
Using Marker Flip ......................................................................................4
Using Check Origin ...................................................................................4
Using OPSTOPs........................................................................................5
Hints When Working with Opstops .....................................................5
Using Mirroring Options.............................................................................6
Using Center Line Origin ...........................................................................6
Using Clipping Window .............................................................................7
Using Preprocess Drills .............................................................................7
Using Contiguous Cutting..........................................................................8
Using Continuous Cutting..........................................................................8
Using Pause Between Bites ......................................................................9
Run Time Biting .........................................................................................9
Using Run Time Biting ........................................................................9
Bite Generation ...................................................................................9
Static Length Biting ...........................................................................10
Variable Length Biting.......................................................................11
Identifying Data Format ...........................................................................12
Using Data Format............................................................................12
Using AAMA Data Conversion..........................................................13
Using Data Scale Factor .........................................................................13
Automatic Tube Centering.......................................................................14
Setting Up for Automatic Tube Centering .........................................14

Recovery
Recovery after Interrupted Cutting ..............................................................1
Before Using Recovery Commands ..........................................................2
Restore State.............................................................................................3
Restoring State Manually ..........................................................................4
Restore Origin ...........................................................................................4
Bite Search ................................................................................................5
Piece Search .............................................................................................5
Piece Recut ...............................................................................................6
Closing a Marker .......................................................................................6
Move to Origin ...........................................................................................7

Customizing Setups
Settings ...........................................................................................................1
Using Setup Screen Buttons...............................................................1
Selecting a Setup ......................................................................................2
Selecting a Preset Setup...........................................................................2
Turning Parameters ON/OFF ....................................................................4

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Contents 3

Parameter Manager
Parameters
Categories of Parameters .............................................................................5
Knife and Drill Speeds Parameters ..............................................................6
Sharpen Parameters ......................................................................................7
Cutting Parameters........................................................................................9
Vacuum System Parameters.......................................................................11
Ignore Codes Parameters ...........................................................................13
Bristle Cleaner Parameters .........................................................................14
Knife and Path Intelligence Parameters ....................................................15
Data Format/Scaling and RSO ....................................................................18
Bite Parameters............................................................................................20
Options and Modes......................................................................................24
Mirror Image and Clipping Window ...........................................................28
OPSTOP and Report Options .....................................................................29
Selvage Cut/Contiguous Cut ......................................................................30
System Setup Parameters...........................................................................31
Cut File Preprocessor Parameters .............................................................33
Queue Manager Parameters .......................................................................34
Field Service Level Categories and Parameters.......................................35
Security Parameters ....................................................................................42

Cut File and Report Utilities


CutView .....................................................................................................1
Queue Manager.........................................................................................1
Cutter Information Database (CIDB) .........................................................1
File Manager ...................................................................................................2
Lock File Manager .....................................................................................2
Changing Passwords ................................................................................3
Change User Directory..............................................................................4
Default Storage Areas.........................................................................4
PreProcessor.............................................................................................5
Common Line......................................................................................7
Reorder ...............................................................................................7
Path Optimization................................................................................8
Window ...............................................................................................8

CutView Utility
Queue Manager
Cutter Info Database (CIDB)
Diagnostics
Input Output Test (DG 23) .............................................................................1
Servo I/O Test (DG 16) ...................................................................................3
How It Works.......................................................................................3
Testing Outputs with Servo I/O Diagnostic ...............................................4
Testing Inputs with Servo I/O Diagnostic ..................................................6
Testing Encoders with Servo I/O Diagnostic .............................................6
KI Calibration (DG 20)....................................................................................7
C Axis Angle ...................................................................................................8
Sharpen Angle................................................................................................8
Calibrate Conveyor Move..............................................................................9
C Home to System Zero ..............................................................................10
Single Step Diagnostic ................................................................................11

4 Contents

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Continuous Run ...........................................................................................12


Display Bite Adjust Values..........................................................................12
Conveyor/CTOT Speed Calibrate ...............................................................13
Stepsize Setup .............................................................................................13
Edge Sensor Diagnostic..............................................................................14
Position Info .................................................................................................15
Move Head To...............................................................................................15
Zone Valve Exerciser...................................................................................16
Running Cut Tests .......................................................................................17
Multiple Horizontal Lines .........................................................................18
Multiple Vertical Lines .............................................................................19
Multiple 45 degree Lines .........................................................................20
50" Square Test.......................................................................................21
Concentric Circles ...................................................................................22
Beam Square Test ..................................................................................23
Heel to Heel Test.....................................................................................24
Yaw in X Test ..........................................................................................25
Yaw in Y Test ..........................................................................................27
10" Square, Center Drill Hole ..................................................................28
Geometric Shapes...................................................................................29
5' Bite Test...............................................................................................30
Knife Offset Setup ...................................................................................31
Drill 1 Offset Setup ..................................................................................32
Drill 2 Offset Setup ..................................................................................33
Pen Offset Setup .....................................................................................34
Beam Square Diagnostics...........................................................................35
Beam Squareness ...................................................................................35
Parameters for Beam Squareness Diagnostic ........................................35
Path Intelligence Diagnostics .....................................................................37
Calibration ...............................................................................................37
Watch Forces ..........................................................................................38
Software Diagnostics ..................................................................................39
Restorable Info ........................................................................................39
Debug Window Diagnostic ......................................................................39
Servo Data Logging Diagnostic...............................................................40
Error Simulation Diagnostic.....................................................................40
Communications Statistics ......................................................................41
Dual Beam Diagnostics ...............................................................................41
Dynamic Offset / Yaw Cut Test Diagnostic ...............................................42

Glossary
Error Messages
Input Codes
Index

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Contents 5

6 Contents

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Safety Precautions
Dangerous Procedure Warnings
Warnings precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this manual.
Instructions contained in warnings must be followed. You also should employ
all other safety precautions that you deem necessary for safe operation of the
equipment in your operating environment.
WARNING!

Failure to follow these safety precautions could result in


injury or death.

Do Not Perform Maintenance Alone


Do not perform any maintenance on the equipment unless another person that
can render first aid and resuscitation is present.
Live Circuits
High voltages exist inside the C-200 controller vacuum/electric and electronics
enclosure(s). The exact number of enclosures and their locations, depend on the
GERBERcutter model. There are no operator-serviceable parts in these
enclosure(s). Two power cables enter the primary vacuum/electric enclosure:
a three-phase cable for the vacuum generator system and a single-phase power
cable for the C-200 controller. Both power cables must be disconnected before it
is safe for trained, maintenance personnel to work within the enclosure.
There must be a main disconnect that meets local electrical codes for each power
supply.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Safety Precautions 1

Turn Power Off Before Maintenance


Depending on your GERBERcutter, circuit breaker(s) and/or a switch located
outside of the vacuum and electric enclosure(s) allow you to shut down power to
the FEP (or PC), vacuum system, C-200 cutter controller, servo motors, and
conveyor. To prevent accidental start-up, always turn off power as directed
before doing any maintenance.
As shown in diagrams below, CB1 shuts off power to the C-200 controller; the
FEP or PC remains on. CB2 shuts off power to both the C-200 controller and the
FEP or PC. CB9 or SW1 turns off power to the vacuum motor.
S-3200/5200/7200 and GT 3250/5250/7250 Cutters
CB1

CB2

CB8

GTxL Cutter

CB2
SW1

CB1

Note:

2 Safety Precautions

For specific circuit breaker descriptions refer to documentation for your


GERBERcutter.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Laser Origin Light


The origin light in the cutter head uses a laser light that points toward the cutting
surface. When viewed as intended (by looking at the dot projected on the
material to be cut), the laser should pose no hazard to operators. However, the
origin light is a Class IIIa laser product, with a peak power of 5 mW at a
wavelength of 670 nm. Never look straight into the light source of this laser
beam; doing so may cause temporary, or even permanent, damage to your eyes.
Direct, bright reflections from the laser may also be harmful. Remove all highlyreflective material (such as jewelry and mirrors) from the cutting surface before
turning on the origin light. Turn off the origin light before performing any
maintenance on the GERBERcutter.
WARNING!

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of


procedures other than those specified herein may result
in hazardous radiation exposure.

Additional Precautions
Moving Machinery
Keep hands away from the Resealer and other moving machine parts to avoid
personal injury. Make sure there is no one else near the table when you are
operating the GERBERcutter.
Replacing Parts
Report any broken or missing parts to your Field Service representative. Because
of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute parts or
perform any unauthorized modification of the equipment.
Knife Blade
The knife blade is very sharp. Be extremely careful when working near the knife
blade.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Safety Precautions 3

Clothing
Loose-fitting clothing, dangling neck chains and ties, loose jewelry, and long
hair can be a hazard when working around machinery.
Compressed Air
Always use caution when using compressed air. Never use compressed air to
blow lint and dust off clothing or skin.
Lint
Avoid breathing in lint when changing the table and stack filters. Wear a mask
suitable for this purpose.
Equipment Training
Never attempt to operate this machinery unless you have received formal
training to do so.
Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere
Use extreme caution when handling flammable liquids such as cleaning solvents.
Do not operate the equipment in the presence of flammable gases or fumes.
Use Caution When Handling the Monitor
The monitor on the operator console may be a cathode ray tube (CRT). Breaking
a CRT could cause it to implode and scatter glass fragments at a high velocity.
To prevent CRT implosion, avoid rough handling or jarring of the equipment.
Other models use a flat panel screen monitor.

4 Safety Precautions

C-200MT Software Users Guide

What's Inside
C-200MT Software User's Guide
This user's guide contains information on using the C-200MT software with GT
3250/5250/7250, S-3200/5200/7200, GTxL, S-91 ZVC, S-91 Static, and S-91
TCW GERBERcutters. It includes the following chapters:
Safety Precautions
This chapter details safety precautions you must follow when operating the
GERBERcutter. Read this section before you start cutting. Also refer to
documentation that came with your GERBERcutter or on the Gerber
Service CD.
Getting Acquainted
This chapter introduces the multitasking C-200MT program and lists the
GERBERcutters, options, and supported data formats, languages, and networks.
It explains how to access and close the C-200MT program. Features of the
operator's console and the Main Cutter Control screen are covered.
Basic Cut Processing
This chapter covers the basic steps for opening and cutting cut files/markers.
Advanced Cutting Features
This chapter briefly explains advanced cut processing commands and parameters
for specific cutting operations.
Recovery
The chapter explains how to recover after an EStop or servo power down.
Customizing Setups
This chapter explains how to select and modify a Setup using the Settings
command.
Parameter Manager
This chapter explains how to use the Parameter Manager utility to access, edit,
and lock parameter settings. Information about Categories and Parameters
available in the Parameter Manager is covered in a separate chapter.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

What's Inside 1

Cut File and Report Utilities


This chapter describes utilities that help you work with markers, or cut files. It
explains how to use manage files using File Manager and preprocess markers
before cutting. Additional utilities are covered in the following chapters.
Queue Manager
This chapter explains how to use the Queue Manager utility to create, edit, and
run job queues.
CutView Utility
This chapter explains how to use the CutView utility to view cut files, or
markers, prior to cutting.
Cutter Information Database (CIDB)
This chapter explains how to use the CIDB utility to generate reports about
cutter activity and cut files/markers processed on the GERBERcutter.
Routine Maintenance
This chapter covers how to use menu commands to schedule and perform
routine maintenance, such as sharpening the knife while the cutter is idle, reset
for a new knife, and operate the autmomatic Bristle Cleaner.
Optimizing Cutter Performance
This chapter covers are features that optimize cutter performance, including Path
Intelligence, Knife Intelligence and Energy Savings Mode (ESM).
Diagnostics
This chapter explains the various diagnostic routines used to check that the
GERBERcutter is running properly.
Glossary
The Glossary lists terms you need to know.
Parameters
This chapter lists available parameters by categories. Each parameter is briefly
explained with possible settings.

2 What's Inside

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Error Messages
This chapter lists all error messages for the GERBERcutter. Possible causes and
solutions are given for each error condition.
Input Codes
This chapter lists the input codes used in cut data files.

Documentation for Your GERBERcutter


C-200MT software is now released on CD-ROM. For this reason, the C-200MT
Software User's Guide, NT Quick Reference Guide, and GERBERcutter
operator and maintenance, system maintenance, and application manuals are
now delivered in PDF format. When C-200MT was installed on your system, the
software users guide and the appropriate operator/maintenance/service manuals
for your GERBERcutter were installed as well.
Note: All information in this C-200MT Software Users Guide is also available
in the online help.
To access printable (PDF) documentation about your cutter
1. Do one of the following:
Double-click on the C-200MT Documentation icon on your
Windows desktop.
Insert the C-200MT install CD and view contents using
Windows Explorer.
2. Double-click on the specific document you want to view.
3. To print, select Print from the File menu. You can print one page or all
pages.
Note: Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.02 or greater must be installed on your system to
view these PDF files.
To install Acrobat Reader
1. First install C-200MT software.
2. From the Windows Start menu, select Run.
3. Type C:\BIN\AR302.EXE and then press Enter.
Or browse to locate a newer Acrobat Reader .EXE file.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

What's Inside 3

Conventions
The following conventions are used throughout this manual:

Bullets at the beginning of a section tell you what is covered in that


section. Bullets also list a group of related items.
Bullets in a procedure lists the types of input from you needed by
the C-200MT program.

Bold type highlights important information. In procedures, bolded text indicates


a click with a pointing device or keyboard keys to press. In text, information that
you need to consider first is bolded.
Shortcut keystrokes, such as Marker/ Open, are underlined.
Text that you need to type or message prompts look like this.

Note:

Notes contain important or helpful information.

CAUTION:

WARNING!

Cautions appear before procedures that could cause damage to


equipment if not performed correctly.
Warnings tell you when you must follow a specific
procedure or practice to avoid personal injury or death.

Customer Support
If a problem still exists after troubleshooting, call Gerber Field Service
Engineering for assistance. In North America, call Customer Support at
800-321-2448. Outside North America, call your local service office.
Have the following information ready when you call:

4 What's Inside

GERBERcutter you are using

Any special equipment or software you are using, such as the drill,
resealer, or bar code reader option

Software packages you are using; include the software version numbers

Equipment number, if available

C-200MT Software Users Guide

U.S.A./CANADA
Gerber Technology, Inc.
WORLD HEADQUARTERS
P.O. Box 769
24 Industrial Park Road West
Tolland, Connecticut 06084 USA
TEL: (860) 871-8082
FAX: (860) 871-6007

Document Number: 86885000


1/00

INTERNATIONAL
Gerber Technology, Inc.
INTERNATIONAL DIVISION
P.O. Box 769
24 Industrial Park Road West
Tolland, Connecticut 06084 USA
TEL: (860) 871-8082
TLX: 192558 GGTIHQ
FAX: (860) 872-6742

EUROPE
Gerber Technology N.V./S.A.
Excelsiorlaan 55
B-1930 Zaventem, BELGIUM
TEL: (32) (2) 716 03 11
FAX: (32) (2) 716 03 22

Getting Acquainted
C-200MT Software for GERBERcutters

The C-200MT software is designed to operate on various GERBERcutters in


various work environments. C-200MT performs interface and cutter control
functions on all new GERBERcutters.
Multitasking
The C-200MT program version 1.6.x or greater runs only in Windows NT 4. You
may already be familiar with Windows. If not, refer to the Windows NT Quick
Reference Guide. Your company will appreciate the fact that Windows NT
allows multitasking. This means additional tasks can be performed while a cut
file/marker is being cut. These tasks can include:

Viewing a different cut file

Creating a job queue

Viewing system setups

Using File Manager

Generating reports

Supported by C-200MT
GERBERcutters
The C-200MT program performs user interface and cutter control functions on
the following GERBERcutters:

GT 3250/5250/7250

GTxL

S-3200/5200/7200

S-91 TCW, ZVC, Static

The cutter type is selected when installing the software for the first time. Your
GERBERcutter was shipped from the factory with the software pre-installed.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Getting Acquainted 1

File Formats
Currently, your GERBERcutter can process the following file types: AAMA
data, AccuMark marker data (version 7.2 or greater) and GERBERcutter data
(274-D).
GERBERcutter Data Formats
The C-200MT program supports the following standard cut data formats:
3.3 English, 4.2 English, and 5.1 Metric.
Native Languages
The C-200MT program supports native languages, including:

All 8-bit character sets supported by Windows NT 4

Those 16-bit languages for which a Windows NT 4 version exists


(example: Japanese Windows NT)

Networks
The C-200MT program supports connectivity to other systems on a Local Area
Network. All networks capable of running with Windows NT 4 are supported.
Accessing the Program
The C-200MT program is the first C-200 cutter controller PC software that runs
in Microsoft Windows NT. Your company will appreciate the fact that Windows
NT allows multitasking. This means that additional utilities or options, such as
PreProcessor or CutView can be used while a cut file/marker is being cut.
To start up the C-200MT program

1. Turn on the main power circuit breaker for the cutter. Refer to the
GERBERcutter operator's manual or Getting Started.
2. Press Enter to select Windows NT Workstation.
3. When prompted, press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to log on.
4. When prompted for a password, type your password and then press
Enter or click OK to display the Main Cutter Control screen.
Note:

The system is shipped from the factory without an NT


password. Press Enter to continue.

5. Double-click the C-200MT icon on the Windows desktop.


2 Getting Acquainted

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Closing the Program


This section gives the steps necessary to close the C-200MT program and shut
down the cutter.
CAUTION: To avoid losing data, always quit the C-200MT program before shutting

down Windows NT. Also, shutdown Windows NT before turning off the
main circuit breaker for the cutter.
To quit the C-200MT program

1. Make sure that the cutter is idle (not processing data) and that the servo
power is disabled.
2. From the Quit menu, select Confirm.
To shut down the cutter

1. Click on the Start button in the Task bar. Do one of the following:
Select Shutdown.
Press ALT + F4.
2. In the Shutdown dialog box, click the radio button next to Shutdown.
Then press Enter or click the OK button.
3. When prompted that it is safe to turn off your computer, turn off the
main power circuit breaker.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Getting Acquainted 3

C-200MT Main Cutter Control Screen


When you turn on your GERBERcutter, the following screen displays. Features
in this screen are explained in the following sections.

Cut File
Info Button

Menu
Bar

System Setup
Button

Tool
Bar
Right click
here for
Settings
options

Standard
Gauges
Buttons
2 Line
Output
Display
Queue
Info
Button

KI Gauge
Button for
Cutters
with KI
Feed Rate
Slider
for GTxL
cutter

Right click
here for
Marker Plot
options

File
Display
Area

Status
Bar

C-200MT version 1.7

Note:

If your cutter is running C-200MT version 1.5.x or earlier, refer to the


Getting Acquainted topic in the C-200MT online help on your system.

Right click
for Marker
Plot options

4 Getting Acquainted

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Menu Bar
The menu bar on the Main Cutter Control screen has drop-down menus that
allow access to the interface and cutter control functions in the C-200MT
program. Each menu choice is called a command.
Menus available in the Main Cutter Control screen:
Menu Item

Use commands to

File

Open, close, rerun, and manage


marker files.

Cutter

Operate the cutter.

Recover

Recover from an EStop or system


power down.

Setup

Configure settings that determine


how the cutter operates; change
passwords.

Utilities

View markers; run a job queue;


Preprocess markers,
Options: automatically clean the table
surface; create CIDB reports.

Diagnostics

Check cutter operation.

Help

Find help on how to use features in


the C-200MT program and review
information about the current
software release.

Quit

Exit the C-200MT program

Tool Bar
The tool bar on the Main Cutter Control screen provides an additional way to
perform frequently-used tasks for operating the cutter. Click on an icon with the
pointing device to select.
Hold the cursor over a tool bar icon to view the name and corresponding
function key you can press on the keyboard, if preferred.
Icon Keys and BCP Buttons
Notice that icons on several tool bar buttons correspond to those on switches on
the beam control panel at the cutter. For GERBERcutters with colored icon keys
on the keyboard, these also are identical to icons on the tool bar buttons.
Icon

Command

Function Key

Use To

Open Cutfile

F1

Select cut file or AccuMark marker,


and open it for processing.

Piece Search

F2

Find and cut a specific piece in a


marker.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Getting Acquainted 5

Icon

6 Getting Acquainted

Command

Function Key

Use To

Restore State

F3

Recover or restore state after a


power loss or EStop condition.

View Cutfile

F4

View cut data including dry haul path,


bite lines, drill points, and data
points. The CutView utility also
allows you to zoom in/out, select
individual bites and pieces within
bites, animate the cutting process,
and check piece data.

Setup

F5

Access Settings in order to change


setups. The C-200MT program
provides default setups for running a
cutter. Setups are suitable for a wide
variety of applications.

Knife Speed

F6

Adjust knife speed for the current


session or set as defaults in the
setup.

Move To Origin

F7

Move the cutter head to the last


established origin.

Sharpen

F8

Sharpen the knife when the cutter is


idle.

Vacuum

F9

Turn table vacuum ON or OFF.

Origin

F10

Set the start position (X0,Y0) of a


marker on the table.

Initialize

F11

Initialize, or identify, the zero position


for the table in X and Y (X0,Y0). This
is also called the home.

Start Cutting

F12

Begin the cutting process.

Stop Cutting

Pause

Stop the cutting process.

Queue Manager

Create job queues that allow the


cutter to automatically process
multiple.

AccuMatch

Access the AccuMatch option, if


available.

Preprocessor

Access the Preprocessor to optimize


cut data files.

CIDB Report
Generator

Access the report generator, if CIDB


option is available.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Cut File Information Button


This button on the Main Cutter Control screen displays the cut file name when
one is open. Click the button to display the Cut File Information dialog box. This
dialog box shows the cut file name and path as well as the length, width, number
of bites, and number of pieces in the open cut file. The dialog box also allows
you to open/close a cut file/marker or re-run a file.
Information concerning the current file and job displays in this window. This can
include:

Name of setup used

Cut path (drive and directory)

Cut File/Marker name

Length and width of marker

Bite number currently being processed

Piece number currently being processed

Origin in X and Y

Job queue, if any

Cutter status mode (determines which commands can be used currently)

Queue Information Button


This button on the Main Cutter Control screen displays the Queue name when
one is open. Click the button to display the Queue Information dialog box. This
dialog box allows you to:

Check the current job, if any

Open a queue

Close the current queue

Select the next job in the current queue

Open Queue Manager to edit the current or create a new queue

Click Done to close this dialog box.


System Setup Button
This button on the Main Cutter Control screen displays the system setup dialog
box. From here, you can load a new setup or save a setup you created.
Clicking this button is the same as selecting Settings from the Setup menu.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Getting Acquainted 7

Two Line Output Display


This display on the Main Cutter Control screen relays informational messages
that do not require any user acknowledgement. You can scroll through the
messages using the scroll buttons on the window.
These can include:
Initializing...
Command Executed Move Complete

Settings Options
To access Settings Options (explained below), right click anywhere in the gray
bar area, except on a gauge or other button.
To turn an option on, click that option. A button is created and displays as long
as an option is active.
To turn an option off, click on the button displayed for that option.
Option

Use To

Turn On Dry Run

Check the cut file/marker by


processing without cutting.

Enable Single Stepping

Process cut file data one block at a


time.

Enable Continuous Run

Reprocess an open cut file until you


manually stop the process.

Setup Data Scaling

Change scaling to adjust the size of a


marker to the size of the available
material.

Setup a Fabric Alignment


Angle

Set a different angle before cutting a


marker.

Setup a Clipping Window

Prevent the knife from cutting outside


of one or more edges of the spread.

Status Bar
When a menu command is highlighted, a brief description about the command
displays in the Status bar at the bottom of the Main Cutter Control screen.

8 Getting Acquainted

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Gauges on Main Screen


Status gauges appear on the Main Cutter Control screen as soon as servo power
is enabled. They replace the Enable Servo Power prompt. These gauges
frequently-updated indicators that show:

Vacuum Level

Knife Speed

Cut Speed

Knifewear

Knife Intel.

Feed Rate Slider

The Percent Complete, although not among the group of gauges described
above, indicates cut file completion.
Knife Speed Gauge
Shows current knife reciprocating speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).
Click the gauge button to access the Knife Speeds dialog box.
Cut Speed Gauge
Shows current cutting speed in inches or centimeters per minute for the cutting
head. The Cut Speed gauge indicates the slowdown by a decrease in the width of
the green bar indicator.
Click the gauge button to access the Cut Speed dialog box.
Knife Wear Gauge
Shows the number of sharpens that have occurred since the last knife; it also
indicates how many sharpens remain before the knife needs to be changed.
When the maximum number of sharpens has been reached, the bar graph turns
red and the Knife Life Exceeded prompt displays.
Click the Knife Wear gauge button to access the Knife Wear and Sharpening
dialog box.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Getting Acquainted 9

Knife Intelligence Gauge


Shows the current change in knife heading to compensate for lateral forces on
the knife; angle change is determined by Knife Intelligence (KI). The Knife
Intel. gauge only displays on cutters that have Knife Intelligence.
Click the gauge button to access the Knife Intelligence dialog box.
Note:

If you temporarily disable Knife Intelligence, the gauge will display


a red bar by default.

Vacuum Level Gauge


This button on the Main Cutter Control screen shows current vacuum level in
inches or centimeters per mercury. Click the gauge button to access the Vacuum
Settings dialog box.

When the level is too low the bar graph turns red. Tthe message, Vacuum Low
Caution, displays when the vacuum is too low for processing the current
marker.
Percent Complete Gauge
This button on the Main Cutter Control screen displays at the bottom of the C200MT plot window area. It shows the percentage of cutting completed so far
for the current marker; the percentage is based on distance cut relative to total
cut distance.
Feed Rate Slider
On a GTxL GERBERcutter, this slider allows you to view and change the
current feed rate.

10 Getting Acquainted

C-200MT Software Users Guide

File Display Area


When a cut file/marker is opened, this portion of the Main Cutter Control screen
shows the current bite and indicates the piece currently being cut. The status of
the plot is updated several times a second. Information concerning the current
file and job displays in this window. This can include:

Piece number currently being processed

Cutter status mode

Origin in X and Y

Bite number currently being processed

Job queue, if any

Length and width of marker

File Display Options


To access File Display Options (explained below), right click in the File Display
area. Right clicking in the screen will provide the following options, depending
on whether a cut file/marker is open or not:
With Cut File/Marker Open
Option

Use To

View

Access the CutView utility.

Close

Close currently displayed cut file/marker.

About

Display the Cut File Information dialog box.


This dialog box shows the cut file/marker
name and path as well as the length, width,
number of bites, and number of pieces in
the open cut file. The dialog box also allows
you to open/close a cut file/marker or re-run
a file.

Rerun

Reopen and display the last cut file/marker


opened. The system will display cut
file/markers name in the menu.
Note: If you attempt to rerun a currently
displayed cut file/marker, the system will
prompt you to close and reopen that file.

Open a Different
Cutfile

Open a different cut file/marker than the


one currently open.
With Cut File/Marker Closed

Option

Use To

Rerun

Reopen and display the last cut file/marker


opened. The system will display the cut
file/markers name in the menu.
Note: If you attempt to rerun a currently
displayed cut file/marker, the system will
prompt you to close and reopen that file.

Open a Cut file

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Open a cut file/marker.

Getting Acquainted 11

Piece Colors in File Display Area


In the File Display area, piece color changes to differentiate those that have not
yet been cut.
1. Pieces are first white.
2. When a piece is about to be cut, it turns light blue.
3. As the knife cuts a piece, the cut line becomes yellow.
4. After a piece is cut, the piece number turns yellow, too.

Options for GERBERcutter Systems


Gerber provides options to enhance the performance of your GERBERcutter.
Here is a list of hardware and software available. For more information, call your
local Gerber Sales and Service office.

Note:

12 Getting Acquainted

Lateral Drive

Right Side Option (RSO)

CTOT

Barcode Reader

Drill

Bristle Cleaner

Resealer

Power Processor GPP-200

AccuMatch

Automatic Tube Centering

Y Edge Alignment

Not all options are available on all GERBERcutters.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Right Side Option


The Right Side Option (RSO) allows you run the GERBERcutter from the right
side of the cutting table. This lets you spread material with its straight edge on
the right side, which is more practical for some applications. On a right-side
option GERBERcutter, both the operator console and beam control panel are
located on the right side of the cutting table as seen from the take-on end.
An RSO option is available for all GERBERcutter systems. GTxL
GERBERcutter systems can be reconfigured on-site for an RSO option. Shown
below is an S-91 TCW system with the RSO option.

Conveyorized Take-off Table (CTOT)


Depending on the GERBERcutter model, a CTOT is built into the cutter or
available as a moveable unit. Cut pieces and scrap material moves off of the
cutting table onto the CTOT. If the CTOT is placed in front of another table,
pieces can continue to move onto that table for picking and bundling. Otherwise,
cut pieces are picked up directly from the CTOT and scrap material can drop
away into a bin or onto the floor.
Lateral Drive Option
A lateral drive option is available for most GERBERcutter systems. This option
allows one cutter to move from spreading table to spreading table. Included in
the option are:

Platform wheels which ride in tracks in the cutting room floor

Lateral drive controls

Vacuum exhaust stack on mast

Mast and overhead trolley to carry electric cabling

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Getting Acquainted 13

Resealer Option
The resealer uses plastic film to automatically cover, or seal, the cut area of the
lay. Covering areas on the table where pieces have already been cut, improves
cut quality for remaining pieces by maintaining vacuum. Resealers on higher ply
GERBERcutter systems have a bar that can be raised to allow uncompressed
pieces and material to be conveyed off of the table.
Bristle Cleaner Options
Removing lint and debris from the table surface promotes vacuum flow through
the BRISTLE SQUARES. Options available for cleaning the work surface
depend on the GERBERcutter model.

Detachable vacuum hose

Automatic Bristle Cleaning option (See Routine Maintenance chapter)

Bar Code Reader


This option, available for all GERBERcutter systems, allows you to use a bar
code reader to open individual cut files or job queues. The Bar Code Reader is
capable of scanning cut file names 20 characters in length. This was tested using
Code 39 bar codes.
To turn on this option
1. Open the Parameter Manager.
2. The Bar Code Reader Option parameter in the Options and Modes
category must be set to ON.
3. To open job queues with the Bar Code Reader, set the Read Queue
Name Bar Codes parameter in the Queue Manager category to YES.
When this feature is turned on, all bar codes read (except setup files
*.CNF) are assumed to be queues and are automatically opened for
running. If this feature is turned off, each bar code read will be opened
as single cut file.

14 Getting Acquainted

C-200MT Software Users Guide

POWER Processor GPP-200


The POWER Processor lets you change cut files so that the GERBERcutter
works more efficiently. Input to the POWER Processor is a cut file produced on
a marking and grading system such as Gerbers AccuMark or MicroMark.
Output is a modified cut file. Altering a cut file can improve cut quality, cut
speed, material use, and cut file efficiency. The POWER Processor lets you:

Change piece cutting sequence

Change the start point of a piece

Add or remove knife lift and plunge points

Add or remove Opstop points for plaid/stripe matching

AccuMatch

With the Gerber AccuMatch system, you can check match points and make any
necessary adjustments with accuracy and speed. A color video CCD module, or
digital camera, captures images of the spread at all matching positions (Opstops)
in a cut file and displays on-screen an image of the material at this location. You
can accept the match point as shown or reposition a cross hair cursor relative to
the fabric design.
The AccuMatch system option runs on S-3200 and GT 3250 GERBERcutters
and includes the following:
Hardware
Camera with adjustable lens

Light

Mounting fixture

Camera head cover

Cables

High performance video board

Auxiliary slew control (joystick) at operator console

Software
Check with your Gerber Sales representative for the appropriate AccuMatch and
C-200MT software versions for your cutter.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Getting Acquainted 15

Drill Options
All GERBERcutter systems support a drill option. The following options are
available, depending on the cutter model. Gerber also provides drill bits in a
wide variety of sizes and types.
Drill options available:

Electric

Pneumatic/Electric

An example of an electric drill is shown.

Drill Options Electric


Cutter

Drill 1

Drill 2

GTxL, GT 7250,
S-7200, S-91

Electric

Electric

GT 5250, S-5200

Electric

Ask about availability

Drill Options Pneumatic/Electric


Cutter

Drill 1

Drill 2

GT 3250, S-3200

Pneumatic

Electric

Electric (heavy duty)

16 Getting Acquainted

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Centering and Alignment Options


Y Edge Alignment Option
The Y-edge Alignment option uses a roller assembly to track the location of the
edge of a spread along the Y-axis of the cutting table and relay this information
by pneumatics to the cutter. This allows the system to accurately position and cut
pieces.
For information about this option, which is available for S-91 ZVC cutters only,
contact your Service Representative.
Automatic Tube Centering Option
The Automatic Tube Centering option can be used to find, accurately and
automatically, the centerline origin of a spread. Centerline Origin is a C-200MT
feature used for cutting tubular goods or any other pattern that must be centered
on a spread.
Features for Automatic Tube Centering include:

Automatic determination of the center of the spread.

Automatic fabric alignment.

Automatic scaling of the Y-axis.

Adjustable edge sensor width.

Edge sensor diagnostic for setting up the option.

This option is available for GT 5250/7250 and S-5200/7200 cutters except those
with the RSO or Drill options. For more information, contact your Gerber
Service Representative.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Getting Acquainted 17

18 Getting Acquainted

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Basic Cut Processing


The following sections explain how to use C-200MT features to perform basic
cutting procedures. For additional information on steps performed at the cutter,
refer to the GERBERcutter operators manual or Getting Started.
At Cutter

At Operator
Console

1. Turn on cutter
2. Enable
servo power

3. Initialize cutter

4. Position first bite


of spread on table
5. Select setup

6. Open cut file/


marker

7. Turn on vacuum
8. Position
laser light

9.Set marker origin

10. Select
cutting speed
or feed rate

11. Turn on
knife motor
12. Start processing
cut file/marker

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Basic Cut Processing 1

Note:

Read the safety precautions at the beginning of this users guide


before performing any operation at the cutter. Also refer to safety
precautions in the GERBERcutter operators manual or Getting
Started.

Turning on the Cutter


Depending on your GERBERcutter, circuit breaker(s) and/or a switch located
outside of the vacuum and electric enclosure(s) allow you to turn power ON or
OFF for the FEP (or PC), vacuum system, C-200 cutter controller, servo motors,
and conveyor. Enclosure(s) may be located at the side or at the end of the cutter
or on a separate table along side of the cutter.
To turn on the main power circuit breaker for your cutter, refer to the
GERBERcutter operator's manual or Getting Started.
Enabling Servo Power
Pressing the Servo Power Enable switch turns on power to the servo motors.
These motors move the cutter head and beam during cut processing.

To enable servo power

1. Make sure that cutter power is turned on and the C-200MT program is
running.
2. When prompted, press the Servo Power Enable switch. Depending on
your GERBERcutter, this switch may be located at the operator console
or at the beam control panel.
The servo motors are turned on and gauges display across the top of the
Main Cutter Control screen.

2 Basic Cut Processing

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Initializing the Cutter


Use the Initialize feature to identify the zero position for the table in X and Y.
This is also called the home position and is written as (0,0). Limit switches tell
the C-200MT when the cutter head reaches the (0, 0) position.
For information about basic cutter concepts, such as home and X,Y positions,
see the GERBERcutter operator's manual or Getting Started.
Note:

You must initialize the cutter before processing markers. Otherwise, an


error message displays.

To initialize the cutter

1. Make sure that the cutter power is turned on, the C-200MT program is
running, and the servo power is enabled.
2. Do one of the following:
Press the Initialize switch on the beam control panel.

Press the Initialize key on the keyboard.

From the Cutter menu, select Initialize.


Click the Initialize button on the tool bar.
The cutter head and beam moves to the (0,0) position on the table and
the origin is reported in the System Messages box.
Note:

If the cutter is set up for the Right Side Option, the cutter head
and beam moves to the right side of the table.

Positioning the First Bite


After the cutter is initialized, use the jog switch at the take-on end of the cutter to
advance the spread (material) into cutting position on the table. This will be the
first bite. Then cover the spread with plastic film. For specific information on
spreading a marker and positioning the first bite, refer to the GERBERcutter
operator's manual or Getting Started.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Basic Cut Processing 3

Selecting a Setup
A setup is a file containing parameters that enable or disable various features,
options, and modes depending on such considerations as ply height, material
characteristics, or marker width. Use the Setup List page to select a new Setup
from the list of all Current Setups available.
To select a setup

1. Do one of the following:

Press the Settings key on the keyboard.

Click the Settings button on the Cutter Main Control screen.


Click the Settings button in the tool bar.
From the Setup menu, select Settings.
2. If some other page is selected in the System Setup dialog box, click the
Setup List tab.
3. Use the pointing device to select the Name of the setup you want.
4. To select this setup as the current setup, click the Apply or the OK
button. Apply loads the new setup and leaves the screen open; OK
loads the new setup and closes the screen. Selecting another setup page
is the same as clicking Apply.
5. When prompted to Activate Selected Setup, check your changes and
then click the Yes button.
6. When satisfied with the changes, press Enter or click the OK button.

4 Basic Cut Processing

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Opening a Cut File/Marker


Use the Marker Open feature to select marker or cut file and open it for
processing.
You can enter a cut file/marker name directly or choose from a list of available
files. You also can search for piece names using the * and ? wildcards. For
example, to find files with names similar to SUIT123, SUIT456, and SUITABC,
type SUIT*.
Default Directories/Storage Areas
For cut data files the default directory is C:\USER. For AccuMark markers or
cut data, when you first open this dialog box after starting the C-200MT
program, the first storage area on the C: drive is selected by default. After you
make a selection and until you shut down C-200MT, the default storage area for
AccuMark markers or cut files will be the last storage area from which you
selected AccuMark data.
To open a marker

1. Do one of the following:

Press the Open Marker key on the keyboard.

From the Marker menu, select Open.


Click the Open Marker button on the tool bar.
The Marker Open screen displays.
Note:

If Marker Size: Use Auto Calculate is turned OFF and certain


features, such as Right Side Option, are turned ON, you will
be prompted to enter a new marker width. Press Enter to
accept the marker width or type a new marker width and then
press Enter.

2. To change drives and directories or storage areas, you can use the
pointing device, Tab key, or arrow keys to make your selections.
3. To select the Type of File you want to open, click on the button marked
with an arrow to the right of that field. Choices are:
AccuMark cut
AccuMark marker
All (other cut) files
C-200MT Software Users Guide

Basic Cut Processing 5

4. Select the cut file/marker you want to process.


5. If you selected an AccuMark marker, you may be prompted to change
cutter and notch parameter tables. See the next sections.
6. Press Enter or click the OK button to return to the Main Cutter Control
screen.
7. The first bite of the selected cut file/marker is processed and displays in
the File Display area. Verify that this is the marker you want to cut.
Changing AccuMark Parameter Tables
To make changes to the Cutter and Notch parameter tables that are associated
with the marker file currently being opened, one or both parameters in the
Security category must be enabled.
Note:

Supervisors can change the access level of these parameters using the
Advanced button in the Parameter Manager.

To select different parameter table(s)

1. Make sure the User Parameter Table Selecting parameter is enabled.


2. Open an AccuMark marker.
The AccuMark Parameter Table Selection dialog box displays with the
name of the current marker displayed.
Note:

Edit buttons are not available unless the User Parameter


Table Editing parameter is also enabled.

3. To check parameter tables that are being used by another marker or to


select a different marker, click the Select button for that item.
4. To select a different Cutter parameter table, click the Select button for
that item. The name of the new table displays.
5. To select a different Notch parameter table, click the Select button for
that item. The name of the new table displays. If you decide to use the
internal Notch parameter table instead, click the Internal button.
6. Press Enter or click OK.
The marker opens in the Cut File display area.

6 Basic Cut Processing

C-200MT Software Users Guide

To edit parameter table(s)

1. Make sure the User Parameter Table Editing parameter is enabled.


2. Open an AccuMark marker.
The AccuMark Parameter Table Selection dialog box displays with the
name of the current marker displayed.
Note: Select buttons are not available unless the User Parameter Table
Selecting parameter is also enabled.
3. To edit the Cutter parameter table:
a) Click the Edit button for that item.
b) When prompted that changes you are about to make will overwrite
the parameter table file, click OK. The Cutter Parameter Table
Editor displays.
c) Make desired changes and press Enter or click OK.
4. To edit the Notch parameter table:
a) Click the Edit button for that item.
b) When prompted that changes you are about to make will overwrite
the parameter table file, click OK. The Notch Parameter Table
Editor displays.
c) Select the Notch type you want to make changes for.
d) Enter values for Perimeter Width, Inside Width, and/or Notch
Depth.
e) Select and edit each Notch type you want to change, and then press
Enter or click OK.
5. Press Enter or click OK.
The marker opens in the Cut File display area.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Basic Cut Processing 7

Using Rerun
Use the Marker Rerun feature to reopen the previously selected cut file/marker.
To rerun the last marker

1. From the Marker menu, select Rerun. The cut file/marker opened
previously displays in the File Display area.
Turning on the Vacuum
Use the Vacuum feature to turn table vacuum ON in order to process markers.
When finished cutting, you can repeat the following procedure to turn OFF table
vacuum.
Vacuum System parameters that control the vacuum system are set using the
Parameter Manager.
To turn the vacuum on in order to cut

1. Make sure that the first bite is positioned on the table and the correct
cut file/marker is open.
2. Do one of the following:
= Press the Vacuum On/Off switch on the beam control panel.
=

Press the Vacuum key on the keyboard.

= From the Cutter menu, select Vacuum.


= Click the Vacuum button on the tool bar.

8 Basic Cut Processing

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Positioning the Laser Light


If the laser origin light is not turned on, refer to the GERBERcutter operator's
manual or Getting Started to turn it on. The laser origin light is located on the
cutting head.
WARNING!

The origin light uses a Class IIIa laser product. To avoid


injury to your eyes, do not look at the laser at any time. Also, do
not place any reflective material, such as mirrors, polished
steel, or jewelry on the cutting table.

At the beam control panel, press the Slew Enable and Arrow switches to position
the laser origin light at the corner of the spread closest to the X0,Y0 values on
the cutting table.
Setting the Marker Origin
Use the Origin feature to establish the origin for a marker.
To set the marker origin

1. After positioning the laser light at the corner of the spread as explained
above, do one of the following:
= Press the Origin button on the beam control panel.
=

Press the Origin key on the keyboard.

= From the Cutter menu, select Origin.


= Click the Origin button on the tool bar.
The origin is reported in the System Messages box, where x.xxx and
y.yyy are the absolute table coordinates (origin) for the lower left
corner of the marker.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Basic Cut Processing 9

Selecting Cutting Speed


Select the appropriate cutting speed for processing the open cut file/marker.
Depending on your GERBERcutter, use the Cutting Speed dial at the beam
control panel or the Feedrate slider on the C-200MT Main Control screen. Refer
to the GERBERcutter Application manual or Getting Started for recommended
settings for cutting speed.
Turning on the Knife Motor
At the beam control panel, turn on the knife motor. Refer to the Safety
Precautions chapter in the GERBERcutter operator's manual or Getting Started.
WARNING!

The knife blade is very sharp. Use extreme caution when


working near the knife blade.

Processing a Cut File/Marker


Use the Start feature to begin processing, or cutting, a cut file/marker.
To start processing a cut file/marker:

1. Make sure you have completed all of the previous procedures in this
chapter.
2. Do one of the following:
= Press the Start switch on the beam control panel.
=

Press the Start key on the keyboard.

= From the Cutter menu, select Start.


= Click the Start button on the tool bar.
The piece being cut is outlined in the File Display are and the current
piece and bite number display in the System Status window.
3. When prompted that processing is complete, press Enter or click OK.

10 Basic Cut Processing

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Trim Cut
Use the Trim Cut feature to cut across a spread in order to trim away excess
material and plastic.
To use Trim Cut

1. Do one of the following:


= Press the Trim Cut switch (marked by scissors) on the beam
control panel
= From the Cutter menu, select Trim Cut.
At the beam control panel, the Error Warning Light starts flashing to
indicate you are in Trim Cut mode.
2. Immediately, press and hold the Slew Enable button while using the
joystick or pressing slew keys to make required cut(s).
3. To exit Trim Cut mode, do one of the following:
= At the beam control panel, press the
Stop switch or wait
until the Error Warning Light stops flashing.
= At the operator console, press Esc.
Note:

C-200MT Software Users Guide

To position and lower the knife before using the Null KI


command for GERBERcutters that support Knife
Intelligence, turn the feed rate to zero and then follow the
steps above.

Basic Cut Processing 11

12 Basic Cut Processing

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Cutter Parameter Table Editor


You can access this editor when opening an AccuMark marker for cutting on a
GERBERcutter. Fields correspond to fields in the AccuMark Cutter Parameter
Table.
Note:

Field

To specify the Notch Parameter Table, use the AccuMark Parameter


Table Selection dialog box.

Description

Cutter Type

The cutter type does not automatically change the default values of the
table.
STATIC is a type of GERBERcutter that has a fixed cutting surface
equal to the table length.
CONVEYOR TABLE is a type of GERBERcutter that has a continuous
belt for the cutting surface. As the spread is fed on from one side, the cut
pieces come off the other.
TRAVELLING CONVEYOR is a GERBERcutter that moves from one
spreading table to the next on floor rails.

Table Length

Usable table length.

Table Width

Usable table width.

X Scale

Determines the scale of the cut data in Y direction on the table.

Y Scale

Determines the scale of the cut data in X direction on the table.

Perimeter
Tool

Choices are:
KNIFE to cut the marker
PEN to plot the marker if the cutter is equipped with a pen
BLANK the perimeter will not be cut or plotted

First Bundle
Code

The default bundle code is A and can be edited with numeric or


alphanumeric values.

Edge
Tolerance

Used for tubular goods. If the piece perimeter is placed within the given
tolerance, the cutter will dry haul for the fold. The pattern dimensions are
increased to the defined value.

Maximum
Move

This safety feature controls the cutting head on long straight lines. Data
points are added during cut process if a straight segment is over the
indicated value.

Fold Overcut

Used for tubular goods. The cutter will cut the defined amount past the
edge of the marker on folded pieces. This is to make sure the piece is
fully cut. The folded pieces must have the piece option F assigned.

Cut Small
Slow

Used to ensure good quality on small pieces by cutting them at the


indicated percent of full speed (increments of 5 with a minimum of
60%). This prevents pushing; refer to the Applications manual for your
cutter.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Cutter Parameter Table Editor 1

Field

Description

Bite Clip
Amount

The length of a cut made in the selvage of the goods. Used to reorigin the
cutter head at the beginning of a bite for a conveyor. See Bite
Parameters.

Park in Bite

When cutting lofty goods, the cutting head needs to be moved to the edge
of the table when the GERBERcutter advances. Otherwise, when the
vacuum releases, the goods are no longer condensed and could be
damaged. This is calculated based on 0.00 as the origin. To move the
head to the far side of the fabric, enter the width plus an additional
amount to ensure the head moves off entirely.
See Bite Parameters.

Bite Length

Indicates a specific bite length for the available cutting surface. See Bite
Parameters.

Bi-L/R Cut

NO means the option will not be activated


YES indicates lefts will be cut in opposite direction from rights.

Bi-L/R Mirr
Cut

NO indicates mirrored pieces will be cut in clockwise direction


YES indicates one half of mirrored piece will be cut in opposite direction
from the other half on a common perimeter point of the mirror line. The
cutter will dry haul back to the center back hem and resume cutting in the
counter clockwise direction, finishing at the center.

Cut Small
Pieces First

NO means the option will not be activated


YES indicates the pieces not identified as major pieces in AccuMark will
be cut first.

AutoMatch

YES indicates the cutter has AutoMatch option.

Cut Net Parts

YES cuts pieces in a defined block for blockfusing.


NO cuts the block.

Variable
Biting

Indicates that bite lengths change according to the size and location of
pieces in the marker.
Choices are:
Yes, for a conveyor table so the system calculates the bite according to
the length of the cutting table and the pieces.
No, for a conveyor table when you determine and enter the fixed bite
length at the cutter.
No, for a static cutter.

Labeller

Check to use a labeller.

Label Width

Usually 1.25 inches; the labeller can override these values

Label Height

Usually 2 inches; the labeller can override these values

Label Margin

Usually .25; the labeller can override these values

Label/Tool

These two drop-down list boxes establish what tool the GERBERcutter
uses for specific internal labels. Possible tools are KNIFE, PEN,
DRILL1, DRILL2, OPSTOP, LABELLER, and blank. A blank field
allows an internal label to be turned off. The default labels are: C
Opstop;D Drill1;I Knife

2 Cutter Parameter Table Editor

C-200MT Software Users Guide

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Cutter Parameter Table Editor 3

Advanced Cutting Features


Biting and Advanced Cutting Features
Besides allowing you to process a cut file/marker using the basic steps,
the C-200MT program provides commands, parameters, and utilities for specific
cutting applications. Additional steps and parameter changes are required for
these features.

Dry Run

Fabric Alignment

Marker Stacking

Marker Flip

Check Origin

OpStops

Mirroring Options

Center Line Origin

Clipping Window

Preprocess Drills

Data Scale Factor

Contiguous Cutting

Continuous Cutting

Pause Between Bites

Run Time Biting

Data Format

Automatic Tube Centering

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Advanced Cutting Features 1

Using Dry Run


Use the Dry Run feature to check the cut file/marker by processing without
cutting. The laser origin light can be selected while operating in the Dry Run
mode by using the Dry Run Tool is Light parameter in the Options and Modes
category.
Additional step(s) required for this feature

1. Do one of the following:


= From the Cutter menu, select Dry Run.
= Right click in the gray area next to the gauges to display setting
options. Click Dry Run.
2. Follow the procedures for processing a cut file/marker.
Fabric Alignment
Use this feature to align a spread that is skewed relative to the table.
Additional step(s) required for this feature

1. Turn off the Check Origin parameter in the Options and Modes
category.
2. Do one of the following:

At BCP

Define a new
angle

Slew to a point along


the spread. Press the F2
switch twice.

From C-200MT Main Screen

From the Cutter menu, select


Fabric Alignment.
Or right click in the gray area next
to gauges to display setting
options. Click Setup a Fabric
Alignment Angle.
Then do one of the following:
- At the BCP, slew to a point along
the spread. Click the Light
Position button.
- Type to enter an angle and then
click OK or press Enter. A button
displays, marked Angle = xxx.

2 Advanced Cutting Features

C-200MT Software Users Guide

At BCP

Use a previous
angle

Press the F2 switch and


then press the Origin
switch.

From C-200MT Main Screen

From the Cutter menu, select


Fabric Alignment.
Or right click in the gray area next
to gauges to display setting
options. Click Setup a Fabric
Alignment Angle.
Click the Recall button. A button
displays, marked Angle = xxx.

3. Follow the procedures for cutting a cut file/marker.


Marker Stacking
Use this feature to cut two markers or cut files side by side at the same time,
especially narrow markers designed for tubular goods. The cut file/marker nearer
to the operator console is called the bottom marker; the farther cut file/marker is
called the top marker.
Parameters for this feature include:

Marker Flip

Marker Flip Top

Marker Stacking Reorder

Marker Stacking Reorder Channel

Additional step(s) required for this feature

1. For the current setup, use the Parameter Manager to edit the above
parameters in the Options and Modes category.
2. Spread two lengths of material on the table. Spreads must be similar
enough so that one setup can be used to cut both.
3. From the Marker menu, select Open to open a cut file/marker.
4. Click the Marker Stacking button.
5. Select the bottom and top marker.
6. Set the origin for the bottom and then the top marker. X,Y origin values
for each marker display in the status area of the Main Cutter Control
screen.
7. Follow the procedures for cutting a cut file/marker.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Advanced Cutting Features 3

Using Marker Flip


Use this feature to rotate single or stacked marker(s) 180 degrees and renumber
pieces in order to cut from take-off end to the take-on end.
Additional step(s) required for this feature

1. For the current setup, use Parameter Manager to turn ON the Marker
Flip (and Marker Flip Top) parameter(s) in the Options and Modes
category.
2. Follow the procedures for cutting a cut file/marker.
Note:

For stacked markers, Marker Flip affects the bottom marker and
Marker Flip Top affects the top marker.

Using Check Origin


Use this feature to check that the cut file/marker fits on the usable cutting
surface.
Additional step(s) required for this feature

1. For the current setup, use Parameter Manager to turn ON the Check
Origin parameter in the Options and Modes category.
2. If the system prompts Bad Origin (relative to the marker and table size)
immediately after pressing Start, reposition the cutter head within the
acceptable range.
3. Set the origin and press Start again.
4. Follow the procedures for cutting a marker.

4 Advanced Cutting Features

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Using OPSTOPs
Use this feature when cutting a cut file/marker with optional stops (Opstops) for
plaid/stripe matching.
Hints When Working with Opstops
Split Pieces - Opstop can handle virtually any type of cut file regardless
of the number of split pieces. In order to properly process Opstops that
occur on split pieces, Run Time Biting must be turned on.

Piece Cut Sequence - Any piece cut sequence can also be handled when
using opstops.

Recovery - The Restore State feature properly restores piece origins that
have been adjusted using Opstops. Also, Piece Recut can now be used in
conjunction with Opstop to match a single piece.

Preset Opstops are utilized for plaid/stripe matching.

The CutView utility reads and displays M01 (Opstops).

Additional step(s) required for this feature

1. For the current setup, use Parameter Manager to turn ON one or more
parameters in the OPSTOP and Report Options category category.
2. When cutting stops, reposition the cutter head so that the piece cuts
correctly. Press Start to continue processing.
3. Follow the procedures for cutting a cut file/marker.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Advanced Cutting Features 5

Using Mirroring Options


Use this feature to rotate a cut file/marker along the X and Y axes (or Y axis)
without renumbering pieces.
Additional step(s) required for this feature

1. For the current setup, use Parameter Manager to edit parameters in the
Mirror Image and Clipping Window category.
2. Follow the procedures for cutting a cut file/marker.
Note:

Mirror Image can not be used on a conveyorized


GERBERcutter system.

Using Center Line Origin


Use this feature to set a center for the pattern when cutting tubular goods or
symmetrical patterned fabric. This feature can be used with Marker Stacking and
Data Scaling.
Additional step(s) required for this feature

1. For the current setup, use Parameter Manager to turn ON one of the
following parameters in the Options and Modes category:
Center Line Origin Center Point
Center Line Origin Edge Points
2. Open the cut file/marker to process.
3. Do one of the following:
When using Center Point, move the origin light to the center of
the spread. Then set the origin.
When using Edge Points, move the origin light to the bottom
corner of the spread and then set the origin. Repeat for the top
corner of the spread.
4. Follow the procedures for cutting a cut file/marker.

6 Advanced Cutting Features

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Using Clipping Window


Use this feature to prevent the knife from cutting outside of one or more edges of
the spread (for single or stacked cut file/markers).
Additional step(s) required for this feature

1. To turn Clipping Window ON, do one of the following:


Right click in the gray area next to the gauges to display Settings
OptionsSettings_Options. Click Setup a Clipping Window.
From the Cutter menu, select Clipping Window. Then select
Clipping ON.
2. Open the cut file/marker to process.
3. For the lower (or a single) cut file/marker, do one of the following:
Follow the instructions to position the beam and set the Origin
for first the lower and then upper boundaries.
Type a new boundary for lower and/or upper limit(s). Settings
are relative to the marker. Click OK or press Enter.
4. If using marker stacking, repeat for the upper marker.
A button displays on-screen, indicating that Clipping Window is ON.
5. Follow the procedures for cutting a cut file/marker.
Using Preprocess Drills
Use this feature to process drills before cutting pieces in a bite.
Additional step(s) required for this feature

1. For the current setup, use Parameter Manager to turn ON the


Preprocess Drills parameter in the Options and Modes category.
2. Follow the procedures for cutting a cut file/marker.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Advanced Cutting Features 7

Using Contiguous Cutting


Use this feature to automatically reorigin for the next marker in the open queue.
Additional step(s) required for this feature

1. For the current setup, use Parameter Manager to turn ON the


Contiguous Cut parameter in the Selvage Cut/Contiguous Cut category.
2. Start processing.
3. Follow the procedures for cutting a marker.
Using Continuous Cutting
Use this option to continue to cut while the conveyor is moving to increase
overall throughput or create gradual flow onto the take-off table. This feature is
not for use on S-91 cutters.
Note:

The Field Service level parameter, Continuous Cutting Installed, must be


turned on before using this option.

Additional step(s) required for this feature

1. For the current setup, use Parameter Manager to turn ON the


Continuous Cutting parameter in the Bite Parameters category.
2. Follow the procedures for cutting a marker.

8 Advanced Cutting Features

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Using Pause Between Bites


Use this feature to adjust fabric alignment angle or to set marker origin between
each bite.
Additional step(s) required for this feature

1. For the current setup, use Parameter Manager to turn ON the Pause
Between Bites parameter in the Bite Parameters category.
2. Follow the procedures for cutting a cut file/marker.
3. When cutting stops, complete any necessary procedure.
4. Process the next bite.
Run Time Biting
Using Run Time Biting
The Run Time Biting feature bites the cut file/marker, designating sections of the
marker for automatic cutting. Each bite fits on the cutter table and can be cut at
one time. Run Time Biting can take place either while:

Cutting a cut file/marker

Preprocessing a cut file/marker with Bite Generation

Bite Generation
A Bite Generation option has been added to the PreProcessor screen for use with
Reorder and Path Optimization. It is recommended that:

Bite Generation be turned ON when using Reorder or Path Optimization

Run Time Biting be turned OFF when using Bite Generation

To setup to bite a cut file/marker

1. Open the Parameter Manager.


2. In the Bite Parameters category, turn the Run Time Biting parameter
ON.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Advanced Cutting Features 9

3. Do one of the following:


To use variable length biting, turn the Variable Length Biting
parameter ON.
To use static length biting, make sure the Variable Length Biting
parameter is OFF.
4. Edit other Bite parameters as required, such as Minimum Bite Length
and Maximum Bite Length that determine the minimum and maximum
bite lengths for Run Time Biting.
5. To ensure that sectional Opstops (placed in empty pieces by
Microdynamics OPTICUT systems) are processed before pieces in the
section are cut, use the OPSTOP Section Processing parameter in the
Bite Parameters category.
6. Save the changes.
Static Length Biting
Static length biting divides the cut file/marker into bites of equal lengths. If a
piece extends beyond the bite, the cutter splits the piece and only cuts the
portion of the piece that fits within the bite. When the cutter has finished cutting
all pieces or parts of pieces for that bite, the conveyor advances the next bite.
The cutter then cuts the second portion of the piece.

10 Advanced Cutting Features

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Variable Length Biting


When Variable Length Biting is turned on, the cutter only splits those pieces too
large to fit on the cutting table. This feature is useful to:

Eliminate split pieces in a cut file/marker requiring pieces not be split

Reduce the need for Opstops to match plaids and stripes in split pieces.

Using Variable Length Biting, the cutter cuts all pieces in a given bite that
completely fit on the table. The conveyor then advances to the leftmost uncut
piece. It cuts that piece and any other whole pieces on the cutting table. The
conveyor again advances to the leftmost uncut piece. This step is repeated until
all pieces are cut. Variable length bites usually are shorter and occur more often
than static length bites.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Advanced Cutting Features 11

Identifying Data Format


Settings in the Data Format/Scaling and RSO category identify the format used
by your cut files. These are:

Data Format

AAMA Data Conversion

Using Data Format


Use this parameter to set one of the following GERBERcutter data formats:

3.3 English

4.2 English (default)

5.1 Metric

The digit before the decimal point shows how many places are reserved for the
whole number. The digit after the decimal point shows how many places are
reserved for the decimal.
To change Data Format

Note:

The format setting must match the format of your GERBER cut
files.

1. Open the Parameter Manager.


2. Edit the setting for Data Format.
3. If you want this to be the default format, save the change to all setups.
Or, If this is a temporary change, click OK and process the marker with
the different format. Then repeat steps 1 and 2 to return to the default
format.

12 Advanced Cutting Features

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Using AAMA Data Conversion


Use this parameter to process AAMA data.
To process AAMA data

1. Open the Parameter Manager.


2. Enable the AAMA Data Conversion parameter. Save changes
permanently or temporarily as explained above.
3. Disable this parameter when done processing AAMA data.
Using Data Scale Factor
Use this command in the Cutter menu to change scaling to adjust the size of a
cut file/marker to the size of the available material.
Calculate the X data scale factor by dividing the usable material length by the
marker length. Calculate the Y data scale factor by dividing the usable material
width by the marker width.
To create a setup file with default scale factors other than zero, use Parameter
Manager to edit X Data Scale Factor and/or Y Data Scale Factor in the Data
Format/Scaling and RSO category.
To change data scale factor for a cut file/marker

1. Do one of the following:


From the Cutter menu, select Data Scaling.
Right click in the gray area next to the gauges to display Settings
Options. Click Setup Data Scaling.
2. In the dialog box, enter values for X and/or Y scaling. Then press
Enter or click OK.
A button displays, marked similar to X Scale = x.xx.
3. To turn the option off, click on the button displayed for this option.
CAUTION:

C-200MT Software Users Guide

To avoid cutting the next marker incorrectly, return data


scale factor to 100% after cutting the current cut
file/marker.

Advanced Cutting Features 13

Automatic Tube Centering


CAUTION:

To prevent erratic behavior and possible damage to the spread,


the Centerline Origin Center Point and Centerline Origin Edge
Points parameters must not be turned on at the same time

Setting Up for Automatic Tube Centering


Before Automatic Tube Centering can be used to determine centerline origin, it
must be calibrated to the cutting table. During this procedure, various parameters
must be set. For information on setting up for Automatic Tube Centering refer to
document part number 083806000.
To set up for Automatic Tube Centering

1. Set up parameters in the Options and Modes category, using procedures


in the documentation that comes with this option.
To use the Edge Finders to find the origin and fabric alignment

1. Complete set up procedures.


2. Follow procedures in document part number 083806000.
3. If using Marker Stacking with this option, refer to hints in the
documentation.

14 Advanced Cutting Features

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Recovery
Recovery after Interrupted Cutting
Commands in the Recover menu allow the cutter to resume cutting after a power
loss, EStop, or a system power down interrupts cut processing. An EStop occurs
whenever cutter motion is stopped by pressing one of the emergency stop (EStop)
switches or buttons located on the cutter. The reason for the power down displays as
an on-screen error message.
The Recover menu commands are:

Restore State

Restore Origin

Bite Search

Piece Search

Piece Recut

Marker and Cutter commands related to recovery are:

Marker/Close

Cutter/Move to Origin

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Recovery 1

Before Using Recovery Commands


Commands in the Recover menu allow the cutter to resume cutting after a power
loss, EStop, or a system power down interrupts cut processing. An EStop occurs
whenever cutter motion is stopped by pressing one of the Emergency Stop buttons
located on the cutter. The reason for the power down displays on-screen as an error
message. See the Error Messages chapter.
Before using any of the recovery commands you need to perform the following
procedures.
To correct the condition before recovery

1. Do one of the following:


= If the operator console lost power, turn on the main power supply
and start up the C-200MT program. Then enable servo power and
initialize the cutter.
= If an EStop occurred, press Enter to clear the message from the
screen. Enable servo power.
= If an accidental system power down occurred, press Enter to clear
any error message from the screen. Restart Windows NT, if
necessary, and start the
C-200MT program. Then enable servo power and initialize the
cutter.

2 Recovery

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Restore State
Use this command in the Recover menu to return to the last piece and bite that was
being cut before a power loss, EStop, or system power down.
This feature automatically does all of the following:

Reopens the marker

Restores the setup

Restores a Job Queue

Restores Fabric Alignment

Restores the origin

Searches for the piece being cut before the cutter stopped

To restore state of last marker

1. Make sure that the condition that stopped cutting is corrected.


2. Do one of the following:

Press the Restore State key on the keyboard.

From the Recover menu, select Restore State.


Click the Restore State button on the tool bar.
Note:

If continuous cutting was being used, a message prompts to


reposition the cutter head on a bite clip.

3. If the marker and piece information displayed in the Restore State dialog
box is correct, press Enter or click the OK button.
Note:

If this information is not correct, you can use the procedure for
restoring state manually.

The marker is opened and the System Message box prompts that the state is
restored. In the System Status window, verify that the correct piece and bite
number display.
4. If correct, start processing.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Recovery 3

Restoring State Manually


Instead of using the Restore State feature, you can manually restore state using the
following steps.
To restore state manually

1. To set the origin, do one of the following:


2. Position the origin light at the top of the bite clip for the last bite cut. Set a
new origin.
3. If restoring the first bite, use the origin or set origin as normal.
4. Select the correct setup to configure your cutter.
5. Open the marker.
6. Use the Piece Search feature.
Restore Origin
Use command in the Recover menu to restore the origin point.
To restore the last origin

1. Make sure that the condition that stopped cutting is corrected.


2. From the Recover menu, select Restore Origin.
The origin is reported in the System Messages box, where x.xxx and y.yyy
are the absolute table coordinates (origin) for the restored origin point.

4 Recovery

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Bite Search
Use this command in the Recover menu to find and cut a specific bite in a marker.
To find and cut a specific bite
1. If cutting was interrupted, make sure that the condition is corrected and the
marker you want to cut is open.
2. From the Recover menu, select Bite Search.
3. In the Bite Search dialog box, type to enter the Bite to Search to. Press
Enter or click the OK button.
The System Messages box reports that the requested bite is found and gives
the piece number of the first piece in that bite.
Piece Search
Use this command in the Recover menu to find and cut a specific piece in a marker.
This is useful after an EStop or system power down, especially if the Restore State
command does not find the correct piece to cut.
To find and cut a specific piece
1. If cutting was interrupted, make sure that the condition is corrected and the
marker you want to cut is open.
2. Do one of the following:

Press the Piece Search key on the keyboard.

From the Recover menu, select Piece Search.


Click the Piece Search button on the tool bar.
3. In the Piece Search dialog box, type to enter the Piece to Search to. Then
press Enter or click the OK button.
The Marker Plot screen shows the piece in the marker. The System
Messages box reports that the requested piece was found and gives the bite
number it is in.
Note:

C-200MT Software Users Guide

When the piece being searched for is split across two bites, a
dialog box displays. If you want to begin cutting the part of the
piece located in the first of these two bites, click the Yes button.
Otherwise, click the No button.

Recovery 5

Piece Recut
Use command in the Recover menu to recut a specific piece in a marker that might
not have been cut properly.
To recut a specific piece

1. Set the origin.


2. Position material on the table.
3. From the Recover menu, select Piece Recut.
4. In the Piece Recut dialog box, type the piece number to recut. Then press
Enter or click the OK button.
The piece you want to recut displays alone in the Marker Plot screen. The
two line output display reports that the requested piece was found and gives
the Bite number it is in.
5. Make sure that this is the piece you want to cut.
6. Position the cutter head near the lower left corner of the area to be cut.
7. Start processing.
Closing a Marker
Use this feature to close a marker if it is necessary to perform a command not
allowed while the cutter is in one of the following cutter status modes:
= Auto Mode
= Manual Mode Paused
This feature can also be used when selecting a new job while a queue is running.
To close a marker

1. If cutting is in progress, press the

Stop button.

2. From the Marker menu, select Close.

6 Recovery

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Move to Origin
Use this feature to move the cutter head to the last established origin. You can use
this command whenever you want to verify the origin; for example, after using
Fabric Alignment.
To move to the last established origin

1. Do one of the following:

Press the Move to Origin key on the keyboard.

From the Cutter menu, select Move to Origin.


Click the Move to Origin button on the tool bar.
The cutter head and beam moves to the last established origin that is
reported in the System Messages box.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Recovery 7

8 Recovery

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Customizing Setups
The C-200MT program provides default or preset setups for running a cutter. A
setup is a file containing parameters that enable or disable various features,
options, and modes depending on such considerations as ply height, material
characteristics, or marker width. Preset setups are suitable for a wide variety of
applications. You can also customize a setup for the specific cutting
requirements of your operation.

Settings
Use the Settings command in the Setup menu to access the System Setup screen.
This screen has the following pages that can be selected by clicking on the
appropriate tab.

Setup List Use to select a setup

Setup Features Use to turn various features on or off

Preset Setup Use to select or customize a preset setup

Using Setup Screen Buttons


Click the Cancel button at the bottom of the page (or press Esc) to exit the
System Setup screen as long as no changes have been made to a setup. How to
use the OK, Apply, and Save buttons depends on the setup page you are using.
In general, click Apply to make a selection but not close the setup dialog box or
click OK to make a selection and close the setup dialog box.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Customizing Setups 1

Selecting a Setup
A setup is a file containing parameters that enable or disable various features,
options, and modes depending on such considerations as ply height, material
characteristics, or marker width. Use the Setup List page to select a new Setup
from the list of all Current Setups available.
To select a setup

1. Do one of the following:

Press the Settings key on the keyboard.

Click the Settings button on the Cutter Main Control screen.


Click the Settings button in the tool bar.
From the Setup menu, select Settings.
2. If some other page is selected, click the Setup List tab.
3. Use the pointing device to select the Name of the setup you want.
4. To select this setup as the current setup, click the Apply or the OK
button. Apply loads the new setup and leaves the screen open; OK
loads the new setup and closes the screen. Selecting another setup page
is the same as clicking Apply.
5. When prompted to Activate Selected Setup, check your changes and
then click the Yes button.
6. When satisfied with the changes, press Enter or click the OK button.
Selecting a Preset Setup
Preset setups are defaults built into the C-200MT program which are suitable for
typical cutting needs. These setups have parameter settings based on the
following characteristics of the material being cut:

2 Customizing Setups

Ply height

Hardness

Fusibility (degree to which materials fuse together during cutting)

Porosity

C-200MT Software Users Guide

To select a preset setup

1. Do one of the following:

Press the Settings key on the keyboard.

Click the Settings button on the Cutter Main Control screen.


Click the Settings button in the tool bar.
From the Setup menu, select Settings.
2. If some other page is selected, click the Preset Setup tab.
3. Describe the material being cut by clicking with the pointing device to
reposition each slider bar appropriately.

Note:

When the slider bar is at the top of the slider, the maximum
preset value for a description is selected. When at the bottom,
the minimum value is selected.

The preset setup which most closely relates to these characteristics is


selected and the Setup name displays in the box at the top of the page.
4. To use this preset setup as the current Setup, click the Apply or the OK
button. Apply saves your selection and leaves the screen open; OK
saves your selections and closes the screen.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Customizing Setups 3

Turning Parameters ON/OFF


Use the Setup Features page in the System Setup screen to turn cutter features
that are commonly used ON or OFF in setups.
To turn parameters ON or OFF for the current setup

1. Do one of the following:

Press the Settings key on the keyboard.

Click the Settings button on the Cutter Main Control screen.


Click the Settings button in the tool bar.
From the Setup menu, select Settings.
2. If some other page is selected, click the Setup Features tab.
3. Click on the arrow button to the right of the Category field. From the
drop-down menu, select one of the following categories:
Bite Parameters
Data Format /Scaling and RSO
Ignore Codes
Mirror Image and Clipping Window
OPSTOP and Report Options
Queue Manager
Options and Modes
Selvage Cut/Contiguous Cut
Vacuum System
4. Commonly-used parameters display for the selected category. Click the
appropriate check box to turn a parameter ON or OFF. A parameter
that is checked is turned ON.

4 Customizing Setups

C-200MT Software Users Guide

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to change other parameters in different categories.


6. To make these changes effective for the current setup, click the Apply
or the OK button. Apply makes your changes and leaves the screen
open; OK makes your changes and closes the screen. Selecting another
setup page is the same as clicking Apply.
7. To save these changes to the current setup or to all setup files, click the
Save button.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Customizing Setups 5

6 Customizing Setups

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Parameter Manager
Using Parameter Manager to change parameters, you can customize a setup for
the specific cutting requirements of your operation. The C-200MT program
provides default, or preset, setups for running a cutter. Preset setups are suitable
for a wide variety of applications. Making a disk copy of customized setups is
recommended.
Note:

The latest information for working with Parameter Manager can be


found in the C-200MT online help.

Working with Parameters and Categories


Use the Parameter Manager command to access the Parameter Manager screen
in order to work with setups. When the Parameter Manager screen displays, the
first item in the Parameters section (top half of screen) is highlighted. Parameters
in the window belong to the category highlighted in the Categories section
(bottom half of screen).
To use Parameter Manager

1. From the Setup menu, select Parameter Manager.


2. To move through the list of parameters, use the arrow keys on the
keyboard or use the pointing device.
Note:

Only parameters applicable for your GERBERcutter display


in the Parameter Manager.

Notice that the rectangle at left indicates whether parameters or


categories are currently being selected.
3. To select a different category, do one of the following:
a) Press the Tab key and then use the arrow keys.
b) Use the pointing device.
4. There may be additional categories available that are not displayed
in the Categories section. To access restricted categories use the
Advanced button.
5. To exit the Parameter Manager, press Esc or click the Close button.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Parameter Manager 1

Changing Parameters
Use the Parameter Manager to:
= Change parameters temporarily for the current setup
= Change parameters permanently for one or more setups
= Create a new setup
To change parameters

1. Open the Parameter Manager.


2. Select the category for the parameter you want to change.
3. Select the parameter you want to change.
4. To change a parameter, do one of the following:
= Press the Spacebar on the keyboard to select one of the choices
displayed below the Parameters section of the screen. For
example, ENABLE or DISABLE.
= Type a new value in the Current Values column and press Enter.
The value must be within the range displayed below the
Parameters section of the screen.
5. To use changes during the current session only, click the Close button.
6. To save changes permanently, click the Save to File button. When
prompted with a list of parameters being changed, do one of the
following:
a) To save changes to the current setup, click the Save button. Press
Enter or click the OK button to confirm.
b) To create a new setup based on the current setup and changes just
made, type a new setup name and click the Save button. Press
Enter or click the OK button to confirm.
c) To save changes for all existing setups, click the Save To All
button. Press Enter or click the OK button to confirm.

2 Parameter Manager

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Searching for Parameters


Use the Search button in the Parameter Manager screen to find a specific
parameter.
To search for a parameter

1. With the Parameter Manager open, click the Search button.


2. In the dialog box, click in the field and type any portion of the name for
the parameter you want to find.
3. Click the Search button.
4. In the search results window, select a specific parameter using the
arrow keys or the pointing device.
5. Press Enter or click the Goto button.
The dialog box closes and the correct category and parameter are
selected in the Parameter Manager screen.
Changing to Another Setup in Parameter Manager
If you want to make changes to a setup other than the current setup, use the
Change Setup button to select and activate that setup.
To change to another setup

1. With the Parameter Manager screen open, click the Change Setup
button. A screen opens similar to the Setup List page in the Settings
feature.
2. Select a setup, click the Apply button, and activate that setup.
3. You can now make changes to parameters.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Parameter Manager 3

Printing the Current Setup


Use the Print to File button in the Parameter Manager screen to print a copy of
the current setup.
To print the current setup

1. With the Parameter Manager open, click the Print to File button.
2. To print service and software parameters along with user level
parameters, click the check box for Show All Access Levels. When
printing all parameters, you can choose to Sort by Levels or accept the
default, which is Do Not Sort.
3. Click the Write to File button to print the current setup. To print a
different setup, double-click on that setup and make sure that the setup
name is correct in the path field at the bottom of the dialog box.
4. When prompted that the setup file has been written to the C:\REPORT
directory, press Enter or click the OK button.
5. Click the Done button or press Esc to close the dialog box.
6. When ready to print the report, close the Parameter Manager. Exit or
minimize the C-200MT program.
7. In the Windows Program Manager, select the Accessories group. Use
the Notepad text editor to open and print the setup file.

4 Parameter Manager

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Customizing Frequently Used Parameters Category


This category provides a quick way to view or change parameters used
frequently for your cutting operation. The Advanced button in the Parameters
Manager screen can be used at the supervisor level or higher to customize the list
of parameters in this category.
To change display in Frequently Used Parameters category

1. From the Setup menu, select Parameter Manager.


2. Click the Advanced button.
3. When prompted for password, type the supervisor level password or
higher. Then press Enter or click the OK button.
4. Choose the appropriate category and then select the parameter to be
included in or removed from the Frequently Used Parameter category.
Click the Search button to find parameters quickly.
5. Click the Common check box to add or remove a parameter. A check
mark in the Common box means the selected parameter is included in
this category.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for any additional parameters you want to add to
or remove from this category.
7. To save changes permanently, click the Save to File button. When
prompted, click the Save Advanced Settings button. Press Enter or
click the OK button to confirm.
8. When finished, click the Advanced button to close the Access Setup
box.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Parameter Manager 5

Access Levels and Passwords


Assigning Access Levels
Access to specific parameters can be restricted in order to prevent accidental
changes. The C-200MT program allows for the following levels of access to the
Parameter Manager. All levels except User level require a password.
= User
= Supervisor
= Field Service
= Administrator (or Software)
Access can be restricted by clicking the Advanced button in the Parameter
Manager and entering the password for one of the above levels. See Changing
Passwords section later in this chapter.
Using the Advanced Button
The Advanced button in the Parameter Manager screen can be used to:
= Lock parameters
= Reassign access level to parameters
= Customize the Frequently Used Parameters category
Reassigning Access Level
To assign access

1. From the Setup menu, select Parameter Manager.


2. Click the Advanced button.
3. In the Enter Password dialog box, type your password. Then press
Enter or click the OK button.
4. In the Advanced Setup box, select the appropriate category and then the
parameter for which you are assigning access.

6 Parameter Manager

C-200MT Software Users Guide

5. To restrict or allow access to this parameter, click the appropriate radio


button to select the lowest level you want to be able to view this
parameter. Depending on the password used in step 3, choices can
include:
= User
= Supervisor
= Field Service
= Administrator (or Software)
For example, if supervisor level is selected, operators can not view this
parameter but the supervisor can.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each parameter you want to change access.
7. To save changes permanently, click the Save to File button. When
prompted, click the Save Advanced Settings button. Press Enter or
click the OK button to confirm.
8. When finished, click the Advanced button to close the Access Setup
box.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Parameter Manager 7

Locking Parameters
To lock parameters

1. From the Setup menu, select Parameter Manager.


2. Click the Advanced button.
3. In the Enter Password dialog box, type your password. Then press
Enter or click the OK button.
4. In the Advanced Setup box, select the appropriate category and then the
parameter you want to lock.
5. Click the Locked check box to lock or unlock the parameter. A check
mark in this box means the selected parameter is locked (can be viewed
by an operator but not changed).
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each parameter you want to lock or unlock.
7. To save changes permanently, click the Save to File button. When
prompted, click the Save Advanced Settings button. Press Enter or
click the OK button to confirm.
8. When finished, click the Advanced button to close the Access Setup
box.

8 Parameter Manager

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Changing Passwords
Default passwords for the following levels are provided with your C-200MT
software. To provide additional security when working with Parameter Manager
or File Manager, you can change the Supervisor and Service level passwords.

Level

Default Password

Supervisor

BOSS

Service

VICE

Administrator

ADMIN

To change a password

1. From the Setup menu, select Change Password.


2. Click the appropriate radio button to identify the password level being
changed.
3. In the Change Password dialog box, type the old password and the new
password.
4. Retype the new password to verify your entry.
5. Press Enter or click the OK button.
Note:

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Windows NT Administrative Tools can be used to keep track


of passwords.

Parameter Manager 9

10 Parameter Manager

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Contents

Parameters
Contents
Contents .....................................................................1
Categories of Parameters ..........................................5
Knife and Drill Speeds Parameters ............................6

Idle Knife Speed ................................................ 6


Dry Haul/Minimum Knife Speed ...................... 6
Cut/Maximum Knife Speed ............................... 6
Sharpen Knife Speed ......................................... 6
Cut Speed=Maximum Knife Speed ................... 6
Examples................................................................6

Heavy Duty Drill Speed..................................... 6


Knife Spd Sensor: Volts per KRPM .................. 6
Knife Speed Checking ....................................... 6
Sharpen Parameters ..................................................7

Sharpen Frequency ............................................ 7


Cut Distance Limit............................................. 7
Sharpening Time................................................ 7
Sharpen Position #1 ........................................... 7
Sharpen Position #2 ........................................... 7
Number of Sides to Sharpen .............................. 7
Sharpen Every n Pieces ..................................... 7
Sharpen Only When Knife is Up ....................... 7
Knife Wear Type ............................................... 7
Knife Wear Limit............................................... 8
Sharpens Until Overcut Update ......................... 8
Sharpen New Knife n Times.............................. 8
Num sharpens until angle adjust........................ 8
Number of Sharpen Cycles ................................ 8
Cutting Parameters ....................................................9

Active Beams..................................................... 9
Dual Beam Cutter .............................................. 9
Slit Notch Backtracking..................................... 9
Optimal Backup Distance .................................. 9
Advance Before Plunge Distance ...................... 9
Corner Advance Distance .................................. 9
Overcut Distance ............................................... 9
Corner Overcut Distance ................................... 9
Lift & Plunge Corner Angle .............................. 9
Maximum Segment Length ............................. 10
M17 (0 Heel Cut) Advance.............................. 10
M19 (Slit Notch) Advance............................... 10

C-200MT Software Users Guide

M25 Slowdown Percentage..............................10


Miter Angle Range...........................................10
Corner Miter Distance......................................10
C Axis Yaw Angle ...........................................10
C Axis Max Angle ...........................................10
Vacuum System Parameters ...................................11

Vacuum Zoning................................................11
Vacuum Zone Overlap .....................................11
Vacuum Error Reporting..................................11
Vacuum Control Type......................................11
Vacuum Level Bite .....................................11
Vacuum Level Cut ......................................11
Vacuum Level Idle......................................12
X Home Zone1 Offset......................................12
Vacuum Low Error Level ................................12
Vacuum Low Caution Level ............................12
Vacuum Control Pattern Length .................12
Vacuum Control Zero Offset ......................12
Vacuum Control Vacuum Gain...................12
Number of Vacuum Zones ...............................12
Bite Vacuum Threshold ...................................12
Time Until ESM...............................................12
Energy Savings Mode ......................................12
Num of Vac Zones Closed for Bite..................12
Vacuum Level Valve on Inlet ..........................12
Ignore Codes Parameters ........................................13

Ignore Auto Origin (M70) Codes.....................13


Ignore Aux Drill (M44) Codes.........................13
Ignore Display Msg (M20) Codes....................13
Ignore Feedrate (F) Codes................................13
Ignore Label Cycle (M31) Codes.....................13
Ignore Lift & Plunge (M46) Codes..................13
Ignore Main Drill (M43) Codes .......................13
Ignore Move Conveyor (M69) Codes ..............13
Ignore Overcut Off (M18) Codes.....................13
Ignore OV, AP Off (M19) Codes.....................13
Ignore Pen (D1+ D2) Codes.............................13
Ignore Sharpen (M42) Codes ...........................13
Ignore Slowdown Codes ..................................14
Bristle Cleaner Parameters ......................................14

Bristl Cleanr (0=N 1=Motr 2=Pneum).............14


Slat Advance Time...........................................14
Cleaner Head Sweep Time...............................14
Cleaner Head Retract/Plunge Time..................14
Bristle Cleaner Sweeps per Slat .......................14
Number of Table Slats .....................................14
One-Way Bristle Cleaning ...............................14

Parameters 1

Contents
Knife and Path Intelligence Parameters .................. 15

KI: Gain ........................................................... 15


KI: Deflection Angle ....................................... 15
KI: Max Turn Angle ........................................ 15
KI Spring Factor .............................................. 15
KI: Error Detection .......................................... 15
KI: On/Off ....................................................... 15
KI: Option........................................................ 15
KI: Fail Time ................................................... 15
KI: Corner Disable Time ................................. 15
Only Allow Cutting with KI On ...................... 15
Path Intelligence Option .................................. 16
PI FR Control XY Force............................. 16
PI FR Slowdown Low Vac ......................... 16
PI FR Faster Shp Knife............................... 16
PI Optimum Force ........................................... 16
PI Feedrate Max Increase ................................ 16
PI Feedrate Minimum ...................................... 16
PI Feedrate Maximum ..................................... 16
PI Feedrate Change Ratio ................................ 16
PI Velocity to +FR........................................... 16
PI Velocity to +FR & Rbld.............................. 16
PI Velocity to -FR............................................ 16
PI Velocity to -FR & Rbld............................... 16
PI Force to Stop with Warning ........................ 16
PI Sharp Knife Full Speedup Dst..................... 16
PI Sharp Knife Prtl Speedup Dst ..................... 17
PI Sharp Knife Speedup Amount..................... 17
PI Vacuum Low Slowdown Factor.................. 17
Knife Break Force............................................ 17
Knife Break Risk Point .................................... 17
Data Format/Scaling and RSO ................................ 18

X Data Scale Factor ......................................... 18


Y Data Scale Factor ......................................... 18
Data Format ..................................................... 18
Marker Size: Use Auto Calculate .................... 19
Marker Size: Use M20 Code ........................... 19
Right Side Initialize ......................................... 19
AAMA Data Conversion ................................. 19
Center Line Calibration ................................... 19
Bite Parameters....................................................... 20

Allow Piece Reorder........................................ 20


Run Time Biting .............................................. 20
Variable Length Biting .................................... 20
Minimum Bite Length ..................................... 20
Maximum Bite Length..................................... 20
Pause Before Convey....................................... 20
Pause Between Bites........................................ 20

2 Parameters

Convey Last Bite Off Table .............................20


Bite Clip Start Position.....................................21
Bite Clip End Position......................................21
Bite Park Offset................................................21
Insert M23 Edge Clip Code..............................21
Bite Veeroff......................................................21
Marker End Park (0=None 1= -Y 2= +Y)........21
Marker End Park Position X ............................21
Marker End Park Position Y ............................21
Maximum Bite Adjustment..............................21
Bite Park Location............................................21
Cut Small Pieces First ......................................22
Max Area of Small Piece .................................22
Recalculate Small Pieces..................................22
Bite Overlap .....................................................22
Conveyor Table Settle Time ............................22
Continuous Cutting ..........................................22
Continuous Cutting Installed............................23
Options and Modes ..................................................24

Use Edge Finders .............................................24


Edge Finder Auto-Alignment...........................24
Log Edge Finder Info .......................................24
Auto-Scale Y....................................................24
Max Auto-Scale Y Change ..............................24
Dry Run Tool is Light ......................................24
Clear Origin on Cutfile Close ..........................24
Installed Edge Finders......................................24
Saving of Parameter Changes ..........................24
Single Step .......................................................25
Marker Flip ......................................................25
Marker Flip Top ...............................................25
Marker Stacking Reorder .................................25
Marker Stacking Reorder Channel...................25
Language Support ............................................25
Kanji Character Set ..........................................25
Check Origin ....................................................25
Verify Keyboard Entry.....................................26
Block Delete.....................................................26
Cut/Plot Mode ..................................................26
Dry Run............................................................26
Metric Display..................................................26
Delete Cut File After Cutting...........................26
Re-Sealer Option..............................................26
Resealer Up For Continuous Cut .....................26
Preprocess Drills ..............................................26
Center Line Origin Center Point ......................26
Center Line Origin Edge Points .......................27
Transfer Markers When Selected.....................27

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Contents
Y Axis Edge Align (0=N 1=+Y 2=-Y) ............ 27
Bar Code Reader Option.................................. 27
Cutter Info Database Option ............................ 27
Mirror Image and Clipping Window ..........................28

Mirroring Option ............................................. 28


Mirror Image.................................................... 28
Y-Axis Mirror Image ....................................... 28
Y-Axis Mirror Reflection Line ........................ 28
Clipping Window Option ................................ 28
Clipping Low Boundary .................................. 28
Clipping High Boundary.................................. 28
Clipping Low Boundary (Top Mrk) ................ 28
Clipping High Boundary (Top Mrk)................ 28
OPSTOP and Report Options ..................................29

Camera Extension Distance ............................. 29


Use AccuMatch ............................................... 29
OPSTOP Section Processing ........................... 29
OPSTOP .......................................................... 29
Preset OPSTOP................................................ 29
Regional OPSTOP ........................................... 29
OPSTOP Slow Slew ........................................ 29
Cutter Info Database Output ............................ 29
Selvage Cut/Contiguous Cut ....................................30

Selv/Web (0=Off 1= Selv 2 = Web&Sel)........ 30


Selvage Cut Position........................................ 30
Selvage Cut Size Bottom .............................. 30
Selvage Cut Size Top.................................... 30
Minimum Web Cut Size .................................. 30
Intermarker Gap............................................... 30
Minimum Size of First Bite ............................. 30
Contiguous Cut ................................................ 30
System Setup Parameters .......................................31

Beam Square Adjustment ................................ 31


Beam Squared.................................................. 31
Bite Error Adjustment...................................... 31
Maximum Cut Velocity ................................... 31
Max Cut Acceleration...................................... 31
C Axis Sharpen Speed ..................................... 31
X-Axis Stepsize ............................................... 31
Y-Axis Stepsize ............................................... 31
Usable Table Distance in X ............................. 31
Usable Table Distance in Y ............................. 31
C Home to System 0 Degrees .......................... 31
Offset in X Knife ........................................ 31
Offset in Y Knife ........................................ 31
Offset in X Drill 1....................................... 31
Offset in Y Drill 1....................................... 31

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Offset in X Pen............................................31
Offset in Y Pen............................................32
Ramp Down Dist Auto Bite ........................32
Offset in X Drill 2 .......................................32
Offset in Y Drill 2 .......................................32
Offset X Camera .........................................32
Offset Y Camera .........................................32
Offset Edge Sensors X .....................................32
Offset Bottom Edge Sensor Y..........................32
Offset Top Edge Sensor Y ...............................32
Max Extension -Y Edge Finder........................32
Max Extension +Y Edge Finder.......................32
Cut File Preprocessor Parameters ...........................33

Length of Reverse Segment .............................33


Edge Clipping Angle........................................33
Knife Width......................................................33
Gap to Ignore ...................................................33
Distance to Corner ...........................................33
Path Overlap.....................................................33
Corner Angle....................................................33
Transfer Angle .................................................33
Max Length to Ignore.......................................33
Max Distance with Knife Down ......................33
Message Stop ...................................................33
Max # Points Per Piece ....................................33
Overlap Distance..............................................33
Smallest Piece ..................................................33
Percent of Piece................................................33
Queue Manager Parameters....................................34

Auto Start Jobs in Queue .................................34


Del Job From Queue After Cutting..................34
Del Queue After Cutting ..................................34
Read Queue Name Bar Codes..........................34
Security Parameters.................................................34

User Parameter Table - Selecting.....................34


User Parameter Table -Editing.........................34
Field Service Level Categories and Parameters ......35

Cutter Type ......................................................35


Dual Beam ...........................................................35
AccuMatch Installed............................................35
Table Length (0=Standard,1=Long) ....................35
Beam Width.........................................................35
Right Side Control ...............................................35

PC Serial Communication................................36
MCC Communications Port ................................36
MCC Comm Port Beam 2....................................36
Bar Code Reader Com Port .................................36

Parameters 3

Contents
Dry Haul Speeds .............................................. 36

Conveyor and CTOT........................................41

Projector Output Port .......................................... 36


Maximum Dry Haul Velocity.............................. 36
Dry Haul Acceleration ........................................ 36

Velocity Cnvyr Jog .........................................41


Velocity Cnvyr Man Bite................................41
Velocity Cnvyr Auto Bite ...............................41
Conveyor Ramp Down Time ...............................41
CTOT Stop Distance.......................................41
Max Allowable Conveyor Friction ......................41
TONT Start Delay...........................................41
TONT Stop Distance.......................................41
CTOT2 Start Delay .........................................41
CTOT2 Stop Distance.....................................41
Bite Encoder Step (beam) ....................................41
Conveyor Encoder LOC (0=B 1=T) ....................41
Bite Encoder Step (table) .....................................41
Velocity Cnvyr Cut Bite .................................41
Variable Speed CTOT .........................................41

C-Axis.............................................................. 37
C-Axis delay........................................................ 37
C-Axis cut velocity.............................................. 37
C-Axis max velocity............................................ 37
C-Axis Acceleration............................................ 37
C Axis Settle Time .............................................. 37

XY Axes .......................................................... 37
X Home to System 0 ........................................... 37
Y Home to System 0 ........................................... 37
XY-Axes delay.................................................... 37
Cutfile Percentage Primary Beam ....................... 37

Limit Switches ................................................. 38


Lm Switch Status Bite Sensor ........................ 38
Lm Switch Status Drill 1 ................................ 38
Lm Switch Status Knife ................................. 38
Lm Switch Status Pen .................................... 38
Lm Switch Status Sharpen Arm ..................... 38
Lm Switch Status Drill 2 ................................ 38
Limit Switch Status Edge Sensor ................... 38

Drill.................................................................. 39
Drill Idle Time Before Shutoff............................ 39
Drill on only while selected ................................ 39

Software Parameters.........................................42
Event Logging......................................................42
Data Logging Mask..............................................42
Milliseconds between samples.............................42
Log Writes to VARSAVE....................................42
Log OPSTOP Debug Info ....................................42
Log Origin Debug Info ........................................42
Log CIDB Debug Info .........................................42
Index ........................................................................43

Servo (DSP) Coefficients................................. 39


C Max Follow Error ............................................ 39
Beam Bite Gain ................................................... 39

Time Considerations ........................................ 40


Max time: To move up bite sns ...................... 40
Max time: To move down bite sns ................. 40
Max time: To move up drill 1 ........................ 40
Max time: To move down drill 1.................... 40
Max time: To move up knife.......................... 40
Max time: To move down knife ..................... 40
Max time: To move up pen ............................ 40
Max time: To move down pen ....................... 40
Max time: Up to speed knife .......................... 40
Max time: Up to speed drill............................ 40
Max time: To turn off drill ............................. 40
Max time: To turn on vacuum........................ 40
Max time: To turn on drives........................... 40
Max time: Idle in TrimCut Mode ........................ 40
Max time: Idle in ManBite Mode........................ 40
Max Time: Vacuum Drop ................................... 40
Max Time for Auto Bite...................................... 40
Max Time: Engage Edge Sensor ......................... 40

4 Parameters

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Categories of Parameters

Categories of
Parameters

Category /Parameters Used To


Data Format/Scaling and RSO
Define the format of cut file data or AAMA data
conversion.
Define X and Y-axis scaling.

Parameters are settings that are included in the setup for


your cutter. Some parameters turn a feature on or off.
Other parameters define a value within an allowable
range. For example, use the Clipping Window Option
parameter to turn this feature ON and then set current
values using Clipping Boundary parameters.

Define marker size.

Note:

Mirror Image and Clipping Window


Turn on the mirroring options which rotate the
marker before cutting.

This chapter explains available parameters


for all GERBERcutters. However, only
parameters for your cutter type may display
in the Parameter Manager.

Categories group parameters that relate to a cutter


feature. The following parameter categories can be
accessed at the User and Supervisor levels. Additional
parameter categories can be accessed at the Field
Service and Software levels.
Category /Parameters Used To
Frequently Used Parameters
Provide quick access to frequently-used
parameters
Knife and Drill Speeds
Control knife and drill speed for specific cutting
conditions.
Sharpen Parameters
Control how and when the knife is sharpened.
Define how the cutter determines wear on the
knife blade and when the knife should be
replaced.
Cutting Parameters
Control advance and overcut distances
and limits.

Initialize RSO cutters.


Bite Parameters
Define how the cutter handles bites.
Define end park position.
Options and Modes
Turn on/off various GERBERcutter features.

Turn on the clipping window feature and


define boundaries.
OPSTOP and Report Options
Control how the cutter responds to OPSTOP
codes.
Define Cutter Info Database reporting.
Selvage Cut/Contiguous Cut
Control Selvage/Web cutting for vertical line
cuts through the selvage or the selvage
and web.
Control processing of consecutive markers.
System Setup Parameters
Set maximum beam velocities for cutting.
Cut File Preprocessor
Determine the parameters used when
preprocessing markers.
Queue Manager
Determine how Queue Manager handles cut
data files.
Security
Control the ability to change or edit Cutter and
Notch parameter tables when opening an
AccuMark marker for cut processing.

Control cut angle and slowdown percentage


for cutting operations.
Vacuum System
Control the vacuum options.
Ignore Codes
Tell the cutter to ignore or respond to certain
marker data codes.
Bristle Cleaner
Control times and number of sweeps for
automatic cleaning.
Knife and Path Intelligence
Control how Knife Intelligence compensates
for cutting forces on knife.
Set up Path Intelligence to automatically
adjust feed rate for the best cut quality and
throughput.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Parameters 5

Knife and Drill Speeds Parameters

Knife and Drill Speeds


Parameters
Parameters in this category control knife and drill
speeds for specific cutting conditions.

Idle Knife Speed


Sets the speed at which the knife reciprocates whenever
the system is in manual mode (idle).

Examples
GERBERcutter

GT 3250

GTxL

Maximum Cut
Velocity (ipm)

1800

1800

Use to set feed


rate:

Feed Rate switch


on control panel

Feed Rate
Slider
in C-200MT

Feed rate range

0-15

0-100%

0 = 0 ipm

0% = 0 ipm

1 = 120 ipm

10% = 180
ipm

Setting = ipm

15 = 1800 ipm

100%
1800 ipm

Dry Haul/Minimum Knife Speed


Sets the speed at which the knife reciprocates during dry
haul in auto mode. This is the minimum knife speed
(feed rate 1) during cutting.

Heavy Duty Drill Speed

Cut/Maximum Knife Speed

Sets the speed of the electric drill. The electric drill is


standard on most GERBERcutters and available as an
heavy-duty drill option for GT 3250 or S-3200 cutters.

Sets the maximum knife speed during cutting. The knife


reciprocates between the minimum and maximum
settings as it cuts material.

Knife Spd Sensor: Volts per KRPM

Sets the speed at which the knife reciprocates during


sharpening.

Sets the factor used to change voltage to revolutions in


order to calibrate knife speed. This factor depends upon
the stroke size of the cutting head. The result of this
calibration displays in the Knife Speed gauge in the
Main Cutter Control screen.

Cut Speed=Maximum Knife Speed

Knife Speed Checking

Sets the value on the feed rate dial/slider at which the


maximum knife speed (RPM) is reached. As you
increase the feed rate, knife speed increases from
minimum to maximum speed in equal increments. Once
maximum knife speed is reached, the knife speed will
stay at the maximum speed.

ON Checks for knife oscillation before allowing


cutting.

Sharpen Knife Speed

OFF Turns off this feature.

If your operation requires a wide range of cutting


speeds, you might set cut speed=15 or feed rate equal to
100%. This allows the most increments before the
maximum knife speed is reached.
If your operation requires that you reach maximum
cutting speed quickly, you might set cut speed=6 or feed
rate equal to 40%. This example would allow fewer
speed increments before the maximum knife speed is
reached.

6 Parameters

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Sharpen Parameters

Sharpen Parameters
Parameters in this category:

Sharpen Position #2
Sets the C-axis angle for sharpening the second side of
the knife blade; for GT 3250 OR S-3200only.

Control how and when the knife is sharpened

Number of Sides to Sharpen

Define how the cutter determines wear on the


knife blade and when the knife should be
replaced

Sets the number of knife blade sides sharpened during


each auto mode sharpening cycle; for GT 3250 OR S3200only. The choices are: 1 or 2

Sharpen Frequency
Tells the system to automatically sharpen the knife
whenever it has cut this distance in automatic cutting.
Sharpening frequency depends upon your application.
The highest frequency combined with the lowest
Number of Sharpen Cycles results in quality cutting and
greatest knife life.
Note: Typing a value of 0 (zero) disables automatic
sharpening.

Cut Distance Limit


Sets the maximum distance (centimeters or inches) the
knife can cut before you must replace it. If Knife Wear
Type is set to DISTANCE, the system uses this setting
to define the life of a knife blade; otherwise, it uses
Sharpen Every n Pieces.
Knife life limit reached is the message displayed on
the monitor when the knife has traveled the distance
you set in this parameter. When you see this message,
install a new knife.

Note: Manual mode always sharpens both sides of the


knife blade.

Sharpen Every n Pieces


Automatically sharpens the knife every n pieces,
where n is a number from 1 to 9. Use when pieces in
markers are similar enough in size that distance can be
estimated accurately.
If n is 0, the system uses Sharpen Frequency instead
of this parameter to sharpen the knife.
Note: When using Sharpen Every n Pieces to sharpen
the knife, set Sharpen Frequency to 999 to prevent
back-to-back sharpening.

Sharpen Only When Knife is Up


ON Postpones next sharpen cycle until the knife lifts
out of the material for another reason (for example, a
Lift & Plunge or a Dry Haul). Use when there are many
lift & plunges in a marker. Use with the Sharpen
Frequency parameter.

Note: After replacing the knife, use the New Knife and
Sharpen commands in the Cutter menu to reset Knife
Wear logic.

OFF Does not postpone sharpen cycle.

Sharpening Time

Determines how the system defines knife wear:

Sets the amount of time that the knife blade stays


against the sharpening stones for each sharpening cycle;
for GT 3250 or S-3200 only.

CYCLES

(used for most applications)

DISTANCE

(aerospace industry)

Knife Wear Type

Sharpen Position #1
Sets the C-axis angle for sharpening the first side of the
knife blade; for GT 3250 OR S-3200only.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Parameters 7

Sharpen Parameters
Knife Wear Limit

Num sharpens until angle adjust

Sets the maximum number of sharpening cycles


allowed before you need to replace the knife blade. If
Knife Wear Type is set to CYCLES, the system uses
this setting to define the life of a knife blade; otherwise,
it uses Cut Distance Limit.

Sets the number of sharpen cycles until the system


automatically adjusts the Sharpen Position angles by
0.250 degrees (maximum 4 degrees). Used for GT 3250
OR S-3200only to maintain proper sharpening (based
on the fact that knife width decreases due to normal
sharpening wear).

Knife life limit reached is the message displayed on


the monitor when the knife has reached the sharpening
limit. When you see this message, change the knife.

Number of Sharpen Cycles

Sharpens Until Overcut Update

Sets the number of rotations, clockwise and


counterclockwise, during a knife sharpening interval;
not used on GTXL, GT 3250, OR S-3200.

If Knife Wear Type is set to CYCLES, the C-200MT


uses this parameter to know when to update Knife Wear
compensation. This setting is the number of sharpening
cycles before the C-200MT updates Knife Wear
compensation. Knife Wear Logic allows 0.2 mm (0.008
in.) of blade wear at each update. The system
automatically adjusts Overcut and Corner Overcut.

Sharpen New Knife n Times


Sets the number of times the system sharpens a new
knife blade when you use the New Knife command in
the Cutter menu.

8 Parameters

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Cutting Parameters

Cutting Parameters
Parameters in this category:

Control advance and overcut distances and


limits.

Control cut angle and slowdown percentage


for cutting operations.

Adjust for new or used knife.

Active Beams
Identifies which beam(s) are being used on a cutter with
the Dual Beam option.
Choices are: PRIMARY, SECONDARY, or BOTH

Dual Beam Cutter


Identifies whether or not the GERBERcutter has the
Dual Beam option. This option, which utilizes two
cutting heads each on a separate beam, is only available
for S-91 ZVC cutters.
YES Turns on this option.

Slit Notch Backtracking


ON Turns on backtracking when cutting slit notches.
Backtracking on the piece perimeter by a specific
amount (optimal backup distance ) prevents incomplete
cutting which might result due to material movement
while cutting the notch.

Advance Before Plunge Distance


Sets the distance the knife advances before plunging
into the material at the start of a piece or line segment.
This sets the amount of heel cut left outside the piece
during the first knife plunge. Heel cut is made by the
thickest part (heel) of the knife; for thicker knives, set
this value larger.
CAUTION: Too much heel cut can damage an
adjacent piece. Too little heel cut can cause the piece
not to be fully cut away from the scrap material.

Corner Advance Distance


Controls the advance at a corner where the knife lifts
from the material, turns to a new heading, plunges into
the material, and resumes cutting.
Note: This value is usually the same as Advance Before
Plunge Distance, unless the shapes and angles for pieces
in a marker are very different.

Overcut Distance
Sets the extra distance the knife cuts when it stops
cutting a piece or internal line, but not a Lift & Plunge
corner. This ensures that the piece is cut cleanly from
the web.
Note: Sharpen Until Overcut Update changes this
value.

Corner Overcut Distance

OFF Turns off this feature.

Sets the amount of extra material cut at a Lift & Plunge


corner only.

Optimal Backup Distance

Lift & Plunge Corner Angle

Sets the amount the cutter backtracks on the piece


perimeter after making a slit notch. The Slit Notch
Backtracking parameter must be turned ON.

Sets the knife angle that makes the system execute a lift
and pllunge corner cut. If the angle at the corner of a
piece is equal to or less than the Lift & Plunge Corner
Angle, the knife lifts out of the material, turns, and
plunges back into the material; if wider, the knife cuts
the corner without lifting out of the material.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Parameters 9

Cutting Parameters
Maximum Segment Length
Sets the maximum move (distance) between data points
allowed by the system. This value must be equal to or
greater than the value specified in the CAD marking
system. For example, AM-5 MPLOT routine,
AccuMark Cutter parameter table, or MicroMark
NC Cut table.
Note: If segments greater than 100 inches (254 cm) are
required, digitize intermediate points.

Advance Ignore Angle


Sets an angle the system uses as reference to minimize
or eliminate knife advances that can cause heel cuts in
pieces with small line segments. The system checks the
distance between point 1 and 2 (shown below); if this is
less than the size of the knife, the system calculates the
angle between point 1 and point 3 and compares to the
Advance Ignore Angle. If less than this angle, the
system skips point 2 and cuts between point 1 and point
3, trying to minimize the overcut and undercut.
3

M17 (0 Heel Cut) Advance


Causes the cutter to make an advance for zero heel cut,
such as cutting web. Advance returns to normal after
each M17 code.

M19 (Slit Notch) Advance

will skip 2

Causes the cutter to make an advance for cuts such as


slit notches.

C Axis Yaw Angle

Note: There is no lift and plunge on slit notches.

M25 Slowdown Percentage

will not skip 2

Changes the yaw angle of the knife up to 2 degrees in


either direction without altering home position or
sharpen angle. This is helpful when resistance is
encountered during cutting.

Sets the percentage of slowdown caused by M25 code.


This improves cutting production by running optimum
speed except at curves.

Note: Cutting direction and yaw angle affect piece size.


For example, cutting clockwise with a Yaw angle
yields a piece that is slightly larger.

Example: A value of 75 means the cutter slows down


to 75% of cut speed.

Setting Sharpen Angle GT 3250 or S-3200

Miter Angle Range


Defines the range of angles at which corner mitering
will take effect. The setting is relative to 90 degrees. For
example, if this value is set to 20, mitering will occur at
all corners cut with the knife down at angles from 70 to
110 degrees.

Corner Miter Distance


Determines the distance away from the original corner
point where the miter points are inserted to replace the
corner point. Setting this parameter to 0 (default)
disables the feature.

10 Parameters

When setting the sharpen angle for GT 3250 OR S3200 cutter, first zero this angle using the C Axis Angle
diagnostic, set the Sharpen Position #1 and #2
parameters, and then use this parameter to make any
necessary adjustments.

C Axis Max Angle


Sets the angle that determines whether the system stops
for a brief instant when cut direction changes or changes
direction without stopping at all. Useful when cutting
without lift and plunge; for example, small angles at
bottom of a pocket.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Vacuum System Parameters

Vacuum System
Parameters
Parameters in this category can be used to control
vacuum options for the cutter.

Vacuum Zoning
ENABLE Turns on Vacuum Zoning. The system
will control the opening and closing of the zone valves.
Not for use on:

S-91 TCW

S-91 static or S-91 ZVC cutters without


pneumatic zoning

GTxL

DISABLE Turns off this feature. When the vacuum


generator is on, vacuum is applied to the entire table.

Vacuum Zone Overlap


Sets the distance between the cutter head and the next
zone when the system applies vacuum to that zone.
(Used only if Vacuum Zoning is enabled.)
Not for use on:

S-91 TCW

S-91 static or S-91 ZVC cutters without


pneumatic zoning

GTxL

Vacuum Error Reporting

Vacuum Control Type


Choices are:
NONE - Vacuum level is the same regardless of cutter
mode.
Not for use on S-91 cutters.
BUTTERFLY - The cutter controls vacuum level based
on current cutting mode (idle, cut, or bite).
Not for use on S-91 cutters. Applies only to
GERBERcutters equipped with optional Vacuum Level
Control system.
VFD BASIC - Vacuum level can be set to High or Low.
Not for use on S-91 cutters. Currently, available on
GTxL GERBERcutter only.
VFD ENHANCED - The cutter controls vacuum level
based on current cutting mode (idle, cut, or bite).
Not for use on S-91 cutters. Currently, available on
GTxL GERBERcutters equipped with optional Vacuum
Level Control system.
EXTERNAL - Vacuum level is the same regardless of
cutter mode.
For S-91 cutters only.

Vacuum Level Bite


Sets the vacuum level that the system maintains when
the cutter is biting (conveying the spread for the next
bite).
Not for use on S-91 cutters. Applies only to
GERBERcutters equipped with a Vacuum Level
Control system. Used only if Vacuum Control Type is
set to BUTTERFLY or VFD ENHANCED.

Turns low vacuum error reporting on and off.

Vacuum Level Cut

ON Warnings display if vacuum drops below values


set in Vacuum Low Level parameters. Press Enter to
clear the warning message. If cutting stopped also, press
Start to resume.

Sets the vacuum level that the system maintains when


the cutter is cutting.

OFF Turns off this feature.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Not for use on S-91 cutters. Applies only to


GERBERcutters equipped with a Vacuum Level
Control system. Used only if Vacuum Control Type is
set to BUTTERFLY or VFD ENHANCED.

Parameters 11

Vacuum System Parameters


Vacuum Level Idle

Number of Vacuum Zones

Sets the vacuum level that the system maintains when


the cutter is idle (the beam, cutter head and conveyor
are not moving).

Sets the number of vacuum zones on the cutting table.


Not for use on S-91 or GTxL cutters.

Not for use on S-91 cutters. Applies only to


GERBERcutters equipped with a Vacuum Level
Control system. Used only if Vacuum Control Type is
set to BUTTERFLY or VFD ENHANCED..

X Home Zone1 Offset


Sets the distance from X Home (0,0) to the start of
vacuum zone #1.
Not used on:

S-91 TCW cutter

S-91 Static or ZVC cutters without pneumatics

GTxL

Vacuum Low Error Level


Sets the level at which the system displays an error
message and halts cutting due to low vacuum.

Bite Vacuum Threshold


Sets the vacuum level at which the conveyor begins
moving.

Time Until ESM


Sets the number of seconds the cutter is idle before it
goes into Energy Savings Mode.
Used only if ESM is enabled. Not for use on S-91
cutters.

Energy Savings Mode


ENABLE Turns on Energy Savings Mode (ESM).
Not for use on:

S-91 TCW

S-91 static or S-91 ZVC cutters without


pneumatic zoning

Vacuum Low Caution Level

DISABLE Turns off Energy Savings Mode.

Sets the level at which the system displays a warning


message about low vacuum level.

Num of Vac Zones Closed for Bite

Vacuum Control Pattern Length

Sets the number of table zones closed during a bite,


starting from the take-off end of the table.

Sets the length of time the control signal is applied to


the Vacuum Control Valve solenoid. The higher the
signal, the longer it is applied.

Not for use on:

S-91 TCW

Vacuum Control Zero Offset

S-91 static or S-91 ZVC cutters without


pneumatic zoning

Sets the duty cycle (Open vs. Closed) of the control


signal. The higher the setting, the longer the valve is
closed.

GTxL

Vacuum Control Vacuum Gain


Sets the response time for the Vacuum Control valve:
the higher the setting, the quicker the response.

12 Parameters

Vacuum Level Valve on Inlet


Identifies whether or not the system has a vacuum level
valve: TRUE or FALSE
Not used on S-91 cutters.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Ignore Codes Parameters

Ignore Codes
Parameters

Ignore Lift & Plunge (M46) Codes


The M46 code commands a Lift & Plunge corner at the
next data point.

Parameters in this category can be used to tell the cutter


to ignore or respond to certain marker data codes. The
cutter moves the head to the location but does not
execute the code.

ON Cutter ignores M46 codes.


OFF Cutter responds to M46 codes.

Ignore Auto Origin (M70) Codes

ON Cutter ignores standard drill codes. For example,


this parameter can be used to continue cutting when the
drill is broken. Drills can be cut by hand at a later time.

M70 sets the current X,Y position as the origin.


ON Cutter ignores M70 codes.
OFF Cutter responds to M70 codes.

Ignore Aux Drill (M44) Codes


An auxiliary drill is a drill in the auxiliary position on
the cutter head.
ON Cutter ignores auxiliary drill codes.
OFF Cutter responds to auxiliary drill codes.

Ignore Display Msg (M20) Codes


The M20 code stops cut file processing to display a
message on the monitor. For example, an M20 code can
be used to display the length and width of the marker
before the system starts cutting the marker.
ON Cutter ignores M20 codes.
OFF Cutter responds to M20 codes.

Ignore Feedrate (F) Codes


This is used with the POWER Processor option. Makes
the system ignore any feed rate codes in the cut data
stream.
ON Cutter ignores F codes.
OFF Cutter responds to F codes.

Ignore Label Cycle (M31) Codes


ON Cutter ignores label cycle codes.
OFF Cutter responds to label cycle codes.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Ignore Main Drill (M43) Codes

OFF Cutter responds to standard drill codes.

Ignore Move Conveyor (M69) Codes


The M69 code tells the system that it has reached the
end of the bite.
ON Cutter ignores M69 codes.
OFF Cutter responds to M69 codes.

Ignore Overcut Off (M18) Codes


The M18 code turns off automatic Overcut, but keeps
Advance Before Plunge.
ON Cutter ignores M18 codes.
OFF Cutter responds to M18 codes.

Ignore OV, AP Off (M19) Codes


The M19 code turns off both the automatic Overcut and
Advance Before Plunge features.
ON Cutter ignores M19 codes.
OFF Cutter responds to M19 codes.

Ignore Pen (D1+ D2) Codes


ON Cutter ignores pen codes.
OFF Cutter responds to pen codes.

Ignore Sharpen (M42) Codes


ON Cutter ignores sharpen codes.
OFF Cutter responds to sharpen codes.

Parameters 13

Bristle Cleaner Parameters


Ignore Slowdown Codes
ON Cutter ignores slowdown codes including L,
M25, and M60-67 codes.
OFF Cutter responds to slowdown codes.

Bristle Cleaner
Parameters
Parameters in this category control:

Bristle Cleaner Sweeps per Slat


Sets the number of times the automatic Bristle cleaner
sweeps (passes) each slat on the cutting table.

Number of Table Slats


Sets the number of slats that make up the table cutting
surface.

One-Way Bristle Cleaning

Times for cleaning cycle

ENABLE Allows the Bristle cleaner to travel in one


direction only when sweeping the table.

Number of sweeps for automatic cleaning

DISABLE Turns off this feature.

Not for use on S-91 cutters.

Bristl Cleanr (0=N 1=Motr 2=Pneum)


Identifies the type of bristle cleaner available on the
cutter:
NONE, MOTORIZED, or PNUEMATIC

Slat Advance Time


Sets the time for a slat on the conveyor to position
during automatic bristle cleaning.

Cleaner Head Sweep Time


Sets the time for the bristle cleaner to make one pass on
a slat.

Cleaner Head Retract/Plunge Time


Sets the time to plunge or retract the bristle cleaner
head.

14 Parameters

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Knife and Path Intelligence Parameters

Knife and Path


Intelligence Parameters
Parameters in this category:

Control how Knife Intelligence compensates


for cutting forces on knife.

Set up Path Intelligence to automatically adjust


feed rate for the best cut quality and
throughput.

KI: Error Detection


Turns Knife Intelligence error detection on or off.
ON System checks whether the system is receiving a
signal from the Knife Intelligence transducer in the
presser foot bowl. Not applicable to GTXL, GT 3250,
or S-3200 cutters.
OFF System does not check.

KI: On/Off

Note: Knife Intelligence parameters are not applicable


for these cutters: GTxL, GT 3250, or S-3200.

ON Turns on Knife Intelligence when the KI Option


is enabled. Not applicable to GTXL, GT 3250, or S3200 cutters.

KI: Gain

OFF Turns off this feature.

Sets the sensitivity of Knife Intelligence. This controls


the amount of force available for adjusting the knife
heading to correct for lateral forces on the knife. This
parameter is not needed for cutting low ply spreads.
Not applicable to GTXL, GT 3250, or S-3200 cutters.

KI: Deflection Angle


Sets the greatest angle Knife Intelligence can turn the Caxis to compensate for lateral force on the knife. This
setting depends upon the type and ply height of the
material being cut. This parameter is not needed for
cutting low ply spreads.

KI: Option
ENABLE Turns on the KI option. Not applicable to
GTXL, GT 3250, or S-3200 cutters.
DISABLE Turns off this feature.

KI: Fail Time


Sets the interval of time that if no KI activity is sensed,
a KI failure error is displayed.
Not applicable to GTXL, GT 3250, or S-3200 cutters.

Not applicable to GTXL, GT 3250, or S-3200 cutters.

KI: Corner Disable Time

KI: Max Turn Angle

Sets the amount of time, if any, KI is temporarily shut


off while turning a corner with the knife down. Set at 0
(zero) to disable.

Sets the maximum knife turn angle the system will


execute with KI turned ON. If the angle specified is
exceeded, KI will be turned OFF while turning the
corner. This parameter is not needed for cutting low ply
spreads.

Not applicable to GTXL, GT 3250, or S-3200 cutters.

Only Allow Cutting with KI On

Not applicable to GTXL, GT 3250, or S-3200 cutters.

ENABLE Prevents the system from cutting if Knife


Intelligence is Off and the Start button is pressed.

KI Spring Factor

DISABLE Turns off this feature.

Set the spring factor used by KI to calculate forces on


the knife.
Not applicable to GTXL, GT 3250, or S-3200 cutters.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Parameters 15

Knife and Path Intelligence Parameters


Path Intelligence Option

PI Feedrate Minimum

DISABLE Turns off this feature.

Sets the minimum feed rate the system uses when the
PI: FR Control XY Force parameter is turned on.
This value should be set to where you are currently able
to achieve quality cutting. See PI: Feedrate: Maximum.

PI FR Control XY Force

PI Feedrate Maximum

ON Sets the best cutting speed for the material. The


system monitors the forces required to move the cutter
head and beam during cutting, and adjusts the feed rate
accordingly. This feature is controlled by the PI:
Optimum Force, PI: Feedrate: Minimum, and PI:
Feedrate Maximum parameters.

Sets the maximum feed rate the system uses when the
PI: FR Control XY Force parameter is turned on.

ENABLE Turns on the PI option.

OFF Turns off this feature.

PI FR Slowdown Low Vac


ON Lowers the feed rate whenever vacuum drops
below the level set in the Vacuum Low Caution Level
parameter. The system restores the feed rate when
vacuum rises by 13 mm/Hg (0.5 in./Hg).

To determine this value, reset in increments above the


PI: Feedrate: Minimum value, checking results at each
increase to ensure quality.

PI Feedrate Change Ratio


Determines how quickly PI adjusts the cut speed due to
XY force. A higher ratio makes the system more
responsive to force changes.

PI Velocity to +FR

OFF Turns off this feature.

Sets the velocity rise at which PI will increase the feed


rate (cutting speed) for all new contours.

PI FR Faster Shp Knife

PI Velocity to +FR & Rbld

ON Temporarily increases the feed rate for a


recently sharpened knife above its normal setting. The
amount of feed rate increase and the cut distance for
which it applies are controlled by field service level
parameters.

Sets the velocity rise at which PI will increase feed rate


(cutting speed) and rebuild contours.

PI Velocity to -FR

OFF Turns off this feature.

Sets the velocity drop at which PI will decrease the feed


rate (cutting speed) for all new contours.

PI Optimum Force

PI Velocity to -FR & Rbld

Sets the ideal force the system should maintain when


the PI: FR Control XY Force parameter is set for
automatic feed rate control. Optimum Force relates to
the highest feed rate the system can use without losing
cut quality. Optimum Force is affected by feed rate,
material, and ply height.

Sets the velocity drop at which PI will decrease feed


rate (cutting speed) and rebuild contours.

PI Force to Stop with Warning

Use the Watch Forces diagnostic to determine the


Optimum Force for a given spread.

Sets the maximum percentage that the XY Force can be


greater than the Optimum Force. If XY Force exceeds
this setting, the system stops cutting and warns that
there is excessive resistance to head movement.

PI Feedrate Max Increase

PI Sharp Knife Full Speedup Dst

Sets the maximum amount by which PI can increase the


feed rate at one time.

Sets the distance the system travels after a sharpening


cycle while cutting at the Full Speedup amount.

16 Parameters

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Knife and Path Intelligence Parameters


PI Sharp Knife Prtl Speedup Dst
Sets the distance the system travels after a sharpening
cycle while cutting speed goes from the Full Speedup
amount to normal speed.

PI Sharp Knife Speedup Amount


Sets the amount PI increases normal cutting speed to
operate at the Full Speedup amount after a sharpening
cycle.

PI Vacuum Low Slowdown Factor


Sets the amount PI reduces normal cutting speed after
the vacuum level falls below the Vacuum Low Caution
Level.

Knife Break Force


Sets the force (required to move the knife through the
spread) at which the system generates a warning about
knife breakage. The Knife Break Risk Point parameter
is also considered.

Knife Break Risk Point


Sets the percentage of knife sharpenings before the
system generates a warning about knife breakage. The
Knife Break Force parameter is also considered.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Parameters 17

Data Format/Scaling and RSO

Data Format/Scaling and


RSO
Parameters in this category:

Define the format of cut file data or AAMA


data conversion.

Define X and Y-axis scaling.

Define marker size.

Initialize RSO cutters.

Enter correction value for Center Line


parameters.

X Data Scale Factor


Changes the X-axis scaling to adjust the size of the
marker to the size of the available material. The range
of change permitted is 0.800 to 1.200 (80 to 120
percent) of the existing coordinate values in the marker.
To determine the X Data Scale Factor, divide the length
of usable material in the X-direction (spread length) by
the marker length.
For example, if the marker is 5.00 m long and the
material is only 4.95 m long:
1.

Divide the usable material length by the marker


length: 4.95 / 5.00 = 0.9900.

2.

Round down the Data Scale Factor to three decimal


places. In this example, set X Data Scale Factor to
0.990.

CAUTION: The X Data Scale Factor does not reset


automatically. Use either the Settings or Parameter
Manager command to reset the X Data Scale Factor to
100 percent. If you do not reset the Data Scale Factor,
you may improperly cut other markers.

Y Data Scale Factor


Changes the Y-axis scaling to adjust the size of the
marker to the size of the available material. The range
of change permitted is 0.800 to 1.200 (80 to 120
percent) of the existing coordinate values in the marker.
To determine the Y Data Scale Factor, divide the width
of usable material in the Y-direction (spread width) by
the marker width.
For example, if the marker is 5.00 m wide and the
material is only 4.95 m wide:
1.

Divide the usable material width by the marker


width: 4.95 / 5.00 = 0.9900.

2.

Round down the Data Scale factor to three decimal


places. In this example, set Y Data Scale Factor to
0.990.

CAUTION: The Y Data Scale Factor does not reset


automatically. Not resetting the Data Scale Factor, may
improperly cut other markers. Use either the Settings or
Parameter Manager command to reset the Y Data Scale
Factor to 100 percent.

Data Format
Identifies the format of the cut file data to the system.
The format you select must match the format used in
your cut files. There are three formats:

3.3 ENGLISH

4.2 ENGLISH

5.1 METRIC

The digit before the decimal point shows how many


places are reserved for the whole number. The digit
after the decimal point shows how many places are
reserved for the decimal.
Note: This parameter does not select the units of
measure (metric or English) displayed at the operator
console. Units of measure are set by the Metric Display
parameter.

18 Parameters

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Data Format/Scaling and RSO


Marker Size: Use Auto Calculate

Right Side Initialize

ON The system uses the automatically calculated


length and width of the marker whenever needed, for
example, Check Straightness, Check Origin, or Right
Side Option.

Initializes a cutter that has the Right Side Option (RSO).


After initializing on the operators side of the cutter, the
head moves to the position where:

OFF The system prompts for new marker size.


Note: If you set both this parameter and the Marker
Size: Use M20 Code parameter to ON, the system uses
the M20 code.
Hints on Using with Centerline Origin for
Automatic Tube Centering

X=5
Y = usable table width minus 5

AAMA Data Conversion


ENABLE -Converts AAMA (American Apparel
Manufacturers Association) data automatically at the
cutter. Use only when cutting AAMA data.
DISABLE Turns off this feature.

M20 code can contain the width of the spread for which
the marker was designed. If this parameter is turned off,
C-200MT uses the width of the marker to determine
centerline origin. Since many markers are either wider
or narrower then the spread from which they are cut, an
incorrect origin could result unless this parameter is
turned ON when using the Automatic Tube Centering
system.

Center Line Calibration


Sets a value to calibrate the system's calculation of the
origin when using Center Line Origin parameters.

Marker Size: Use M20 Code


ON The system uses the marker length and width in
the M20 code whenever needed, for example, Check
Straightness, Check Origin, or Right Side Option. The
software supports M20 codes from AM-5, AccuMark,
MicroMark, and Lectra CAD systems.
OFF Turns off this feature.
CAUTION: Do not set this parameter to ON if your
markers do not use M20 codes. The system will not
calculate the origin properly.
Note: If you set both this parameter and the Marker
Size: Use Auto Calculate parameter to ON, the system
uses the M20 code.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Parameters 19

Bite Parameters

Bite Parameters
Parameters in this category:

Define how the cutter handles bites.

Define end park position.

Are not for use on S-91 Static systems.

Allow Piece Reorder


Determines whether Run Time Biting reorders piece
cutting sequence in order to maximize bite lengths
when Variable Length Biting is ON (default).

Variable Length Biting


ON Turns on Variable Length Run Time Biting.
Pieces will only be split if they exceed the table surface.
OFF Turns off this feature. Static Length biting is
used instead.

Minimum Bite Length


Sets the length of a conveyor advance during a Static
Length bite.

Maximum Bite Length

ON Preprocesses all drills for pieces on the cutting


table before cutting any of the pieces.

Sets the maximum length of the bite window during a


Static Length bite or the maximum length of a conveyor
advance for a Variable Length bite.

OFF- Turns off this feature.

Pause Before Convey

Run Time Biting

ON Stops before conveying each bite off the table.


Press Start to continue.

ON Run Time Biting processes markers, turning


them into bite markers for cutting on the
GERBERcutter. Use to:

Bite and cut markers that do not have bite


information
Change bite information inserted by the
marker maker

OFF Turns off this feature. Remember to do this


when cutting markers that have bites added using:

SBITE utility in DOS

Bite Generation in the PreProcessor utility

Not for use on S-91 Static systems.

OFF Turns off this feature.

Pause Between Bites


ON Stops at the end of each bite to:

Reposition the spread

Use the Check Straightness command to reset


the origin

Use the Fabric Alignment command to set a


new Fabric Alignment angle

OFF Turns off this feature.

Convey Last Bite Off Table


ON When Contiguous Cut is ON, the system moves
the last bite off the cutting table after it is finished
processing the marker.
OFF Turns off this feature.

20 Parameters

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Bite Parameters
Bite Clip Start Position
Sets the start position (Y coordinate) of the bite clip. A
bite clip is:

A cut in the fabric that marks the end of a bite

Outside the marker

Perpendicular to the X-axis

This parameter can be used to manually relocate a bite


in case of bite error during cutting.
Note: A negative value is acceptable.

Bite Clip End Position

Marker End Park Position X


Determines the +X or -X position where the cutting
head parks after completing a marker. This parameter is
related to Marker End Park (0=None,1= -Y,2= +Y).

Marker End Park Position Y


Determines the +Y or -Y position where the cutting
head parks after completing a marker. This parameter is
related to Marker End Park (0=None,1= -Y,2= +Y).

Maximum Bite Adjustment


Sets the amount of adjustment the system can correct
for after a bite advance without generating an error.

Sets the end position (Y coordinate) of the bite clip.

Bite Park Location

Bite Park Offset

Controls which side of the cutting table a bite park


occurs. Bite park is the place that the cutter head moves
to when the conveyor advances a bite.

Sets the distance from the edge of the table where the
cutter head moves to while the conveyor is advancing a
bite. This parameter is related to Bite Park Location.

Insert M23 Edge Clip Code


ENABLE Identifies edge clips during Run Time
Biting.

ON The cutter head moves to the minus (left) side of


the cutting table.
OFF The cutter head moves to the plus (right) side of
the cutting table.
Note: This parameter is related to Bite Park Offset.

DISABLE Turns off this feature.

Bite Veeroff
Sets the length of veeroff in Y when overlapping for
split pieces. This ensures the split piece is fully cut out.
This parameter is related to Bite Overlap.

Marker End Park (0=None 1= -Y 2= +Y)


Determines the location where the cutting head parks
after completing a marker.
NONE Wait at current point
-Y Move to extreme -Y location
+Y Move to extreme +Y location
This parameter is related to Marker End Park Position
Xand Marker End Park Position Y.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Parameters 21

Bite Parameters
Cut Small Pieces First

Recalculate Small Pieces

Cut files are normally sequenced by CAD systems to


cut the pieces in a sinusoidal curve or lazy M. However,
most marking systems can order a change in sequence
to provide for cutting of small pieces before the larger
pieces are cut. Normally, it is the area of the piece that
determines its category. When Run Time Biting
recalculates the marker to insert bites, it can change the
order in which pieces will be cut. For that reason, there
are two parameters that can be set at the cutter to
maximize cut quality of small pieces during Run Time
Biting:

ON Cuts small pieces at the beginning of a bite until


the first large piece is cut.

Cut Small Pieces First

Max Area of Small Piece

OFF Turns off this feature.

Bite Overlap
If a piece lies across a bite boundary, the piece is cut in
two steps. At the end of the first bite, the knife veers off
the cut line. At the beginning of the second bite, the
knife veers into the cut line.
Use with Bite Veeroff. The X distance of the veeroff
equals half of Bite Overlap; the Y distance equals Bite
Veeroff.

Utilizing these parameters properly during run time


biting can improve small piece cut quality.

Conveyor Table Settle Time

The Cut Small Pieces First command instructs the


system to first cut all small pieces in a cut file. The
system must also know the Maximum Area of the Small
Piece the system will consider small.

Sets the amount of time the system will wait for the
conveyor to completely stop moving at the end of a
conveyor advance before the origin is adjusted and
cutting continues.

Max Area of Small Piece


Marker makers can order a change in sequence to
provide for cutting of small pieces before the larger
pieces are cut. Normally, it is the area of the piece that
determines its category. When Run Time Biting
recalculates the marker to insert bites, it can change the
order in which pieces will be cut. For that reason, there
are two parameters that can be set at the cutter to
maximize cut quality of small pieces during Run Time
Biting:

Cut Small Pieces First

Max Area of Small Piece

Continuous Cutting
This parameter turns on the pay-for Continuous Cutting
option. The Continuous Cutting Installed parameter
must be set to YES.
ON The cutter continues cutting, beginning the next
bite while the conveyor is moving the previous bite off
the table.
OFF The cutter pauses when it finishes processing a
bite.
Not for use with S-91 cutters.

Utilizing these parameters properly during run time


biting can improve small piece cut quality.
The Max Area of Small Piece parameter reflects the
maximum piece area the system will consider small for
a Cut Small Pieces First command.

22 Parameters

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Bite Parameters
Continuous Cutting Installed
This Field Service level parameter notifies the C200MT program whether or not the Continuous Cutting
option is installed. In order to use Continuous Cutting,
the system must:

Be equipped with a bite encoder mounted


under-the-table (not on the beam).

Have a variable speed (DC) CTOT motor.

Note: Bite lengths must be set to no more than one half


of the default settings for the system to prevent off-table
errors.
YES The C-200MT program supports continuous
cutting while the conveyor is advancing as a pay-for
option. The effect Continuous Cutting has on
throughput depends on piece size. If the marker
contains small pieces, this feature can have a positive
impact on overall system throughput. However, because
the usable cutting surface is effectively halved,
continuous cutting is not recommended for markers that
contain large pieces (longer than one half of the usable
table surface).
Parameter settings required for Continuous Cutting:

Continuous Cutting Installed must be set to


YES.

Continuous Cutting must be set to ON.

Conveyor Encoder Location must be set to


TABLE.

Variable Speed CTOT must be set to ON.

NO This option is not available.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Parameters 23

Options and Modes

Options and Modes


Parameters in this category turn on/off various
GERBERcutter features.

Use Edge Finders


YES When Centerline Origin Edge Points parameter
is turned ON, Automatic Tube Centering is used to find
the origin and fabric alignment for a tubular spread.
NO This feature is turned OFF.

Edge Finder Auto-Alignment


ON The cutter automatically checks origin and
fabric alignment for all bites in the cut file.
OFF This feature is turned OFF. The cutter checks
origin and fabric alignment for the first bite only and
waits for the operator to manually check origin and
fabric alignment for each successive bite.

Log Edge Finder Info


ON A log of events for the Automatic Tube
Centering system is recorded in the edge.log file in the
c:\report directory.
OFF This feature is turned OFF.

Dry Run Tool is Light


ON When Dry Run mode is selected, the light is
positioned at the location where the knife would be, if
cutting, and traces the cut path. This may be easier to
see than if the knife is used as the tool.
OFF When Dry Run mode is selected, the raised knife
traces the cut path.

Clear Origin on Cutfile Close


ON When a cut file is closed the origin returns to X0,
Y0.
OFF Turns off this feature.

Installed Edge Finders


NONE Neither of the two edge finders is installed
for the Automatic Tube Centering system.
-Y The edge finder closest to the operator console is
installed.
+Y The edge finder farthest from the operator
console is installed.
BOTH Two edge finders for the Automatic Tube
Centering system are installed.

Auto-Scale Y

Saving of Parameter Changes

ON Automatically scales data in the + or Y


direction while using the Automatic Tube Centering
system.

This service level parameter determines whether or not


parameter changes made at the user level can be
permanently saved to setup files.

OFF This feature is turned OFF. The Centerline


Origin Edge Points parameter must be turned ON.

ENABLE Prevents parameter changes from being


saved to setup files.

Max Auto-Scale Y Change

DISABLE Turns off this feature.

When the Auto Scale Y parameter is turned ON, enter a


plus or minus percentage of change allowable for
automatic data scaling. The Centerline Origin Edge
Points parameter must be turned ON.

24 Parameters

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Options and Modes


Single Step

Marker Stacking Reorder

ON Cutter executes one block of cut data at a time.


This ability is helpful when recovering from an error or
trying to determine what caused an error during cut file
(marker) processing.

YES Reorders the piece numbers in both stacked


markers so they are cut as if in one marker.

CAUTION: Do not use this mode to cut a marker


because the C axis is not working.

NO Cuts the entire bite of bottom marker and then


the entire bite of top marker.

Marker Stacking Reorder Channel

Note: During Single Step mode, the cutter head rises to


prevent fusing if more than three seconds elapse without
initiating a command. The cutter head lowers when you
initiate the next command.

Sets the width of the channel in which pieces must fit


when reordering for stacked markers.

OFF Cutter executes data normally.

1 Enables Native language support by telling the


system to use translated messages from the
C:\SYSFILES\NATIVE directory.

Marker Flip
ON Rotates a single (or the lower marker for marker
stacking) 180 degrees during processing. This feature
could be used, for example, to cut corduroy that was
laid in the wrong direction.
Because Marker Flip reverses the order in which the
pieces are cut, you can use Marker Flip on a
conveyorized system. The system cuts the marker from
the take-off end to the take-on end as usual.

Language Support

0 Turns off this feature.

Kanji Character Set


ENABLE Changes display settings for the operator
console monitor in order to display Kanji characters in
the C-200MT program.
DISABLE Turns off this feature.

OFF Turns off this feature.

Check Origin

Note: You must turn on Run Time Biting to use Marker


Flip. Also, Marker Flip must be turned ON before
selecting a marker.

ON Ensures that the marker fits completely on the


usable cutting surface.

Note: Unlike Marker Flip, Mirror Image does not


change the order in which the pieces are cut. Because
Mirror Image cuts the marker from take-on end to takeoff end, you can not use Mirror Image on a
conveyorized system.

Marker Flip Top


ON Rotates the top marker (for marker stacking) 180
degrees during processing; reorders pieces the same as
Marker Flip. This feature could be used, for example, to
cut corduroy that was laid in the wrong direction.
OFF Turns off this feature.

OFF Turns off this feature. Check Origin must be off


in order to use Fabric Alignment.
If a marker positioned incorrectly or the origin setting is
inappropriate, Check Origin gives you a range of
acceptable range of X and Y values for the origin. This
happens right after you press Start. A message displays
similar to the following:
Bad Origin: Y too high (50.00)
acceptable range: 30.000 45.055
In this example, set a new origin with a Y value that
falls between 30.000 and 45.055. The marker will now
fit within the usable cutting surface.
Note: The message displayed depends on the size of the
marker, the origin, and the data format.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Parameters 25

Options and Modes


Verify Keyboard Entry
ON Displays a dialog box during certain procedures
to verify keyboard entry.
OFF Turns off this feature.

Block Delete
ON The cutter does not cut lines that have Block
Delete codes inserted from the GPP POWER Processor.
OFF -The cutter ignores Block Delete code.

Cut/Plot Mode
Determines the tool to use during automatic processing.
CUT Selects the knife.

Delete Cut File After Cutting


ENABLE -Deletes cut files (markers) from the system
drive after cutting.
DISABLE Turns off this feature.
CAUTION: If cutting from a network, network files
will be deleted. Also, to avoid losing data, make sure
cut files are saved on disk or main frame when this
parameter is turned on.

Re-Sealer Option
ENABLE Tells the system to use the optional
Resealer. Available for S-5200 and S-7200 cutters.
DISABLE Turns off this feature.

PLOT Selects the pen.

Resealer Up For Continuous Cut

Dry Run

ON Standard Releaser logic is turned off; Resealer


remains continually in up position to cut lofty goods.
Available for S-5200 and S-7200 cutters.

ON Allows automatic cutting, including C-axis


rotation, with the knife up. Use when recovering to
verify that the correct marker is selected.
OFF Moves the cutter head with the knife down to
cut the marker.
Note: You can not choose Dry Run while in Plot mode.

OFF Standard Resealer logic is active.

Preprocess Drills
ON Tells the system to process all drills in the bite
before cutting pieces. Using this option saves wear and
tear on the optional electric drill.

Metric Display

OFF Turns off this feature.

Determines how measurements display in the C-200MT


program:

Center Line Origin Center Point

OFF Display English measurements


ON Display Metric measurements

ON Centers the cut of tubular goods relative to a


center stripe line or other fabric pattern. When using
Center Point, move the origin light to the center of the
spread. Then set the origin. The system determines
center line origin by subtracting half of marker width
from the origin just set.
OFF Turns off this feature.

26 Parameters

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Options and Modes


Center Line Origin Edge Points

Bar Code Reader Option

ON Centers the cut of tubular goods by calculating a


center line origin based on edge points. When using
Edge Points, move the origin light to the bottom corner
of the spread and then set the origin. Repeat for the top
corner of the spread. The system determines center line
origin by subtracting half of marker width from a
system- selected point half way between the upper and
lower points.

ON Tells the system to use the optional Bar Code


Scanner to read cut file and setup information.
OFF Turns off this feature.

Cutter Info Database Option

OFF Turns off this feature.

ENABLE -Turns on this optional program to


automatically save information to the CIDB database
while a marker is being cut.

Transfer Markers When Selected

To use this option

Transfers markers from a network to the /TEMP


directory in order to ensure uninterrupted cut data
transmission.

1.

Enable this parameter and save the setup file.

2.

Quit the C-200MT program.

3.

Restart the C-200MT program.

OFF Markers are not transferred.

DISABLE Turns off this feature.

COPY Markers are copied to the cutter's hard drive.


MOVE Markers are moved to the cutter's hard drive.

Y Axis Edge Align (0=N 1=+Y 2=-Y)


Aligns cutter head with edge of spread.
0 Not installed
1 +Y side
2 -Y side

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Parameters 27

Mirror Image and Clipping Window

Mirror Image and


Clipping Window
Parameters in this category:

Turn on the mirroring options which rotate the


marker before cutting.

Turn on the clipping window feature and


define boundaries.

Mirroring Option
ENABLE Allows you to use Mirror Image mode or
Y-axis Mirror Image mode to rotate a marker during
processing. Pieces are not reordered.
DISABLE Turns off this feature.
Note: If you disable Mirroring Option, the other
mirroring parameters are not valid.
Note: To reorder pieces when rotating a marker 180
degrees, use the Marker Flip parameters instead.

Mirror Image
ON Rotates a marker and cuts a mirror image of the
marker; pieces are not reordered. This parameter might
be used in the aerospace industry to cut a wing.
Mirroring Option must be enabled in order to use this
parameter. For use on S-91 Static cutters only.
When Y-Axis Mirror Image is OFF, this feature rotates
a marker 180 degrees and cuts pieces from the take-on
end of the table to the take-off end. For example, if
piece number 1 is normally cut at the lower left (near to
the operator), it would still be cut first but in the upper
right corner of the table. Use only for markers that fit
entirely on the cutting surface.
When Y-Axis Mirror Image is ON, this feature rotates
the marker along the Y-axis only; pieces are not
reordered. For example, if piece number 1 is normally
cut at the lower left (near to the operator), it would still
be cut first but in the upper left corner of the table. Can
be used for markers that are longer than the cutting
surface.
OFF The system cuts the marker normally (without
mirroring).

28 Parameters

Y-Axis Mirror Image


Rotates the marker along the Y-axis only; it is useful for
processing different markers that have the same width.
The marker can be longer than the usable surface.
ON Uses Y-axis Mirror Image mode for the marker.
Mirroring Option must be enabled and Mirror Image
must be turned ON; also define Y-Axis Mirror
Reflection Line.
OFF Uses Mirror Image mode for the marker.

Y-Axis Mirror Reflection Line


Sets the reflection line for Y-Axis Mirroring. Set this
equal to the width of the marker. Used when Y-Axis
Mirror Image is ON.
Note: Every marker using this setup file must have the
same width.

Clipping Window Option


ON Eliminates unwanted travel with the knife down
outside the folded edge of goods. Lets you set a low and
a high boundary so the system will not cut fabric
outside these boundaries.
OFF Turns off this feature.

Clipping Low Boundary


Sets a low clipping boundary in the -Y direction from
the origin. Clipping Window Option must be ON.

Clipping High Boundary


Sets a high clipping boundary in the +Y direction from
the origin. Clipping Window Option must be ON.

Clipping Low Boundary (Top Mrk)


Sets a low clipping boundary in the -Y direction from
the origin for the top marker when using Marker
Stacking. Clipping Window Option must be ON.

Clipping High Boundary (Top Mrk)


Sets a high clipping boundary in the +Y direction from
the origin for the top marker when using Marker
Stacking. Clipping Window Option must be ON.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

OPSTOP and Report Options

OPSTOP and Report


Options

Not for use on S-91 Static systems.

Parameters in this category:

ENABLE The cutter responds to M01 (Optional


Stop) codes in the marker. When the cutter reads a M01
code, it stops the cutting to allow plaid/stripe matching.
Slew the beam to align and press Start to resume
cutting.

Control how cutter responds to Opstop codes.

Define Cutter Info Database reporting.

Camera Extension Distance


Not currently in use by the AccuMatch system.

Use AccuMatch
ENABLE For any cut file that contains Opstops, the
AccuMatch system is used to capture images and match
to the fabric.
DISABLE This feature is turned OFF. The
GERBERcutter pauses whenever an Opstop is
encountered in a cut file and waits for the operator to
manually check and adjust match points.
For use on GT 3250, S-3200, or GTxL systems only.

OPSTOP Section Processing


The Run Time Biting (SBITE) software can perform
special processing of sectional" Opstops placed in
"empty" pieces by Microdynamics OPTICUT systems.
When this parameter is enabled, SBITE does the
following:

As soon as one section is fully cut, SBITE


conveys the next section as far left as possible
before beginning to process it. This minimizes
the chances of the sections opstop point not
yet being on the table.
No matter which piece in the current section
contains the opstop, SBITE checks that the
opstop is processed before any pieces in that
section are cut.

Note: There should be exactly one opstop per section.


ON This type of Opstop is processed before any
pieces in the section are cut These Opstops will be
moved into the piece (in the section) whose leading (-X)
end point is closest to the take-off end of the table.

OPSTOP

DISABLE The cutter ignores M01 codes.

Preset OPSTOP
ON Before cutting begins, the cutter head moves to
each Opstop point defined in the marker so you can
make any necessary adjustments for plaid/stripe
matching. This optimizes throughput during actual
cutting.
OFF Turns off this feature.

Regional OPSTOP
ENABLE Adjustments made on a piece at an
Opstop apply to all successive pieces until the system
encounters the next Opstop.
DISABLE Turns off this feature.

OPSTOP Slow Slew


Provides additional time for making long adjustments
when using Opstops.
ON The cutter automatically enters slow slew
operation (feed rate 1) when stopped for an OPSTOP.
OFF- The slew speed for an OPSTOP is determined by
the feed rate setting.

Cutter Info Database Output


FILE Writes report data in the Cutter Info Database
to the C:\REPORT\MARKER*.RPT file.
OFF Turns off this feature.

OFF Turns off this feature.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Parameters 29

Selvage Cut/Contiguous Cut

Selvage Cut/Contiguous
Cut
Parameters in this category:

Control Selvage/Web cutting for vertical line


cuts through the selvage or the selvage and
web.

Control processing of consecutive markers.

Selv/Web (0=Off 1= Selv 2 = Web&Sel)


Automatically cuts a vertical line through the selvage on
both sides of the material, or through both the selvage
and the web (uncut material) between pieces. The
selvage/web cut occurs after the bite edge clip, but
before the conveyor advance.
Performance is controlled by the Selvage Cut Position,
Selvage Cut Size Bottom, Selvage Cut Size Top,
and Minimum Web Cut Size parameters.

Intermarker Gap
Sets the distance between the end of one marker and the
beginning of the next. For example, can be used when
Continuous Cut is ON.

Minimum Size of First Bite


When Contiguous Cut is ON, sets the minimum table
length that must be available for the next marker to be
processed without conveying cut goods off the cutting
table. This parameter works only when Convey Last
Bite Off Table is OFF.

Contiguous Cut
ON The system automatically sets an origin for the
next marker a predetermined distance prior to the end of
the current file. This allows the cutter to continually cut
markers when using a job queue.
OFF The system stops when it finishes processing a
marker.

OFF Turns off selvage/web cutting.


SELVAGE Turns on selvage cutting only.
WEB&SELV. Turns on both selvage and web
cutting.

Selvage Cut Position


Determines -X distance from the bite clip to where the
selvage/web cut occurs.

Selvage Cut Size Bottom


Determines how far the selvage cut extends below the
actual marker.

Selvage Cut Size Top


Determines how far the selvage cut extends above the
actual marker.

Minimum Web Cut Size


Sets the minimum thickness allowable for a web cut to
be made. If the distance between any pieces on the
selvage/web cut line is less than this setting, no web cut
occurs.

30 Parameters

C-200MT Software Users Guide

System Setup Parameters

System Setup
Parameters
Parameters in this category set maximum beam
velocities for cutting and are used by Field Service to
setup systems.

Beam Square Adjustment

Y-Axis Stepsize
Sets the size of one step as read by the Y-axis encoder;
can be seen as a square wave on an oscilloscope.

Usable Table Distance in X


Sets the usable distance on the table in the X direction
(from position 0,0 to +X).

Usable Table Distance in Y

System generated value based on the distance between


index positions for x1 and x2 as determined by the
Beam Square Test and Beam Squareness diagnostics.

Sets the usable distance on the table in the Y direction


(from position 0,0 to +Y).

Beam Squared

C Home to System 0 Degrees

YES indicates that the Beam Square Adjustment value


is valid; NO indicates the beam is ready to be squared.
This parameter can be set to NO using the Beam
Squareness diagnostic.

Sets the number of degrees between the C-axis home


position and 0 degrees. Reset this parameter whenever
the head is changed.

Bite Error Adjustment


Sets distance between bites, independent of the
automatic bite adjustment. Used only on cutters with
Dual Beam option.

Maximum Cut Velocity


Sets the maximum beam velocity when the beam moves
in a straight line with the knife down. This value is in
inches or centimeters per minute.

Max Cut Acceleration


Sets the maximum acceleration for X and Y axes
allowed during cutting. This parameter can be set to
reduce vibration of the knife.

C Axis Sharpen Speed

Offset in X Knife
Sets the offset distance of the knife from the home
position in the X direction (from origin to the center of
the tool).

Offset in Y Knife
Sets the offset distance of the knife from the home
position in the Y direction (from origin to the center of
the tool).

Offset in X Drill 1
Sets the offset distance of the first drill from the home
position in the X direction (from origin to the center of
the tool).

Offset in Y Drill 1

Sets C-axis rotation velocity during sharpening. Not for


use on GT 3250 OR S-3200cutters.

Sets the offset distance of the first drill from the home
position in the Y direction (from origin to the center of
the tool).

X-Axis Stepsize

Offset in X Pen

Sets the size of one step as read by the X-axis encoder;


can be seen as a square wave on an oscilloscope.

Sets the offset distance of the knife from the home


position in the X direction (from origin to the center of
the tool).

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Parameters 31

System Setup Parameters


Offset in Y Pen
Sets the offset distance of the knife from the home
position in the Y direction (from origin to the center of
the tool).

Ramp Down Dist Auto Bite


Sets the distance from the end of the bite where the DC
conveyor motor begins to step down voltage until the
conveyor is stopped during an Automatic bite.
Not for use on S-91 cutters.

Offset in X Drill 2
Sets the offset distance of the auxiliary drill from the
home position in the X direction.

Offset in Y Drill 2
Sets the offset distance of the auxiliary drill from the
home position in the Y direction.

Offset X Camera
Sets the offset distance of the camera for the
AccuMatch system from the home position in the X
direction.

Offset Edge Sensors X


Sets the offset distance of the edge sensor for the
Automatic Tube Centering system from the home
position in the X direction.

Offset Bottom Edge Sensor Y


Sets the offset distance of the edge sensor nearest the
operator console for the Automatic Tube Centering
system from the home position.

Offset Top Edge Sensor Y


Sets the offset distance of the edge sensor farthest from
the operator console for the Automatic Tube Centering
system from the home position.

Max Extension -Y Edge Finder


Sets the maximum number of encoder counts that the Y edge finder can move toward the +Y edge finder. Use
with the Automatic Tube Centering option.

Max Extension +Y Edge Finder


Sets the maximum number of encoder counts that the
+Y edge finder can move toward the -Y edge finder.
Use with the Automatic Tube Centering option.

Offset Y Camera
Sets the offset distance of the camera for the
AccuMatch system from the home position in the Y
direction.

32 Parameters

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Cut File Preprocessor Parameters

Cut File Preprocessor


Parameters
Parameters in this category are used with the
PreProcessor command in the Utilities menu.

Length of Reverse Segment


Sets the distance from the folded edge to plunge the
knife before cutting the fold.

Edge Clipping Angle

Transfer Angle
Sets the minimum angle for the transfer point. When
optimizing cut path, the system makes sure that the
angle of entry into another piece is larger than this
value.

Max Length to Ignore


Sets the largest line segment that can be ignored after
removing common lines.

Max Distance with Knife Down

Sets the minimum angle between the folded edge and


the segment of the piece at that fold.

Sets the maximum distance between two points with the


knife down; this parameter should match the Maximum
Segment Length parameter.

Knife Width

Message Stop

Sets the size of the knife, measured from the cutting


edge to the heel.

YES Adds M20 codes to a cut file.

Gap to Ignore
Sets the smallest gap that will be ignored during cut
path optimization.

NO Turns off this feature.

Max # Points Per Piece


Sets the maximum number of points allowed per piece.

Distance to Corner

Overlap Distance

Sets the length from the nearest corner of a piece to the


point where the knife enters the piece to prevent cutting
over a corner. This value should not be less than the
knife width.

Not used in this software release.

Path Overlap
Sets the amount of overlap at the transfer points two
pieces. This amount will automatically be inserted
before and after the transfer points of both pieces.

Corner Angle

Smallest Piece
Sets the maximum area for a piece which the system
will consider as being small.

Percent of Piece
Sets the % of a piece that must be included in a window
in order to be cut with other pieces in that window.

Sets the maximum inside angle to consider the point as


a corner. An inside angle is 180 degrees minus the
change in knife heading.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Parameters 33

Queue Manager Parameters

Queue Manager
Parameters
Parametersin this category relate to the Queue Manager
utility.

Auto Start Jobs in Queue


ON The system automatically processes all jobs in a
Queue Manager job queue without stopping.
OFF Turns off this feature. The system stops
between jobs in the queue.

Del Job From Queue After Cutting


YES Each job entry is deleted from the job queue
file immediately after being processed; the cut file is not
deleted.
NO Turns off this feature.

Del Queue After Cutting


Determines whether a job queue and/orcut files in it are
deleted immediately when done cutting the queue.
QUE FILE Queue file is deleted only.

Security Parameters
Parameters in this category control the ability to change
or edit Cutter and Notch parameter tables when opening
an AccuMark marker for cut processing.

User Parameter Table - Selecting


When this Security parameter is ENABLED, an
additional dialog box displays after choosing the
AccuMark marker you want to open. This dialog box
allows you to select different Cutter and Notch
parameter tables for the current marker.
Note: To make edits to these parameter tables, the User
Parameter Table - Editing parameter must also be
enabled.

User Parameter Table -Editing


When this Security parameter is ENABLED, an
additional dialog box displays after choosing the
AccuMark marker you want to open. This dialog box
allows you to edit the original Cutter and Notch
parameter tables for the current marker.
Note: To select different parameter tables, the User
Parameter Table - Selecting parameter must also be
enabled.

MARKERS Markers in a queue are deleted but not


the queue file.
QUE&MARKER The queue file and all markers in
the queue are deleted.
OFF Turns off this feature.

Read Queue Name Bar Codes


YES When this feature is turned on, all bar codes
read (except setup files *.CNF) are assumed to be job
queues and are automatically opened for running.
NO Bar codes read will be opened as single cut files.

34 Parameters

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Field Service Level Categories and Parameters

Field Service Level


Categories and
Parameters

Cutter Type
Dual Beam
ENABLE Turns on the Dual Beam option. For S-91
ZVC cutters only.

Some categories and parameters in the following


sections can only be accessed using the Field Service
password.

DISABLE Turns off this feature.

Note: Additional Field Service level parameters are


included in categories that can be accessed at any level.
These parameters are documented with the applicable
category.

Identifies whether or not the system supports the


AccuMatch system for plaid/stripe matching:

Field Service Level categories and parameters in these


categories are listed in the table below.

AccuMatch Installed

NO or YES

Table Length (0=Standard,1=Long)


Identifies the length of the cutting surface for GTxL,
GT 3250/5250/7250 and S-3200/5200/7200 cutters:
STANDARD or LONG

Beam Width
Identifies the width of the beam:
1.7m, 2.0m, 2.4m (for GTxL, GT 3250, OR
S-3200/5200/7200 cutters)
3.0m

(for S-91 cutters except 10 ft. S-91 Static)

3.3m

(for GT 5250/7250 and S-5200/7200 cutters)

Right Side Control


ENABLE Turns on the Right Side Option (RSO).
DISABLE Turns off this feature.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Parameters 35

Field Service Level Categories and Parameters

PC Serial Communication

Dry Haul Speeds

MCC Communications Port

Projector Output Port

Selects the communications port for PC to MCC


communications; choices:

Sets the communications port for the seamless interface


between the GERBERcutter and third-party projector
software.

COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4.

MCC Comm Port Beam 2


Selects the communications port for PC to MCC
communications for the second beam on an S-91 cutter
with Dual Beam option; choices:
COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4.

Maximum Dry Haul Velocity


Sets the maximum velocity during automatic cutting
when the tools are up.

Dry Haul Acceleration


Sets the dry haul acceleration during automatic cutting
when the tools are up.

Bar Code Reader Com Port


Sets the communications port for the optional Bar Code
Reader; choices:
COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4.

36 Parameters

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Field Service Level Categories and Parameters

C-Axis

XY Axes

C-Axis delay

X Home to System 0

Sets the amount of delay at the end of a C-axis move


before the system starts the next move.

Sets the X-axis 0.00 inch position a specific distance


from the -X home switch.

C-Axis cut velocity

Y Home to System 0

Sets the maximum velocity of C-axis rotation during


cutting.

Sets the Y-axis 0.00 inch position a specific distance


from the -Y home switch.

C-Axis max velocity

XY-Axes delay

Sets the maximum velocity of the C-axis when turning


corners.

Sets the amount of wait time after an XY move is made.

C-Axis Acceleration
Sets the acceleration of the C-axis in radians per second
squared.

Cutfile Percentage Primary Beam


Sets the percentage of the spread currently on the table
which is cut by the Primary beam on a cutter with the
Dual Beam option.

C Axis Settle Time


Determines the amount of time in seconds the system
waits for the C-axis to settle at the completion of a Caxis turn. This parameter may have to be increased to
prevent C-axis following errors when the number of
sharpen cycles is set higher than 8 on an S-91 system.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Parameters 37

Field Service Level Categories and Parameters

Limit Switches
Lm Switch Status Bite Sensor

Lm Switch Status Sharpen Arm


Sets the status of the sharpen arm limit switch. Only
reports status of limits; mechanical stops actually limit.
Used on GT 3250 OR S-3200cutters only.

Sets the status of the bite sensor limit switch. Only


reports status of limits; mechanical stops actually limit.

NONE No limit switch.

NONE No limit switch.

UP Just the Up limit switch.

UP Just the Up limit switch.

DOWN Just the Down limit switch.

Not used on S-91 cutters.

BOTH The Up and Down limit switches.

Lm Switch Status Drill 1

Lm Switch Status Drill 2

Sets the status of the drill limit switch. Only reports


status of limits; mechanical stops actually limit.

Sets the status of the auxiliary drill limit switch. Only


reports status of limits; mechanical stops actually limit.

NONE No limit switch.

NONE No limit switch.

UP Just the Up limit switch.

UP Just the Up limit switch.

DOWN Just the Down limit switch.

DOWN Just the Down limit switch.

BOTH The Up and Down limit switches.

BOTH The Up and Down limit switches.

Lm Switch Status Knife

Limit Switch Status Edge Sensor

Sets the status of the knife limit switch. Only reports


status of limits; mechanical stops actually limit.

Sets the status of the edge sensor limit switch. Only


reports status of limits; mechanical stops actually limit.

NONE No limit switch.

NONE No limit switch.

UP Just the Up limit switch.

UP Just the Up limit switch.

DOWN Just the Down limit switch.

DOWN Just the Down limit switch.

BOTH The Up and Down limit switches.

BOTH The Up and Down limit switches.

Lm Switch Status Pen


Sets the status of the pen limit switch. Only reports
status of limits; mechanical stops actually limit.
NONE No limit switch.
UP Just the Up limit switch.
DOWN Just the Down limit switch.
BOTH The Up and Down limit switches.

38 Parameters

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Field Service Level Categories and Parameters

Drill

Servo (DSP) Coefficients

Drill Idle Time Before Shutoff

C Max Follow Error

Sets the time between drill commands before the drill


shuts off. Use when the Drill On Only While Selected
parameter is ON.

Sets the maximum allowed amount of lag between the


actual C-axis position and the commanded C-axis
position without the system generating a following
error.

Drill on only while selected


ON The drill is only on when a drill command is
encountered in the cut data.
OFF The drill stays on as long as the knife switch is
on.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Beam Bite Gain


Determines how closely the beam follows the conveyor
during a conveyor advance. On certain systems, this
parameter may need to be lowered to eliminate beam
oscillation during the conveyor advance. Lowering this
parameter causes a lag between the conveyor and beam
position during the bite. This lag should not affect the
accuracy of the bite, however, because the beam will
catch up to the conveyor at the end of the bite.

Parameters 39

Field Service Level Categories and Parameters

Time Considerations
Max time: To move up bite sns
Sets the maximum time allowed for the transition of
tools. If value is exceeded the system displays an error.
Not used on S-91 cutters.

Max time: To move down bite sns


Sets the maximum time allowed for the transition of
tools. If value is exceeded the system displays an error.
Always down on S-91 cutters.

Max time: To move up drill 1


Sets the maximum time allowed for the transition of
tools. If value is exceeded the system displays an error.

Max time: To move down drill 1


Sets the maximum time allowed for the transition of
tools. If value is exceeded the system displays an error.

Max time: To move up knife


Sets the maximum time allowed for the transition of
tools. If value is exceeded the system displays an error.

Max time: To move down knife


Sets the maximum time allowed for the transition of
tools. If value is exceeded the system displays an error.

Max time: To move up pen

Max time: Up to speed drill


Sets the maximum time allowed for motor to turn on
before a load is applied.

Max time: To turn off drill


Sets the maximum time allowed for motor to turn off.

Max time: To turn on vacuum


Sets the maximum time allowed for motor to turn on
before a load is applied.

Max time: To turn on drives


Sets the maximum time allowed for the X, Y, C, Knife,
and drill motors to turn on before a load is applied.

Max time: Idle in TrimCut Mode


Sets the maximum time the TrimCut mode stays active
when in the idle state.

Max time: Idle in ManBite Mode


Sets the maximum time the manual bite mode stays
active when in the idle state.

Max Time: Vacuum Drop


Sets the maximum time allowed for the vacuum to drop
before a bite. If exceeded, the system displays an error.
Used for S-91 ZVC and TCW cutters only.

Max Time for Auto Bite

Sets the maximum time allowed for the transition of


tools. If value is exceeded the system displays an error.

Sets the maximum time allowed for the conveyor to


ramp down to a stop when the system turns the
conveyor off during an Automatic Bite.

Max time: To move down pen

Not used on S-91 cutters.

Sets the maximum time allowed for the transition of


tools. If value is exceeded the system displays an error.

Max Time: Engage Edge Sensor

Max time: Up to speed knife


Sets the maximum time allowed for motor to turn on
before a load is applied.

40 Parameters

Set the maximum time allowed for the edge sensor to


engage the spread while automatically calculating
Origin and Fabric Alignment for the Automatic Tube
Centering System.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Field Service Level Categories and Parameters

Conveyor and CTOT

TONT Stop Distance

Velocity Cnvyr Jog

Sets the distance from the end of the conveyor advance


when the conveyorized Take ON Table stop signal is
output.

Sets the speed of conveyor movement while jogging in


the forward and reverse directions.
Not used on S-91 cutters.

CTOT2 Start Delay

Velocity Cnvyr Man Bite

Sets the time interval between when the conveyor starts


moving and the Conveyorized Take Off Table start
signal is output.

Sets the speed of conveyor movement while performing


a manual bite.

CTOT2 Stop Distance

Not used on S-91 cutters.

Sets the distance from the end of the conveyor advance


when the Conveyorized Take Off Table stop signal is
output.

Velocity Cnvyr Auto Bite


Sets the speed of conveyor movement while performing
an automatic bite.
Not used on S-91 cutters.

Conveyor Ramp Down Time


Sets the time the system allows for the conveyor to
ramp down to a stop when it turns off the conveyor after
a jog or manual bite.

Bite Encoder Step (beam)


Sets the size of one step as read by the bite encoder
(located on the beam or head).

Conveyor Encoder LOC (0=B 1=T)


Identifies where the bite encoder is located on the cutter.
Choices are:
BEAM or TABLE

Not used on S-91 cutters.

Bite Encoder Step (table)

CTOT Stop Distance

Sets the size of one step as read by the bite encoder (if
located at the table).

Sets the distance from the end of the bite when the
Conveyorized Take Off Table is shut off.
Not used on S-91 cutters.

Max Allowable Conveyor Friction


Sets the maximum amount of current in Amps needed
to move the conveyor. (Used only by the Conveyor
Friction Diagnostic; not yet implemented)
Not used on S-91 cutters.

Velocity Cnvyr Cut Bite


Sets the speed at which the conveyor moves when the
C-200MT program is biting a marker while cutting.

Variable Speed CTOT


ON Tells the system that the type of CTOT for the
cutter is variable speed.
OFF -Tells the system that the type of CTOT for the
cutter is fixed speed.

TONT Start Delay


Sets the time interval between when the conveyor starts
moving and the conveyorized Take ON Table start
signal is output.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Parameters 41

Field Service Level Categories and Parameters

Software Parameters

Log OPSTOP Debug Info

Event Logging

ON Tracks events that occur while working with


Opstops using the AccuMatch system.

ENABLE Tracks events, such as cutter response to


commands and messages displayed. Leave this feature
turned on in order to use its tracking ability when
recovering from error conditions.
DISABLE Turns off this feature.
Note: This parameter in the Software Parameters
category is set at DISABLE by default. To have the C200MT program log information about Origin in
Restore State, Opstop, and CIDB, Event Logging must
be enabled.

OFF Turns off this feature.


Note: To have the C-200MT program log information
for this parameter, the Event Logging parameter must
be turned ON.

Log Origin Debug Info


ON Tracks events that occur while finding the origin
using the Automatic Tube Centering System.
OFF Turns off this feature.

Data Logging Mask


Identifies which motor response data is logged.

Milliseconds between samples


Sets the time between samples when data is being
logged.

Log Writes to VARSAVE

Log CIDB Debug Info


ENABLE Tracks events that occur while generating
CIDB reports.
DISABLE Turns off this feature.
Note: To have the C-200MT program log information
for this parameter, the Event Logging parameter must
be turned ON.

ENABLE Tracks events, such as cutter response to


commands and messages displayed. Leave this feature
turned on in order to use its tracking ability when
recovering from error conditions.
DISABLE Turns off this feature.
Note: To have the C-200MT program log information
for this parameter, the Event Logging parameter must
be turned ON.

42 Parameters

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Index

Index
A
AAMA Data Conversion ................................. 19
AccuMatch Installed........................................ 35
AccuMatch, use ............................................... 29
Active Beams..................................................... 9
Advance Before Plunge Distance ...................... 9
Advance Ignore Angle ..................................... 10
Allow Piece Reorder........................................ 20
Auto Start Jobs in Queue ................................. 34
Auto-Scale Y ................................................... 24

B
Bar Code Reader Com Port ............................. 36
Bar Code Reader Option.................................. 27
Beam Bite Gain................................................ 39
Beam Square Adjustment ................................ 31
Beam Squared.................................................. 31
Beam Width ..................................................... 35
Bite Clip End Position ..................................... 21
Bite Clip Start Position .................................... 21
Bite Encoder Step (beam) ................................ 41
Bite Encoder Step (table)................................. 41
Bite Error Adjustment...................................... 31
Bite Overlap..................................................... 22
Bite Parameters................................................ 20
Bite Park Location ........................................... 21
Bite Park Offset ............................................... 21
Bite Vacuum Level .......................................... 12
Bite Veeroff ..................................................... 21
Block Delete .................................................... 26
Bristl Cleanr (0=N, 1=Motr, 2=Pneum) .......... 14
Bristle Cleaner Parameters............................... 14
Bristle Cleaner Sweeps per Slat....................... 14

C
C Home to System 0 Degrees .......................... 31
C Max Follow Error......................................... 39
Camera Extension Distance ............................. 29
Categories .................................................... 5, 35
category................................................. 9, 11, 13,
15, 18, 20, 24, 28, 29, 30, 31

C-200MT Software Users Guide

C-axis ...............................................................37
Acceleration..................................................37
cut velocity ...................................................37
delay .............................................................37
Max Angle....................................................10
max velocity .................................................37
Settle Time....................................................37
Sharpen Speed ..............................................31
Yaw Angle....................................................10
Center Line Calibration....................................19
Center Line Origin Center Point ......................26
Center Line Origin Edge Points .......................27
Check Origin ....................................................25
Cleaner Head Retract/Plunge Time..................14
Cleaner Head Sweep Time...............................14
Clear Origin on Cutfile Close ..........................24
Clipping High Boundary..................................28
Clipping High Boundary (Top Mrk) ................28
Clipping Low Boundary...................................28
Clipping Low Boundary (Top Mrk).................28
Clipping Window Option.................................28
Contiguous Cut ................................................30
Continuous Cutting ..........................................22
Continuous Cutting Installed............................23
Convey Last Bite Off Table .............................20
Conveyor and CTOT........................................41
Conveyor Encoder LOC (0=B 1=T) ................41
Conveyor Ramp Down Time ...........................41
Conveyor Table Settle Time ............................22
Corner Advance Distance ..................................9
Corner Angle....................................................33
Corner Miter Distance......................................10
Corner Overcut Distance....................................9
CTOT - Stop Distance......................................41
CTOT2 Start Delay ..........................................41
CTOT2 Stop Distance......................................41
cut acceleration, max........................................31
Cut Distance Limit .............................................7
Cut File Preprocessor Parameters ......................33
Cut Small Pieces First ......................................22
Cut Speed=Maximum Knife Speed ...................6
Cut/Maximum Knife Speed ...............................6
Cut/Plot Mode ..................................................26
Cutfile Percentage Primary Beam....................37
Cutter Info Database Option ............................27
Cutter Info Database Output ............................29
Cutter Type ......................................................35
Cutting Parameters .............................................9

Parameters 43

Index
D
Data Format ..................................................... 18
Data Format/Scaling and RSO......................... 18
Data Logging Mask ......................................... 42
data scale factor ............................................... 18
Del Job From Queue After Cutting.................. 34
Del Queue After Cutting.................................. 34
Delete Cut File After Cutting........................... 26
Distance to Corner ........................................... 33
Drill Idle Time Before Shutoff ........................ 39
Drill on only while selected ............................. 39
drill speed parameter.......................................... 6
Drill Speed Parameters ...................................... 6
Dry Haul Speeds .............................................. 36
Dry Haul x Acceleration .................................. 36
Dry Haul/Minimum Knife Speed....................... 6
Dry Run ........................................................... 26
Dry Run Tool is Light...................................... 24
Dual Beam ....................................................... 35
Dual Beam Cutter .............................................. 9

E
Edge Clip Code................................................ 21
Edge Clipping Angle ....................................... 33
Edge Finder Auto-Alignment .......................... 24
Edge Finders
installed ........................................................ 24
log info ......................................................... 24
use ................................................................ 24
Energy Savings Mode...................................... 12
Event Logging.................................................. 42

F
Field Service Level Categories and Parameters . 35

G
Gap to Ignore ................................................... 33

H
Heavy Duty Drill Speed..................................... 6
home, C to System 0 Degrees .......................... 31

Ignore Aux Drill (M44) Codes.........................13


Ignore Codes Parameters..................................13
Ignore Display Msg (M20) Codes....................13
Ignore Feedrate (F) Codes................................13
Ignore Label Cycle (M31) Codes.....................13
Ignore Lift & Plunge (M46) Codes..................13
Ignore Main Drill (M43) Codes .......................13
Ignore Move Conveyor (M69) Codes ..............13
Ignore OV AP Off (M19) Codes......................13
Ignore Overcut Off (M18) Codes.....................13
Ignore Pen (D1+ D2) Codes.............................13
Ignore Sharpen (M42) Codes ...........................13
Ignore Slowdown Codes ..................................14
Insert M23 Edge Clip Code..............................21
Installed Edge Finders......................................24
Intermarker Gap ...............................................30

J
job queue
auto start .......................................................34
del after cutting.............................................34

K
Kanji Character Set ..........................................25
KI
Corner Disable Time ....................................15
Deflection Angle ..........................................15
Error Detection .............................................15
Fail Time ......................................................15
Gain ..............................................................15
Max Turn Angle ...........................................15
On/Off...........................................................15
Option...........................................................15
KI Spring Factor...............................................15
Knife and Drill Speeds Parameters ....................6
Knife and Path Intelligence Parameters ...........15
Knife Break Force ............................................17
Knife Break Risk Point ....................................17
Knife Spd Sensor
Volts per KRPM .............................................6
Knife Speed Checking........................................6
knife speed parameter ........................................6
Knife Wear Limit ...............................................8
Knife Wear Type................................................7
Knife Width......................................................33

Idle Knife Speed ................................................ 6


Ignore Auto Origin (M70) Codes .................... 13
44 Parameters

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Index
L
Language Support............................................ 25
Length of Reverse Segment............................. 33
Lift & Plunge Corner Angle .............................. 9
Limit Switch Status - Edge Sensor .................. 38
Limit Switches ................................................. 38
Lm Switch Status - Bite Sensor ....................... 38
Lm Switch Status - Drill 1 ............................... 38
Lm Switch Status - Drill 2 ............................... 38
Lm Switch Status - Knife................................. 38
Lm Switch Status - Pen.................................... 38
Lm Switch Status - Sharpen Arm .................... 38
Log CIDB Debug Info ..................................... 42
Log Edge Finder Info....................................... 24
Log OPSTOP Debug Info................................ 42
Log Origin Debug Info .................................... 42
Log Writes to VARSAVE ............................... 42

M
M17 (0 Heel Cut) Advance.............................. 10
M19 (Slit Notch) Advance............................... 10
M25 Slowdown Percentage ............................. 10
Marker End Park (0=None, 1=-Y, 2=+Y) ....... 21
Marker End Park Position X............................ 21
Marker End Park Position Y............................ 21
Marker Flip ...................................................... 25
Marker Flip Top............................................... 25
Marker Size
Use Auto Calculate ...................................... 19
Use M20 Code.............................................. 19
Marker Stacking Reorder................................. 25
Marker Stacking Reorder Channel .................. 25
Max # Points Per Piece .................................... 33
Max Allowable Conveyor Friction .................. 41
Max Area of Small Piece................................. 22
Max Auto-Scale Y Change .............................. 24
Max Cut Acceleration...................................... 31
Max Distance with Knife Down ...................... 33
Max Extension +Y Edge Finder ...................... 32
Max Extension -Y Edge Finder ....................... 32
Max Length to Ignore ...................................... 33
Max time
Engage Edge Sensor..................................... 40
for Auto Bite ................................................ 40
Idle in ManBite Mode .................................. 40
Idle in TrimCut Mode .................................. 40
To move down - bite sns .............................. 40

C-200MT Software Users Guide

To move down - drill 1.................................40


To move down - knife ..................................40
To move down - pen.....................................40
To move up - bite sns ...................................40
To move up - drill 1......................................40
To move up - knife .......................................40
To move up pen ............................................40
To turn off - drill...........................................40
To turn on - drives ........................................40
To turn on - vacuum .....................................40
Up to speed - drill .........................................40
Up to speed - knife .......................................40
Vacuum Drop ...............................................40
Maximum Bite Adjustment..............................21
Maximum Bite Length .....................................20
Maximum Cut Velocity....................................31
Maximum Dry Haul Velocity ..........................36
Maximum Segment Length..............................10
MCC Communications Port.............................36
Message Stop ...................................................33
Metric Display..................................................26
Milliseconds between samples.........................42
Minimum Bite Length......................................20
Minimum Size of First Bite..............................30
Minimum Web Cut Size...................................30
Mirror Image ....................................................28
Mirror Image and Clipping Window................28
Mirroring Option..............................................28
Miter Angle Range...........................................10

N
Num of Vac Zones Closed for Bite..................12
Num sharpens until angle adjust ........................8
Number of Sharpen Cycles ................................8
Number of Sides to Sharpen ..............................7
Number of Table Slats .....................................14
Number of Vacuum Zones ...............................12

O
Offset Bottom Edge Sensor Y..........................32
Offset Edge Sensors X .....................................32
Offset in X - Drill 1..........................................31
Offset in X - Drill 2..........................................32
Offset in X - Knife ...........................................31
Offset in X - Pen ..............................................31
Offset in Y - Drill 1..........................................31
Offset in Y - Drill 2..........................................32

Parameters 45

Index
Offset in Y - Knife........................................... 31
Offset in Y - Pen .............................................. 32
Offset Top Edge Sensor Y ............................... 32
Offset X - Camera............................................ 32
Offset Y - Camera............................................ 32
One-Way Bristle Cleaning............................... 14
Only Allow Cutting with KI On ...................... 15
OPSTOP .......................................................... 29
OPSTOP and Report Options .......................... 29
OPSTOP Section Processing ........................... 29
OPSTOP Slow Slew ........................................ 29
OPSTOPs......................................................... 29
Optimal Backup Distance .................................. 9
Options and Modes .......................................... 24
Overcut Distance................................................ 9
Overlap Distance.............................................. 33

P
parameters........................................... 5, 7, 9, 11,
13, 15, 18, 20, 24, 28, 29, 30, 31, 35
Parameters.......................................................... 6
park .................................................................. 21
bite offset...................................................... 21
mark end....................................................... 21
marker end position X .................................. 21
marker end position Y.................................. 21
Path Intelligence Option .................................. 16
Path Overlap .................................................... 33
Pause Before Convey....................................... 20
Pause Between Bites........................................ 20
PC Serial Communication ............................... 36
Percent of Piece ............................................... 33
PI
Feedrate
Change Ratio....................................................16
Max Increase ....................................................16
Maximum .........................................................16
Minimum..........................................................16

Force to Stop with Warning ......................... 16


FR Control - XY Force ................................ 16
FR Faster - Shp Knife .................................. 16
FR Slowdown - Low Vac............................. 16
Optimum Force ............................................ 16
Sharp Knife Full Speedup Dst...................... 16
Sharp Knife Prtl Speedup Dst ...................... 17
Sharp Knife Speedup Amount...................... 17
Vacuum Low Slowdown Factor................... 17
Velocity to +FR............................................ 16

46 Parameters

Velocity to +FR & Rbld ...............................16


Velocity to -FR .............................................16
Velocity to -FR & Rbld ................................16
Preprocess Drills ..............................................26
Preprocessor Parameters ..................................33
Preset OPSTOP ................................................29
Projector Output Port .......................................36

Q
Queue Manager Parameters .............................34

R
Ramp Down Dist - Auto Bite...........................32
Read Queue Name Bar Codes..........................34
Recalculate Small Pieces..................................22
Regional OPSTOP ...........................................29
Re-Sealer Option..............................................26
Resealer Up For Continuous Cut .....................26
Right Side Control............................................35
Right Side Initialize..........................................19
RSO............................................................19, 35
Run Time Biting...............................................20

S
Saving of Parameter Changes ..........................24
Security Parameters..........................................34
Selv/Web (0=Off, 1= Selv, 2 = Web&Sel) ......30
Selvage Cut Position ........................................30
Selvage Cut Size Bottom ................................30
Selvage Cut Size Top ......................................30
Selvage Cut/Contiguous Cut ............................30
Servo (DSP) Coefficients.................................39
Sharpen Every n Pieces......................................7
Sharpen Frequency.............................................7
Sharpen Knife Speed..........................................6
Sharpen New Knife n Times ..............................8
Sharpen Only When Knife is Up........................7
Sharpen Parameters............................................7
Sharpen Position #1............................................7
Sharpen Position #2............................................7
sharpen speed, C-axis.......................................31
Sharpening Time ................................................7
Sharpens Until Overcut Update .........................8
Single Step .......................................................25
Slat Advance Time...........................................14
slit notch.............................................................9

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Index
Slit Notch Backtracking..................................... 9
small pieces
cut first ......................................................... 22
max area ....................................................... 22
recaclulate .................................................... 22
Smallest Piece.................................................. 33
Software Parameters ........................................ 42
System Setup Parameters................................. 31

Velocity - Cnvyr Jog ........................................41


Velocity - Cnvyr Man Bite...............................41
Velocity Cnvyr Cut Bite...................................41
Verify Keyboard Entry.....................................26

W
web, minimum cut size ....................................30
web, selv/ .........................................................30

Table Length (0=Standard, 1=Long) ............... 35


table, usable distance ....................................... 31
Time Considerations ........................................ 40
Time Until ESM .............................................. 12
TONT Start Delay............................................ 41
TONT Stop Distance ....................................... 41
Transfer Angle ................................................. 33
Transfer Markers When Selected .................... 27

X Data Scale Factor .........................................18


X Home to System 0 ........................................37
X Home Zone1 Offset......................................12
X-axis
Stepsize.........................................................31
XY Axes...........................................................37
XY-Axes delay.................................................37

Usable Table Distance ..................................... 31


Use AccuMatch ............................................... 29
Use Edge Finders............................................. 24
User Parameter Table
editing........................................................... 34
selecting ....................................................... 34

Y Data Scale Factor .........................................18


Y Home to System 0 ........................................37
Y-axis
Edge Align (0=N, 1=+Y, 2=-Y) ...................27
Mirror Image ................................................28
Mirror Reflection Line .................................28
Stepsize.........................................................31

V
Vacuum Control - Pattern Length.................... 12
Vacuum Control - Vacuum Gain ..................... 12
Vacuum Control - Zero Offset......................... 12
Vacuum Control Type ..................................... 11
Vacuum Error Reporting ................................. 11
Vacuum Level - Bite........................................ 11
Vacuum Level - Cut......................................... 11
Vacuum Level - Idle ........................................ 12
Vacuum Level Valve on Inlet.......................... 12
Vacuum Low Caution Level............................ 12
Vacuum Low Error Level ................................ 12
vacuum parameter............................................ 12
Vacuum System ............................................... 11
Vacuum Zone Overlap..................................... 11
Vacuum Zoning ............................................... 11
Variable Length Biting .................................... 20
Variable Speed CTOT ..................................... 41
Velocity - Cnvyr Auto Bite.............................. 41

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Parameters 47

Cut File and Report Utilities


Working with cut files (markers) involves a major portion of your time when
running a cutter. The C-200MT program provides these features to assist you:

View Cut File

Queue Manager

Cutter Info Database

File Manager

PreProcessor

CutView
You can use the CutView utility to display a cut file/marker, including all dry
haul paths, bite lines, drill points, and data points. You have the flexibility to
zoom in/out, select individual bites and pieces within bites, and playback or
animate the cutting process. The actual cut file data can be verified to manually
check output. See the CutView chapter.
Queue Manager
Use Queue Manager to create job queues that allow you to cut multiple cut files
and/or markers sequentially. See the Queue Manager chapter.
Cutter Information Database (CIDB)
Cutter Information Database (CIDB) is an optional database utility that can be
used to generate reports for the C-200MT program. When this option is enabled,
the system automatically inserts information about the cut file/marker currently
being processed into the Cutter Information database. Various report types can
be generated. See the Cutter Information Database chapter.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Cut File and Report Utilities 1

File Manager
Managing cut files and markers is an important task. Use the AccuMark
Explorer to manage AccuMark marker data. For GERBERcutter data, you can
use the File Manager command in the Marker menu to perform the following,
routine data management tasks:

Copy cut files from a disk drive or a network drive to the hard drive of
the cutter

Move cut files to another directory on the hard drive

Rename cut files from a previous season

Delete cut files after backing them up to disk or to the network

Manage directories
If you are familiar with Windows File Manager or Explorer, you
already know how to use features in the C-200MT File Manager. For
those learning to use Windows for the first time, refer to the
Windows NT Quick Reference Guide or to your Windows
documentation.

Note:

To use File Manager

1. From the File menu, select File Manager.


2. In the Enter Supervisor Password dialog box, type the supervisor
password. Then click the OK button.
The File Manager screen opens and can be used the remainder of the
current C-200MT session or until it is locked again.
Lock File Manager
The File Manager is password protected. The first time the File Manager
command is selected during a C-200MT session, the supervisor password must
be entered. File Manager can then be used for the remainder of the C-200MT
session or until it is locked again.
To lock File Manager

1. From the File menu, select Lock File Manager.

2 Cut File and Report Utilities

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Changing Passwords
Default passwords for the following levels are provided with your C-200MT
software. To provide additional security when working with Parameter Manager
or File Manager, you can change the Supervisor and Service level passwords.
Level

Default Password

Supervisor

BOSS

Service

VICE

Administrator

ADMIN

To change a password

1. From the Setup menu, select Change Password.


2. Click the appropriate radio button to identify the password level being
changed.
3. In the Change Password dialog box, type the old password and the new
password.
4. Retype the new password to verify your entry.
5. Press Enter or click the OK button.
Note:

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Windows NT Administrative Tools can be used to keep track of


passwords.

Cut File and Report Utilities 3

Change User Directory


The default user directory for the C-200MT program is C:\USER. When the
Marker/Open command is used, cut data available in this directory displays. If
you prefer to have another directory as the default, use the Change User
Directory command in the Marker menu to make this change.
Default Storage Areas
For AccuMark cut data or markers, when you first use the Marker Open
command after starting the C-200MT program, the first storage area on the
C: drive opens by default. After you make a selection and until you shut down
C-200MT, the default storage area for AccuMark cut files and markers will be
the last storage area from which you selected AccuMark data.
To change the user directory
1. From the Marker menu, select Change User Directory.
2. In the Change User Directory dialog box, type the complete path
(drive\directory) that tells the system how to find the new directory.
3. Press Enter or click the OK button.
In the System Status window, Cut Path shows the new directory.

4 Cut File and Report Utilities

C-200MT Software Users Guide

PreProcessor

Use the PreProcessor command in the Utilities menu to process and organize cut
file data in order to reduce cutting time and material waste when cutting the
marker. Without preprocessing, all lines for each piece in a marker are cut before
the next piece is cut. The PreProcessor utility optimizes on the normal cutting
strategy by using these features from the Gerber POWER Processor program:

Bite Generation Generates bite data before preprocessing

Reorder Resequences the order in which pieces will be cut in a


marker

Common Line Cuts common lines only once

Path Optimization Cuts pieces more efficiently

To preprocess a cut file

1. From the Utilities menu, select PreProcessor to display the Cut File
PreProcessor screen.
2. Click the Open Input File button. Cut files in the default user directory
display. Or you can select a different drive and directory.
3. Select the cut data file you want to preprocess. Then press Enter or
click the OK button. The name of the cut file you selected displays in
the Input field.
4. In the Output field, type the name to be used when saving the cut file
after preprocessing. The saved file will have the .OPT extension unless
you type a different extension.
5. To turn on Bite Generation while preprocessing, click the appropriate
check box.
6. To specify a setup file, click the Open Setup File button. Then select
the setup file to use when preprocessing this cut file. For example, a
setup file for preprocessing should have Run Time Biting turned off
when Bite Generation is selected in step 5.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Cut File and Report Utilities 5

7. To use one of the following PreProcess options, click the appropriate


check box. Then edit the default values in any of the fields explained in
the table below.
Option
Reorder

Fields
Small Piece Cut First

Area of a Small Piece


Percentage of Piece
Common Line

Minimum
Gap Allowance
Angle Tolerance

Path
Optimization

Max Pieces in Group


Max Distance Between
Pieces
Max Table Offset

Steps
Select BY TIER (or YES) to cut small pieces
in a window before cutting large pieces;
select BY PIECE to cut first all small pieces
that surround a large piece.
Type the maximum piece area the system
will consider small.
Type the % of a piece that must be included
in the window in order to be cut with other
pieces in that window.
Type the minimum length for a line segment
to be considered in the common line
calculations.
Type the maximum distance allowed
between lines considered as common.
Type the maximum angle deviation, in
degrees, between lines to be considered as
common.
Type the maximum number of pieces
allowed to be calculated together as one
piece.
Type the maximum distance allowed
between pieces in order to be calculated
together as one piece.
Type the maximum length allowed for
grouped pieces calculated together as one
piece. Set this value to minimize vacuum
loss on the table.

8. Click the check box next to Keep Cut Direction to choose whether or
not to keep the original cut direction.
9. Click the Preprocess button. The System Status window prompts
indicate processing status. The System Messages box prompts when
processing is completed.

6 Cut File and Report Utilities

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Common Line
Common Line analyzes and reorganizes cut files so that all common lines are cut
once. A common line is a line (indicated below) that is shared by two
neighboring pieces in a marker, or cut file. This feature can save cutting time and
improve cut quality in common line regions when cutting markers with blockshaped pieces.

Reorder
Reorder allows the system to automatically determine the sequence in which
marker pieces are cut based on parameters that you can define or change.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Cut File and Report Utilities 7

Path Optimization
Path Optimization analyzes pieces in a cut file and looks for more efficient ways
to cut them. For example, neighboring semicircular pieces would be cut as a
figure 8 (indicated below) before the two straight line perimeters were cut.

Window
When using PreProcessor, a window is a group of pieces sequenced together
that is:

Smaller than a bite

Based on a serpentine path designed for the best possible cut efficiency

8 Cut File and Report Utilities

C-200MT Software Users Guide

CutView Utility
Contents
View Cut File ........................................................................................................ 3
Getting Acquainted with the CutView Screen ....................................................... 3
CutView Menu ................................................................................................ 4
CutView Icons ................................................................................................ 4
CutView File Display ..................................................................................... 5
Piece Data Window ....................................................................................... 5
Tool Code Reference..................................................................................... 5

Cut File Viewing Options ...................................................................................... 6


Viewing a Cut File/Marker............................................................................. 6
Viewing Pieces.......................................................................................... 7
Viewing Bites ............................................................................................ 7
Panning the Canvas.................................................................................. 7
Zoom Options ........................................................................................... 8

Cut File Playback.................................................................................................. 9


Animating a Marker ....................................................................................... 9
Playback Piece by Piece............................................................................. 10
Playback Segment by Segment ................................................................. 10

Display Options .................................................................................................. 11


Using a Grid ............................................................................................ 11
Displaying Dry Haul Lines....................................................................... 11
Displaying Drill Points ............................................................................. 11
Displaying Data Points............................................................................ 12
Displaying Bite Lines............................................................................... 12

Display Colors .................................................................................................... 12


Changing Display Colors in CutView ........................................................ 12
Default Colors .............................................................................................. 14

Index................................................................................................................... 15

C-200MT Software Users Guide

CutView Utility 1

2 CutView Utility

C-200MT Software Users Guide

View Cut File


The CutView utility allows you to display a cut file, including all dry haul paths, bite
lines, drill points, and data points. You have the flexibility to zoom in/out, select
individual bites and pieces within bites, and playback or animate the cutting process.
The actual cut file data can be verified to manually check output.

Getting Acquainted with the CutView Screen

Piece
Data
Window

Menu
Bar

Tool Bar
with
Icons

File
Display
Area

Bite
Scroll
Buttons

C-200MT Software Users Guide

CutView Utility 3

CutView Menu
The CutView Menu contains the following menu options:
Menu

Use Commands To

File

Open a cut file/marker for viewing, print the


open cut file/marker, close the current file
and exit the CutView utility.

Set

Change display options for colors and a grid.

View

Change display options for: toolbar; status


bar; dry haul path, bite lines, drills, data
points; zoom

Playback

Change options that play the cutting process:


Animate and pause
Piece by piece
Segment by Segment

Select

Select cut file pieces.

Help

View online help for CutView utility; view cut


tool codes for selected piece.

CutView Icons
The CutView icons control the following functions:
Icon

4 CutView Utility

Name

Use To

Open Cut File

Select and view a cut file in


current user directory.

Full View

Display 100% of the cut file.

Zoom In

Zoom in to a close-up display of


the cut file/marker.

Zoom Out

Zoom out from the close-up


display of the cut file/marker.

Grid On

Display a grid over the cut


file/marker.

Piece

Select individual pieces in the


cut file/marker to view.

Animate

Animate a view of the cutting


process.

Pause

Pause the animated view of the


cutting process.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

CutView File Display


The cut file/marker displays in File Display area. You can move around the display
area using the scroll bars.
The status bar at the bottom of the screen provides information about the current
zoom factor and cursor location.
Piece Data Window
This section of the CutView screen, located to the right of the File Display area,
allows you to check information about specific pieces in a cut file/marker.
Note:

You can use the Tool Code Reference while checking piece data
information.

To view information about a piece

1. To select a piece to get information about, do one of the following:


Click the Piece Select button in the tool bar. Then click inside the
piece that you want information about.
Type the piece number in the top section of this box and click the
Find button.
The selected piece displays in the File Display area to the left of this box.
Data code for the selected piece displays in the window located in the
middle section of this box.
2. To view the next piece in the cut file/marker, click the Step button (marked
with an arrow) in the bottom section of this window. Continue to click the
Step button to cycle through all pieces numbered greater than the currently
selected piece.
Tool Code Reference
CutView provides a handy reference of tool codes used in cut data.
To display the code definitions

1. From the Menu, click Help and then Tool Code Reference.
2. Click OK to close this reference window.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

CutView Utility 5

Cut File Viewing Options


Viewing a Cut File/Marker
Use the CutView screen to view:

The cut file or marker that is currently open in the C-200MT Main Cutter
Control screen

A GERBERcutter cut file other than the file currently open in C-200MT

To view a cut file or marker currently open in C-200MT

1. To open the CutView utility, do one of the following:

Press the View Cutfile key on the keyboard.

From the Utilities menu, select View Cutfile to open the CutView
screen.
Click the View Cutfile button on the tool bar.
The utility opens with the cut file/marker displayed in the File Display area
of the screen. The Status Bar displays the X and Y position of the cursor
and any user messages.
2. To select a piece, click the
Piece Select button in the tool bar. Then
click inside the piece that you want to playback or get information about.
3. To remove the CutView screen without closing it, click the button in the
top right corner of the window marked with a line.
Or to close the CutView screen, from the File menu select Exit.
To view a GERBERcutter cut file other than the file currently open in C-200MT

1. Open the CutView utility as explained above.


2. From the File menu in this screen, select Open or click the Open button
(marked with a file folder) in the tool bar.
A list of cut files in the default user directory displays. Or you can select a
different drive and directory.
3. Select the cut file you want to view. Then press Enter or click the OK
button.

6 CutView Utility

C-200MT Software Users Guide

The cut file displays in the File Display area of the screen. The Status Bar
displays the X and Y position of the cursor and any user messages.
Piece Select button in the tool bar. Then
4. To select a piece, click the
click inside the piece that you want to playback or get information about.
5. To minimize the CutView screen without closing it, click the button in the
top right corner of the window marked with a line.
Or to close the CutView screen, from the File menu select Exit.
Viewing Pieces
To view a specific piece

1. Click the

Piece Select button in the tool bar.

2. Then click inside the piece that you want. The system zooms in on the
selected piece.
Viewing Bites
Scroll buttons allow you to pan (move) through the cut file/marker in order to
display a specific bite.
Note:

CutView displays bite information for cut files/markers that were


opened for cutting with Run Time Biting turned on. Bite lines
display at the actual bite marks.

To view other bite in the marker

1. Click one of the Bite scroll buttons.

Bite #

First

Previous

Next

Last

Panning the Canvas


Use the horizontal and vertical scroll bars to view other sections, or bites, of the
marker on the canvas.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

CutView Utility 7

Zoom Options
Commands in the View menu of the CutView screen allow you to change the scale
at which a cut file/marker displays.
To change the view scale

From the View menu, select:

Zoom In to view individual pieces in a bite. Click again to continue zooming


in.

Zoom Out to view more of the cut file/marker. Click again to continue
zooming out.

Zoom Back to return to the previous view.

Full to return to the default scale for the cut file/marker; same as clicking the
100% button on the tool bar.

To zoom in on a specific section

1. Click the

Zoom Out button on the tool bar.

2. Click and drag from the upper left to the lower right of the section you
want to enlarge and then release the pointing device button.
3. To return to the previous view, click the
tool bar.

8 CutView Utility

Zoom Back button on the

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Cut File Playback


CutView provides these commands in the Playback menu for displaying cut data.

Animate Playback marker, cutting pieces according to piece number


sequence.

Piece by Piece Switch playback modes so that cut data displays one piece
at a time, beginning with a selected piece. See steps below.

Segment by Segment Playback modes so that cut data for a selected piece
is displayed one line segment at a time. See steps below.

Pause

Two additional tools explained earlier in the Getting Acquainted with the CutView
Screen section are provided to help playback piece data:

Piece Data Window and Step Button

Tool Code Reference


Note:

Pressing the Escape key ends playback of the cut process.

Animating a Marker
Animate simulates cutting by stepping through the cut file (marker) according to
piece sequence. Select Pause to temporarily stop playback.
To playback

1. Make sure the Cutview screen shows the biteand pieces of the marker you
want to playback. Change the view scale, if necessary.
Note:

Changing the view scale during playback cancels playback mode.

2. From the Playback menu, select Animate or click the


in the tool bar.

Animate button

3. To pause during playback, select Pause from the Playback menu or click
the

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Pause button in the tool bar.

CutView Utility 9

Playback Piece by Piece


To play back piece by piece

1. From the Playback menu, select Piece by Piece.


The Step button at the lower right of the screen indicates that the Piece
mode is selected.
Piece Select button in the tool bar. Then click inside the
2. Click the
piece that you want to playback first.
That piece is highlighted and the piece number displays above the Piece
Data window.
3. You can view the piece being cut and/or check the cut data in the Piece
Data window.
4. When ready to view the next piece, click the Step button.
Playback Segment by Segment
To play back segment by segment

1. From the Playback menu, select Segment by Segment.


The Step button at the lower right of the screen indicates that the Segment
mode is selected.
2. Click the
Piece Select button in the tool bar. Then click inside the
piece for which you want to playback segments.
The piece number displays above the Piece Data window. Cut data displays
in the Piece Data window.
3. To play back each line segment in this piece, click the Step button
repeatedly. The current and all previous segments are highlighted.

10 CutView Utility

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Display Options
Use commands in the View menu to display various cut file information when
viewing a marker in the CutView screen. Default settings for display of dry haul
path, bite lines, etc. are maintained from one cut file/marker to the next.
Using a Grid
Use the Grid On command in the CutView screen to display over the cut file/marker
a grid of lines spaced 100 units apart. This feature is helpful when you have zoomed
in and are trying to determine the size of a piece or location of a notch.
To use a grid

1. From the Set menu, select Grid On or click the


tool bar.

Grid button in the

2. Select again to turn off the grid.

Displaying Dry Haul Lines


Use the Display Dry Haul Path command in the View menu to display dry haul lines
when viewing a cut file/marker in the CutView screen.
To view dry haul lines

1. From the View menu, select Display Dry Haul Path. Dry haul displays as
dashed lines between pieces.
Displaying Drill Points
Use the Display Drills command in the View menu to display drill points when
viewing a cut file/marker in the CutView screen.
To view drill points

1. From the View menu, select Display Drills. Drill points display as crossed
lines within pieces.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

CutView Utility 11

Displaying Data Points


Use the Display Data Points command in the View menu to display data points for
pieces when viewing a cut file/marker in the CutView screen.
To view drill points

1. From the View menu, select Display Data Points. Data points display in
red.
Displaying Bite Lines
Use the Display Bite Lines command in the View menu to display bite lines when
viewing a cut file/marker in the CutView screen. Only bite lines added during
marker making are displayed.
To view bite lines

1. From the View menu, select Display Bite Lines. Bite lines display as
dashed vertical lines.

Display Colors
Changing Display Colors in CutView
When viewing a marker, it may be easier to identify details if you change the default
colors used for screen elements, such as piece perimeters or grid lines. Use the
Colors menu command in the CutView screen to:

Create a customized color profile

Edit an existing color profile

To create a color profile

1. Make sure a marker or cut file is open.


2. From the Set menu, select Colors to display the Gerber Color dialog box.

12 CutView Utility

C-200MT Software Users Guide

3. Click to select the screen element you want to change color for. Possible
choices are:
Bite Line

Drill

Even Bite Piece

OpStop

Grid

Bite Clip

Odd Bite Piece

Beam 1 (Dual Beam Option)

Dry Haul

Beam 2 (Dual Beam Option)

Background

Highlight

4. Click to select the color chip to apply.


5. Check the preview box to see how this change will look.
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 for each screen element you want to change.
7. To save your choices, click the Save button.
8. In the Color Profiles dialog box, click the Arrow button to display a list of
customized color profiles, if any. Type the name for your new color profile
and then press Enter or click the OK button.
9. When finished, click OK button.
To edit an existing color profile

1. Make sure a marker or cut file is open.


2. From the Set menu, select Colors to display the Gerber Color dialog box.
3. Click the Read button to display the Color Profiles dialog box.
4. Click the Arrow button to display a list of existing color profiles.
5. Click to select the profile you want to edit. Then press Enter or click the
OK button.
6. Make your edits and save them using steps 3 through 9 for creating a color
profile.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

CutView Utility 13

Default Colors
Default colors for items in the CutView screen are listed in the following table.

14 CutView Utility

Item

Color

Background

Black

Piece numbers

White (can not be changed)

Grid

Dark gray

Cut lines

Yellow

Dry haul lines

Green

Odd bite pieces

Olive

Even bite pieces

Yellow

Bite line

Yellow

Start of piece

Red (can not be changed)

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Index
A

animate

C
changing display colors
cut view
changing display colors
default colors

12
7, 9, 11, 12, 14
12
14

14
11, 12
12
12
11
11
11
11

F
full scale

7
9, 10
9
10
10

S
segment by segment playback

D
default colors
Display
bite lines
data points
drill points
dry haul lines
grid
Display Options in the View Menu

Panning the Canvas


Playback Options
animate
piece by piece
segment by segment

10

V
View Cutfile
display area
icons
menu

4, 5
5
4
4

Z
zoom
Zoom Options

8
8

G
grid

C-200MT Software Users Guide

11

CutView Utility 15

16 CutView Utility

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Queue Manager
Contents
Queue Manager: Getting Acquainted....................................................................3
While Queue is Running............................................................................3

Features in Queue Manager Screen .....................................................................4


Queue Manager Menu....................................................................................4
Queue Manager Toolbar................................................................................5
Queue Display Area .......................................................................................5
Setup Display Area ........................................................................................5
Queue Manager Operation Buttons .............................................................5

Editing Job Queues...............................................................................................6


Job Queues ...............................................................................................6
Editing a Job Queue ......................................................................................6
Moving a Job .............................................................................................7
Inserting a Job ...........................................................................................7
Deleting a Job............................................................................................7
Changing Cut File/Marker for a Job .............................................................8
Changing Cutter Parameter Table for a Marker Job ..................................8
Changing Setup for a Job .............................................................................8

Working with Job Queues .....................................................................................9


Creating a Job Queue....................................................................................9
Running a Job Queue..................................................................................10
Selecting Next Job While Queue Is Running ............................................11
Closing a Running Job Queue....................................................................11

Queue Manager: Setting Up................................................................................12


Changing Defaults in Queue Manager.......................................................12
Transferring Cut Files/Markers for Job Queues .......................................13
Queue Manager Parameters .......................................................................13

Index ...................................................................................................................14

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Queue Manager 1

2 Queue Manager

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Queue Manager: Getting Acquainted

Use Queue Manager commands in the C-200MT Utilities menu or the Queue
Information button to access the Queue Manager screen. Use this utility to work
with job queues:

Create a job queue

Run a job queue

Close a job queue

Select the next job in a queue

Edit a job queue

While Queue is Running


Queue Manager runs minimized (an icon or task bar button displays at the
bottom of the screen) while a queue is running.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Queue Manager 3

Features in Queue Manager Screen

Menu Bar
Tool Bar

Queue Display
Area

Setup Display
Area
Operation
Buttons

Queue Manager Menu


The Queue Manager utility menu selections contain the following choices:

4 Queue Manager

Menu

Use Commands To

File

Open a new or existing queue; close a


queue; save a queue; save a copy with a
different name.

Programs

Access the main C-200MT screen.

Options

Insert or delete a queue job.

Tools

Change system defaults; set default for


transferring markers over a network.

View

Turns on/off the display of the Queue


Manager Toolbar and the Status Bar.

Window

Display queues open in the Queue


Manager individually or cascading on top
of each other.

Help

Get help on Queue Manager.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Queue Manager Toolbar


Click one of the following icons in the toolbar to quickly access Queue Manager
or C-200MT features.
Icon

Name

Use To

New

Close any displayed queues and


create a new one.

Open

Display a list of available queues and


select one to open.

Save

Save the displayed queue.

C-200MT

Access the C-200MT main screen.

Delete Job

Delete a job in the current queue.

Insert Job

Insert a new job in the current queue.

Help

View online help for Queue Manager.

Queue Display Area


This area of the Queue Manager screen displays open queues, each in its own
window. When a queue window is open you can view or edit jobs, cut
files/markers, and setup information. When first opened, Queue Manager is
ready to create a new job queue.
Setup Display Area
This area of the Queue Manager screen can be used to change the setup used for
each job in a queue.
Queue Manager Operation Buttons
The operation buttons allow you to:

Run the current queue

Save the current queue

Save the current queue with edits as a new queue

Cancel changes to the queue

Add a marker, or cut file, to the queue

Select another Cutter Parameter Table for the highlighted AccuMark


marker

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Queue Manager 5

Editing Job Queues


Job Queues
A job queue contains multiple cut files and/or markers to be cut sequentially.
Each cut file or marker and the corresponding setup file are called a job. Each
job is opened, processed, and closed automatically until all jobs have been
processed.
Using job queues can increase throughput because queues can be created while
other cut files/markers are being processed and run automatically. More than one
job queue window can be open at a time in the Queue Manager screen.
Editing a Job Queue
To edit a job queue
1. Do one of the following:
On the Main Cutter Control screen, click on the Queue Info
button. Click the Open Queue Manager button.
From the Utilities menu, choose Queue Manager. Then select
Edit Queue.
2. When the Queue Manager opens, do one of the following:
From the File menu, select Open.
Click the Open File button (marked with file folder) in the tool
bar.
3. Select the queue you want to edit.
4. Make the following types of changes in the queue section of the screen:
Insert a job
Delete a job
Move a job
Change cut file/marker for a job
Change setup for a job
Change Cutter Parameter Table for a selected AccuMark marker.
Note:

6 Queue Manager

See the following sections for detailed information on how to


perform these changes.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

5. To save changes to the original queue, click the Save button. When
prompted, press Enter or click the OK button.
6. To save changes to a copy of the original queue, click the Save As
button. Type a new queue name and then press Enter or click the OK
button. When prompted, press Enter or click the OK button.
7. To close this queue, from the File menu select Close {queuename}.
Moving a Job
To move a job

1. Highlight the Job # for the job to be moved.


2. When a text box displays, type the job number you want to assign to
this job and press Enter.
Inserting a Job
To insert a job

1. Highlight the Job # you want to assign this job.


2. Do one of the following:
Press Insert.
From the Options menu, select Insert a Job.
Click the

Pencil button in the tool bar.

Deleting a Job
To delete a job

1. Highlight the Job # for the job to be deleted.


2. Do one of the following:
Press Delete.
From the Options menu, select Delete a Job.
Click the

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Eraser button in the tool bar.

Queue Manager 7

Changing Cut File/Marker for a Job


To change the cut file/marker

1. Highlight the current cut file/marker name. Queue Manager supports


long filenames of 21 characters or greater.
2. Click the Add Marker button.
3. To select the Type of File you want to select, click on the button
marked with an arrow to the right of that field. Choices are:
AccuMark cut
AccuMark marker
All (other cut) files
4. Select the new cut file/marker you want to use for this job.
Changing Cutter Parameter Table for a Marker Job
To change Cutter Parameter Table

1. Highlight the AccuMark marker job for which you want to make the
change.
2. Click the Select Cutter Parameter Table button.
3. Select a different parameter table from the dialog box and then press
Enter or click OK.
Changing Setup for a Job
To change the setup

1. Highlight the current setup name.


2. Select the new setup from the Setups Display area of the screen.

8 Queue Manager

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Working with Job Queues


Creating a Job Queue
When first opened, Queue Manager is ready to create a new job queue.
To create a job queue

1. Do one of the following:


On the Main Cutter Control screen, click on the Queue Info
button. Click the Open Queue Manager button.
From the Utilities menu, choose Queue Manager. Then select
Edit Queue.
The Queue Manager screen displays with a new job queue window
open. When first opened, the Queue section of the screen is blank
except for a 1 in the Job # column.
Note:

To create a job queue if the Queue Manager is already open,


choose the File menu and select New. Or click the New
button (marked with a blank sheet) on the tool bar.

2. Click the Add Marker button, to select a marker or cut file from the
default directory. Queue Manager supports long filenames of 21
characters or greater.
Note:

To temporarily change the list of cut files in the Open File


dialog box, change the drive and directory. For markers,
change the storage area.

3. To select the Type of File you want to open, click on the button marked
with an arrow to the right of that field. Choices are:
AccuMark cut
AccuMark marker
All (other cut) files
4. The marker or cut file name displays in the Job Queue as Job #1 with
the default setup. If necessary, change the Cutter Parameter Table for
an AccuMark marker. To select a different Setup for this job, click to
highlight the setup to change. Then select the correct setup from the
Setups list.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Queue Manager 9

5. To select a different Setup for this job, click to highlight the setup to
change. Then select the correct setup from the Setups list.
6. Repeat steps 2 and 5 to select additional jobs and change setups, as
required.
7. When finished, click the Save button.
8. In the Save dialog box, type a name for the queue. Then press Enter or
click the OK button.
9. To return to the Main Cutter Control screen without closing Queue
Manager, click the C-200MT icon in the tool bar.
10. To close the Queue Manager screen, select Exit from the File menu.
Running a Job Queue
To run a job queue

1. Do one of the following:


From the Utilities menu, choose Queue Manager. Then select
Open Queue.
Click the Queue Information button on the Main Cutter screen
and then select Open Queue.
2. When the Queue Select dialog box displays, do one of the following:
If you know the name of the job queue you want to run, type the
name in the Queue Select dialog box and then click the OK
button.
To view a list of available queues, press Enter. From the File
menu, select Open. Select the queue you want to run. When the
queue displays in the Queue Manager screen, click the Run
button.
In the Main Cutter Control screen, the first job in the queue is loaded.
The System Status window shows information about this job. The
Settings window shows the name of the queue.
While a queue is running, Queue Manager runs minimized and the
icon or task bar button displays at the bottom of the screen.

10 Queue Manager

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Selecting Next Job While Queue Is Running


To select the next job while a queue is running

1. Make sure that all pieces you want to process in the current job have
been cut.
2.

Press the Stop button.

3. From the Marker menu, select Close to close the current job.
4. From the Utilities menu, choose Queue Manager. Then select Select
Next Job.
The next job in the Queue Manager opens and begins processing.
Closing a Running Job Queue
To close the queue currently running

1. Make sure that cut processing is stopped.


press the Stop button.

If not,

2. Do one of the following:


In the Main Cutter Control screen, do one of the following:

Click on the Queue Information button and then select Close


Queue.

From the Utilities menu, choose Queue Manager.


Then select Close Queue.

In the Queue Manager screen:

From the File menu, select Terminate.

The current job is closed and then the job queue is closed.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Queue Manager 11

Queue Manager: Setting Up


Changing Defaults in Queue Manager
To simplify creating and editing a queue, the Queue Manager uses the following
default files and directories:

Location of available cut files - C:\USER

Setup to use when adding a job - DEFAULT.CNF

The default .QUE file extension is automatically added when a queue is


created.
Note:

For AccuMark markers, the first storage area on the C: drive


is selected by default. After you make a selection and until
you shut down C-200MT, the default storage area for
AccuMark markers or cut files will be the last storage area
from which you selected AccuMark data.

To change Queue Manager defaults

1. Open the Queue Manager.


2. From the Tools menu, select Change Defaults.
3. In the change defaults dialog box, click in a field and type to change the
default. Repeat for the next field.
4. If you prefer to use only one continuous queue file, click the check box
next to that option. Then type the name to be used for that file. The file
name must end with .QUE.
5. Press Enter or click the OK button.

12 Queue Manager

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Transferring Cut Files/Markers for Job Queues


To ensure uninterrupted cut file/marker transmission from a network, use the
Settings command in the Tool menu. This feature allows you to copy or move
cut files (markers) to the cutter's hard drive at the time the queue is created.
Note:

Queue Manager supports long filenames of 21 characters or


greater.

Note:

If a file is unavailable for transfer at the time the queue is


created, at cutting time the setting for the Transfer Markers
When Selected parameter in the Options and Modes category
will apply.

To transfer cut files/markers

1. Open the Queue Manager.


2. From the Tools menu, select Settings.
3. Click the radio button next to one of the following options:
Don't Copy - this is the default
Copy to User Directory
Move to User Directory (Deletes Original Files)
4. Press Enter or click the Save button to accept your choice.
Queue Manager Parameters
The following parameters in the Queue Manager category relate to this utility.

Auto Start Jobs in Queue

Del Job from Queue After Cutting

Del Queue After Cutting

Read Queue Name Bar Codes

The following parameter in the Options and Modes category relates to this
utility.

Transfer Markers When Selected

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Queue Manager 13

Index
C

Changing defaults in queue manager............... 12


Changing Marker or Setup for a Job.................. 8
closing a running job queue ............................. 11
creating a job queue ........................................... 9
Cutter Parameter Table ...................................... 8
changing ......................................................... 8

Queue .............................................................3, 6
Queue Display Area ...........................................5
Queue Manager ..................3, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13
parameters.....................................................13
Queue Manager Menu........................................4
Queue Manager Operation Buttons....................5
Queue Manager Toolbar.....................................5

D
Deleting a Job .................................................... 7

E
editing job queue............................................ 7, 8

R
running job queue.............................................10

S
selecting next job..............................................11
Setup Display Area ............................................5

Features in Queue Manager ........................... 4, 5

transferring markers .........................................13

Inserting a Job.................................................... 7

J
job ...................................................................... 7
deleting........................................................... 7
inserting.......................................................... 7
moving............................................................ 7
job queue........................................ 6, 7, 9, 10, 11
closing .......................................................... 11
creating........................................................... 9
running ......................................................... 10
selecting next................................................ 11

M
Moving a Job ..................................................... 7

P
Parameters........................................................ 13

14 Queue Manager

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Cutter Info Database (CIDB)


Contents
About Cutter Information Database (CIDB) ................................................2
Report Types..............................................................................................3
Marker Report.................................................................................................3
Partial Marker Report.....................................................................................3
Shift Report.....................................................................................................4
Events Report.................................................................................................4

Report Generator .......................................................................................5


Creating New Reports ...................................................................................5
Using Report Generator ................................................................................6
Setting Event Options ...................................................................................7

Adding Operator Comments.......................................................................8


Message ..........................................................................................................8
Operator Login/Logout..................................................................................8

Printing or Viewing Reports ........................................................................9


Viewing Various Reports...............................................................................9
Printing Generated Reports ..........................................................................9
Hints on Printing Report from Text Editor ...............................................10
Hints for Printing on 80 Column Printer...................................................10

Setting Up CIDB and Reports...................................................................11


CIDB Drivers .................................................................................................11
Setting Shift Times ......................................................................................12
Changing Units ............................................................................................13
Parameters for CIDB....................................................................................13
Setting Up for Reports .............................................................................13
Additional Options for Setup....................................................................13

CIDB Database Information......................................................................14


Facts about the Cutter Information Database...........................................14
Idle Time..................................................................................................14
Interrupt Time ..........................................................................................14
Sleep Time ..............................................................................................14
Database Structure ......................................................................................15
Reducing Database Size .............................................................................15
CIDB Support for Microsoft Access...........................................................16
Opening Database with Microsoft Access ................................................16

Index.........................................................................................................17

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Cutter Info Database (CIDB) 1

About Cutter Information Database (CIDB)

The Cutter Information Database (CIDB) option is a C-200MT utility that uses a
database to track time relative to cutter operation and reports this information in
various. When this option is enabled, the system automatically inserts
information about the cut file/marker currently being processed into the Cutter
Information database.
CIDB keeps statistics on how individual cut files/markers have been cut. The
amount of time to setup and cut a cut file/marker as well as information about
distances is all stored. From the information in the individual cut files/markers a
shift report can be generated. This information can be used locate slow cut
files/markers, find weak points in production, or just to keep track of production.
Note:

It is not recommend that the CIDB be used for payroll purposes.

Available reports are:

Partial Marker Report

Marker Report

Shift Report

Events Report

2 Cutter Info Database (CIDB)

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Report Types
Marker Report
When the Cutter Info Database Option is ENABLED, Marker reports are
automatically entered in the CIDB database. These reports can be viewed and
printed using the Report Generator.
A Marker report includes:
= Cut File Name, Start Time, End Time, Setup Name, Status
= Averages Cut Speed, Throughput, Feed Rate
= Times Cut, Dry Haul, Sharpen, Bite, Sleep, Interrupt, Idle, Dry Run
= Distance Cut, Dry Haul, Dry Run
= Pieces Cut, Bites Cut
= Scale X, Scale Y
Note:

When using Contiguous Cut, the Marker report indicates any files
that have been merged to the previous cut file by placing the &
character before each cut file name.

Partial Marker Report


A partial marker report can be:
= Used to obtain the CIDB statistics for the cutting that has occurred so far;
for example, when a shift ends
= Requested for any cut file/marker that is currently being processed, as
long as cutting has not finished
Note: Partial Marker reports are permanent entries in the CIDB database.
To create a partial marker report
1. Cutting on the current cut file/marker must be stopped.
2. From the Utilities menu, choose CIDB Reports. Then select Partial
Marker Report.
3. Generate the marker report to view or print.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Cutter Info Database (CIDB) 3

Shift Report
Shift reports are summary reports derived from individual marker report times
for the shift. These reports can be viewed and printed using the Report
Generator.
A Shift report includes:
Cut Time Processing Statistics

Operating Times Cut, Dry Haul, Bite, Dry Run, Sharpen, Sleep,
Interrupt, Op Total, Idle

Percentage of Operating Time Cut, Dry Haul, Bite, Dry Run,


Sharpen, Sleep, Interrupt

Cut Processing Distance Statistics in Yards

Operating Distance Cut Dry Haul, Dry Run, Total

Percentage of Total Distance Cut, Dry Haul, Dry Run

Miscellaneous Cutter Information Statistics

Total Automatic Mode Time (minutes)

Percentage of Shift Time in AutoMode (percentage)

Average Cut Speed (inches/min)

Events Report
The Events report contains all events recorded in the Cutter Information
Database including Operator Messages (comments). There will be several events
for each cut file/marker that was opened. These reports can be viewed and
printed using the Report Generator.
An Events Report includes the following information about each included event:
Event ID, Start Time, Type, Subtype, Cut File Name, Message
You can limit the types of events and messages that display in a report.

4 Cutter Info Database (CIDB)

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Report Generator
Creating New Reports
Use the New Report dialog box to define time periods and generate the
appropriate reports.

To create reports

1. From the Utilities menu, choose CIDB Reports and then select
ReportGenerator.
The New Report dialog box displays.
2. To enter the start and end times for the report you want to generate, do
one of the following:
= Type Start and End values in the appropriate Day and Time
fields.
= Click one of the five Shift Time buttons at the top of the dialog
box. When one of these buttons is pressed, it fills in values in the
Start Time, End Day, and End Time edit boxes. These values are
based on the value in the Start Day Edit box and the shift start
and end times shown on the button.
In the above example, the 11-7 button is pressed. Note the Start
Day and End Day fields reflect an overnight shift, indicating
Start Time as 11:00 PM (2300) and End Time as 7:00 AM.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Cutter Info Database (CIDB) 5

3. Click the Create Reports button.


The Report Generator displays with the Shift report open as default.
Using Report Generator
CIDB reports can be viewed on-screen using the Report Generator. The Report
Generator provides flexibility in the way reports are displayed.

To generate and view reports

1. From the Utilities menu of the C-200MT main screen, choose CIDB
Reports and then select ReportGenerator.
2. In the New Report dialog box, generate reports based on specific times
and dates.
The Report Generator displays with the Shift report as default.

6 Cutter Info Database (CIDB)

C-200MT Software Users Guide

3. To display the corresponding Marker or Event report, click the


appropriate button. To display Shift, Marker, and Event reports in tiled
or cascading windows, use the appropriate command in the Windows
menu.
4. If desired, do any of the following:
Set options for measurement units, if changing between metric
and imperial measurements.
Set options for the Event types to be displayed.
Save reports in TXT or CVS (comma separated value) formats
for viewing or printing in a text editor.
Open a new report based on other times and dates.
5. When finished, from the File menu, select Close.

Setting Event Options


Various types of events are tracked by CIDB, during cutting time and while
cutting is stopped. You can decide the type of events to be reported in an Events
report.
To determine which events are included in report
1. Generate a report.
2. From the Options menu, select Events to Display.
3. Click to deselect All Events.
4. Then click to select each event type you want included in the report.
Choices are:
Operator Events/Messages
File Opened or Closed Events
Setup Change Events
System Events
Cutting Start/Stop Events
Maintenance Events
Other Events
5. Click Done.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Cutter Info Database (CIDB) 7

Adding Operator Comments


Message
Use the CIDB Message command to enter operator comments or messages of up
to 255 characters in length in marker or shift reports. Messages can be:
= Made with or without a cut file/marker open
= Included in Event reports
To enter an operator message (comments)

1. From the Utilities menu, choose CIDB Reports. Then select Operator
Comments.
2. When the dialog box displays, type your comment.
3. Press Enter or click OK.
To utilize operator messages in Event reports

1. Open the Report Generator.


2. From the Options menu, select Events to Display.
3. Make sure that Operator Events/Messages is selected.
Operator Login/Logout
Use these commands in the Utilities menu of the C-200MT Main Cutter Control
screen to change the current operator listed in CIDB marker reports.
To login for CIDB reporting

1. From the Utilities menu, choose CIDB Reports. Then select Operator
Login.
2. Type your name. Press Enter or click OK.
To logout

1. From the Utilities menu, choose CIDB Reports. Then select Operator
Logout.
2. Press Enter or click Yes.

8 Cutter Info Database (CIDB)

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Printing or Viewing Reports


Viewing Various Reports
When you click the Create Reports button in the New Report dialog box, all
report types are created, although the default report that displays in the Report
Generator is the Shift report. The Windows menu also lets the user arrange (tile
or cascade) open Windows containing these reports.
To switch between report types

1. In the Report Generator window, click on the button with the report
name on it. Choices are:
Marker Report
Shift Report
Events Report
Or from the Window menu, select the desired report type.
To create another report based on new date and times

1. Click the New Report button.


Or from the File menu, select New.
2. Complete the New Report dialog box.
Printing Generated Reports
To get a printout of data included in database reports, you must first save each
report type as a TXT or CSV file. You can then print out these files from any
text editor.
To save a report to file

1. Generate a report and display the type of report you would like to print.
2. From the File menu, select Save As.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Cutter Info Database (CIDB) 9

3. Select one of the following from the menu:


.Txt (text) Saves the active report as a text file. The text file
can be printed using Notepad or some other text-editing program.
.CSV Saves the active report in a manner that can easily be
read by any spread sheet and most database programs. The
comma separated value (CSV) format always writes units in
inches. This is to help prevent users from unknowingly mixing
units, thus invalidating databases or spread sheets.
4. Enter the file name.
5. If desired, select another directory to locate the file; the default
directory is C:\REPORT.
6. Click Save.
Hints on Printing Report from Text Editor
You can use Windows Notepad or other text editor.

Select and open the report files from the C:\REPORT directory.

Set the page layout and/or printer to print in Landscape (wide) mode,
preferably on legal size (8.5 x 14 inch) paper.

When printing on legal size paper, select Manual Feed as the paper
source.

If printing on 80 column printer, make sure that the printer can print 125
columns or see hints.

Hints for Printing on 80 Column Printer


A CIDB report output file prints best on a printer that prints 125 columns. If
your printer only prints 80 columns, try some of the hints below.
In the text editor, try one or more of the following:

In Print Setup, change the paper orientation to landscape.

In Print Setup, reduce scaling to less than 100%.

In Page Setup, decrease left and right margins to 0.5 inches.

Reduce font size.

10 Cutter Info Database (CIDB)

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Put your printer in condensed mode by doing one of the following:

Refer to the documentation that came with your printer.

Copy the PRMR.BAT utility to the system connected to the 80 column


printer. This utility is located in the C:\BIN directory. At the C: prompt,
type: \BIN\PRMR.BAT filename

Setting Up CIDB and Reports


CIDB Drivers
See the table below for appropriate ODBC and Microsoft Access drivers.
CIDB

CIDB

C-200MT v1.2 or greater

C-200MT v1.1

Drivers
ODBC

version 3.0

version 2.0

Access

version 7.0

version 2.0

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Cutter Info Database (CIDB) 11

Setting Shift Times


Shift times set for each button in the Report Generator can be changed. An
important feature to note is the Same Day, Next Day radio buttons. These allow
you to set end shift time for a shift that goes through midnight.

To set Shift times

1. In the New Report dialog box, click the Set Shift Times button.
2. Select the shift you want to set time for.
3. Enter the Start time.
Note:

To indicate a PM Start time, you can type pm after you enter a


time (example: 7:00pm) or use military time (example: 1900).

4. Enter the Shift End time. Select whether the shift ends on the same day
as the Start time or on the next day.
5. Click OK.

12 Cutter Info Database (CIDB)

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Changing Units
The units used to report distances for cut speed and throughput can be changed
for reports.
To change units for distances:

1. Make sure the Metric Display parameter in Options and Modes


category is turned ON.
2. Open the Report Generator.
3. From the Options menu, select Units.
4. Select units to be used for throughput distances/cut speed. Click OK.
If Yards, Feet or Inches is chosen, the Throughput and Average Cut
Speed will be in inches/minute. If Meters or Centimeters is chosen,
Throughput and Average Cut speed will be in centimeters/minute.
Parameters for CIDB
Setting Up for Reports
If you have purchased the CIDB Reports option, use the Parameter Manager to
determine report output. Currently, report data is automatically saved in database
format and can be output to file for viewing and printing in a text editor.
To turn on CIDB

1. Open the Parameter Manager.


2. In the Options and Modes category, make sure that the Cutter Info
Database Option parameter is enabled.
3. Save the changes.
4. Quit the C-200MT program and then restart.
Additional Options for Setup
CIDB reports can be automatically generated with metric distances as
long as the Metric Display parameter in the Options and Modes category
is turned ON.

CIDB can track multiple cut files/markers when the Contiguous Cut
feature is enabled.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Cutter Info Database (CIDB) 13

CIDB Database Information


Facts about the Cutter Information Database
Here are a few important details about CIDB:

There are no keys actually defined in the CIDB, but they can be added
without causing harm to the database. A key is an identifier for a table.

Distances in the CIDB database are always in inches. For reports, this
can be changed to centimeters using the Metric Display parameter in the
Options and Modes category.
CAUTION:

To prevent errors in interpreting CIDB data, make sure that


any switch between measurement types is recorded.
Currently, the mode (standard or metric) the cutter was in
when any particular cut file/marker was cut is not identified
in the database.

All times other then start and stop times are recorded in minutes and
hundredths of minutes. For example, 3.75 would be interpreted as three
minutes and 45 seconds.

New tables may be added to the CIDB without causing difficulty.


However, adding columns to the existing tables is not recommended.
CAUTION:

Names of the tables and columns in reports should not be


translated.

Idle Time
Reported time calculated relative to the Shift Start time. This means that the Idle
Time is 5 minutes (not 15 hours and 5 minutes) if a marker was started at 8:05
a.m. and the last marker was run at 5:00 p.m. the previous day.
Note:

Idle time was previously called Prep time.

Interrupt Time
Reported time while the cutter is stopped after using the Stop button.
Sleep Time
This time tracking category is available for GERBERcutters with the Dual Beam
option. Sleep time is the amount of time either beam, primary and secondary,
waits for the other beam. This time may be waiting for one beam to complete
cutting or for it to move out of the way so the other beam can continue cutting.

14 Cutter Info Database (CIDB)

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Database Structure
Tables in the CIDBaccs.mdb database file are documented in the
CIDBaccess.PDF file.
Note:

This file is updated periodically. Please check the latest version by


clicking on the above link.

Information about the Report Generator source code is documented in the


ReportGenSource.PDF file. This document is provided for those customers
who desire more detailed reports or specific output formats.
Reducing Database Size
The CIDBaccs.mdb may get very large as the CIDB accumulates data. In the
past the only way to fix this was to delete the entire database and start again from
scratch. While that approach is still viable, a new feature has been added that
allows the user to delete all records and events occurring before a specified date
and time.
To specify cut-off criteria and delete records/events

1. Exit the C-200MT program.


2. From the C:\BIN directory, run the Prepgen.EXE program to open a
report window.
3. From the Options menu, select Delete Records.
4. Enter values in the Date and Time fields.
CAUTION:

To prevent the possibility of corrupting data when new


reports are added to the database, leave a buffer of data for
at least several days before the first cut file data you need
to keep. The default cut off date is three weeks prior to the
current date.

5. Click Delete Records. Data stored prior to the cut off date and time
will be deleted from the hard disk.
6. When prompted with the number of records and events deleted, click
OK.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Cutter Info Database (CIDB) 15

CIDB Support for Microsoft Access


The Cutter Information Database (CIDB) is compatible with Microsoft
Access97. To assist users of the C-200MT program who want to read CIDB data
in Access, refer to the topics below. Writing macros or using other advanced
features of the Access program to analyze the data are too complex to be covered
in this topic.
CAUTION:

To prevent loss of data, names of the tables and column


headings in this report must not translated.

Opening Database with Microsoft Access


Opening the Cutter Information Database with Access is simple. This
CIDBaccs.mdb database file is stored in the C:\REPORT directory.
To open the file

1. Start Microsoft Access.


2. From the File menu, select Open Database.
3. Use the Open dialog box to find and open the CIDBaccs.mdb file.
4. Open up the various tables to view the information.

16 Cutter Info Database (CIDB)

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Index
A

About .............................................................. 2
Access ..................................................... 11, 16
CIDB support for ...................................... 16
drivers for CIDB ....................................... 11

ODBC Drivers .............................................. 11


Opening Database with Microsoft Access.... 16
Operator Comments ........................................ 8
Operator Login/Logout ................................... 8

Changing Measurement Units ...................... 13


CIDB..................................................... 2, 6, 13
CIDB Drivers................................................ 11
Access ....................................................... 11
ODBC........................................................ 11
CIDB Support for Microsoft Access ............ 16

Partial Marker Report ..................................... 3


Printing Reports .............................................. 9
from text editor.......................................... 10
TXT or CSV file.......................................... 9

Events ............................................................. 7
setting options ............................................. 7
Events Report.................................................. 4

Reducing Database Size................................ 15


report............................................................... 4
Events.......................................................... 4
Shift ............................................................. 4
Report ............................................................. 3
Marker ......................................................... 3
Partial Marker.............................................. 3
Report Generator............................................. 6
using ............................................................ 6
Reports.................................................. 5, 9, 13
printing ...................................................... 10
save as TXT or CSV ................................... 9

Hints for Printing on 80 Column Printer ...... 10

Saving ............................................................. 9
TXT or CSV................................................ 9
Setting Event Options ..................................... 7
Setting Shift Times ....................................... 12
Shift............................................................... 12
setting times .............................................. 12
Shift Reports ................................................... 4
Sleep Time .................................................... 14

Database............................................ 14, 15, 16


open in Access .......................................... 16
reducing size ............................................. 15
structure..................................................... 15

I
Idle Time....................................................... 14
Interrupt time ................................................ 14

L
Login............................................................... 8
Logout............................................................. 8

M
Marker Report................................................. 3
partial .......................................................... 3
Measurement Units....................................... 13
changing .................................................... 13

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Cutter Info Database (CIDB) 17

18 Cutter Info Database (CIDB)

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Routine Maintenance
Routine maintenance is required to keep your GERBERcutter running at peak
performance. Maintenance procedures covered in this chapter include:

Sharpening the knife while the cutter is idle

Resetting knife wear logic for a newly-installed knife

Cleaning the table surface for cutters equipped with the automatic Bristle
Cleaner option

Refer to the GERBERcutter operators manual or System Service manual for


additional maintenance procedures.

Sharpening
The knife blade must be sharp and within wear limits to cut properly. Features in
the C-200MT program provide for:

Automatic sharpening cycles while cutting

Sharpening when cutter is idle

Sharpening when installing a new knife

Controlling Sharpening and Knife Wear settings

Sharpening While Cutting


Automatic sharpening cycles that occur while cutting are controlled by Sharpen
parameter settings in the setup. How often a sharpening cycle occurs can be
based on cutting distance or piece count.
To adjust typical settings, click the Knifewear gauge button to display the
Sharpening and Knife Wear dialog box.
Additional Sharpen parameters that can be set for S-3200 or GT 3250
GERBERcutters using Parameter Manager are:
Parameter

Use To

Number of Sides to Sharpen

Set the number of sides to be


sharpened per cycle.

Sharpen Position #1

Set the C-axis angle for


sharpening each side of the knife
blade.

Sharpen Position #2

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Routine Maintenance 1

Sharpening When Cutter is Idle


Use the Sharpen command in the Cutter menu to sharpen the knife when the
cutter is idle. If you are sharpening a newly-installed knife, first use the New
Knife command.
To sharpen when cutter is idle

1. Make sure the knife motor is running. Refer to the GERBERcutter


operator's manual.
WARNING!

The knife blade is very sharp. Refer to the


GERBERcutter operator's manual for specific
procedures to inspect, adjust, remove, and install a
knife blade.

1. Do one of the following:

Press the Sharpen key on the keyboard.

Press the SHARP button on the beam control panel.


From the Cutter menu, select Sharpen.
Click the Sharpen button on the tool bar.
2. In the Sharpen Knife dialog box, do one of the following:
To sharpen the current knife using the default setting in the
Number of Sharpen Cycles parameter. Press Enter or click the
OK button.
To change how many times the current knife is sharpened, type a
different number. Press Enter or click the OK button.
To sharpen a newly-installed knife the number of times set in the
Sharpen New Knife n Times parameter, click the New Knife
button.
The System Message box reports the number of sharpens completed
compared to the number of sharpens requested and updates this
message until the sharpening is finished. For a new knife, the Knife
Wear gauge is reset.

2 Routine Maintenance

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Controlling Knife Sharpening and Wear Settings


The table below explains Sharpen parameters that can be adjusted:

For current conditions using the Sharpening and Knife Wear feature.

As defaults in the setup using Parameter Manager.

Parameter Setting

Use To

Ignore Sharpen (M42) Codes

Turn this feature on/off. When on, sharpen


commands in the cut file are ignored.

Number of Sharpen Cycles

Set the number of rotations


per cycle.

Sharpening Time

Set the amount of sharpening.

Sharpen Only When Knife is Up

Turn this feature on/off.

Sharpen Every n Pieces

Set the number of pieces to be cut before a


sharpen cycle.

Sharpen Frequency

Set the linear distance to be cut before a


sharpen cycle.

Sharpens until Overcut Update

Set to update knife wear compensation.

Knife Wear Limit

Set the maximum number of cycles or cut


distance before prompting to change the
knife blade.

Using Sharpening and Knife Wear


Use the Sharpening and Knife Wear feature to adjust sharpen settings for current
cutting conditions.
To adjust sharpen and knife wear settings

1. On the main cutter screen, click the Knifewear gauge button.


The Sharpening and Knife Wear dialog box displays.
2. To change settings temporarily, type new value(s) within the acceptable
range in the appropriate field(s). Then press Enter or click OK.
3. If a field can not be edited, click the Parameter Manager button to make
changes to the setup.
4. To add a new knife, click the New Knife button.
Setting Sharpen Defaults
To set defaults for one or more setups, use the Parameter Manager and
parameters in the Sharpen category.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Routine Maintenance 3

Resetting for New Knife


Use the New Knife command in the Cutter menu after installing a new or
partially-used knife blade. The New Knife command resets knife wear logic,
which tracks sharpening cycles for the current knife and prompts when the knife
wear limit is reached.
Note:

After using the New Knife command, use the Sharpen command in the
Cutter menu.

To reset for a new knife

1. Carefully install a new or partially-used knife blade.


WARNING!

The knife blade is very sharp. Refer to the


GERBERcutter operator's manual for specific
procedures to inspect, adjust, remove, and install a
knife blade.

2. Turn on the knife motor. Refer to the GERBERcutter operator's manual


or Getting Started.
3. From the Cutter menu, select New Knife.
4. In the New Knife dialog box, check the appropriate radio button for a
Brand New or Used knife.
5. If Used was selected in step 4, type the number of times this knife was
previously sharpened.
6. Press Enter or click the OK button.
The Knife Wear gauge is reset.
7. Follow the steps for sharpening the current knife.

4 Routine Maintenance

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Bristle Cleaning
Bristle Cleaner Options
Removing lint and debris from the table surface promotes vacuum flow through
the BRISTLE SQUARES. Options available for cleaning the work surface
depend on the GERBERcutter model.

Detachable vacuum hose

Automatic Bristle Cleaning option

Bristle Cleaning Manual Vacuum


A vacuum hose can be connected to the vacuum system and used, as required, to
manually clean the work surface. This is available as an option for S-91 static
cutters.
Depending on the GERBERcutter, an optional Automatic Bristle Cleaning
option is available.
Automatic Bristle Cleaner Option
An optional automatic Bristle Cleaner is available for GT 3250/5250/7250 and
S-3200/5200/7200 static cutters.
Use the Bristle Cleaner command in the Utilities menu to initiate cleaning of the
BRISTLE SQUARES that make up the table surface and to choose automatic
shut down strategies. The default number of passes the Bristle cleaner makes and
the duration of the cleaning cycle are preset using parameters in the Bristle
Cleaner category. Refer to the GERBERcutter operator's manual for the
recommended frequency for cleaning.
To initiate bristle cleaning

1. Before using the Bristle Cleaner command, do all of the following:


Turn off the main power supply for the cutter.
Follow the procedures in the GERBERcutter maintenance
manual for inspecting the air filters and connecting the vacuum
hose.
Turn on the main power supply and run the C-200MT program.
Initialize the cutter.
2. From the Utilities menu, select Bristle Cleaner.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Routine Maintenance 5

3. In the Bristle Cleaner dialog box, you can change the preset number of
passes by doing one of the following:
Click on the arrow buttons to the right of this field.
Click in the field and type a new number.

4. Check any Upon Completion options you want to use:


Turn off vacuum If checked, vacuum is automatically turned
off when cleaning is complete.
Turn off servo power If checked, servo power is disabled when
cleaning is complete, the system prompts you of an emergency
stop condition, and requests that servo power be enabled.
Quit application If checked, the C-200MT program is shut
down when cleaning is complete.
5. Click the Start button. The dialog box reports the percent cleaning
completed.
6. When prompted that the cleaning cycle is complete, press Enter or
click the OK button.

6 Routine Maintenance

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Optimizing Cutter Performance


Along with routine maintenance procedures, such as knife sharpening and bristle
cleaning, adjustments need to be made for differences in fabric and spreads.
Parameters and menu commands and allow you set up and run these features.

Controlling Knife Speeds

Controlling Cut Speeds

Using Knife Intelligence

Using Path Intelligence

Controlling Vacuum Levels

Controlling Knife Speed


The table below explains knife speed parameters that can be adjusted:

For current conditions using the Set Knife Speed feature.

As defaults in the setup using Parameter Manager.

Knife Speed Type

Use To

Idle

Set reciprocating speed when the cutter


is idle.

Dry Haul/Minimum

Set reciprocating speed during dry haul.


Set minimum reciprocating speed when
cutting.

Cut/Maximum

Set maximum reciprocating speed


when cutting.

Sharpen

Set reciprocating speed during sharpen


cycle.

Cut Speed=Maximum

Define the relationship between


maximum cutting speed and the cutting
speed dial on the beam control panel.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Optimizing Cutter Performance 1

Using Set Knife Speed


Use the Set Knife Speed feature to adjust knife speed for current cutting
conditions.
To adjust knife speeds

1. Make sure that the cutter is in the mode for which you want to set knife
speed. For example, to set Idle Knife speed the cutter must be at idle.
2. Do one of the following:
Press the Set Knife Speed button on the beam control panel.

Press the Set Knife Speed key.

Click the Knife Speed gauge button.


Select the Set Knife Speed button on the tool bar.
The Knife Speed dialog box displays.
3. For each type of knife speed you want to change, type to enter a new
value within the acceptable range. Then press Enter or click the OK
button.
4. If a field can not be edited, click the Parameter Manager button to make
changes to the setup.
Setting Knife Speed Defaults
To set default knife speeds for one or more setups, use the Parameter Manager
and the Knife and Drill Speeds category.

2 Optimizing Cutter Performance

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Controlling Cut Speeds


The table below explains Cut Speed parameters that can be adjusted:

For current conditions using the Cut Speeds feature.

As defaults in the setup using Parameter Manager.

Cut Speed Setting

Use To

Maximum Cut Velocity

Sets the maximum beam velocity when the


beam moves with the knife down.

Max Cut Acceleration

Sets the maximum acceleration for X and Y


axes allowed during cutting.

Maximum Dry Haul Velocity

Sets the maximum velocity during


automatic cutting when the tools are up.

Dry Haul Acceleration

Sets the acceleration during automatic


cutting when the tools are up.

Using Cut Speed


Use the Cut Speeds feature to adjust knife speed for current cutting conditions.
To adjust cut speeds

1. On the Main Cutter Control screen, click the Cut Speed gauge button.
The Cut Speed dialog box displays.
2. To change speeds temporarily, type new value(s) within the acceptable
range in the appropriate field(s). Then press Enter or click OK.
3. If a field can not be edited, click the Parameter Manager button to make
changes to the setup.
Setting Cut Speed Defaults
To set default knife speeds for one or more setups, use the Parameter Manager
and System Setup and other Field Service Level parameters.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Optimizing Cutter Performance 3

Using Path Intelligence


Path Intelligence completely or partially controls cut speed using built-in
application knowledge and by measuring one or more of the following:

Knife sharpness

Vacuum level

XY force

Use commands in the Diagnostics menu and its submenus to ensure that the
GERBERcutter is running properly. Setup parameters in the Knife and Path
Intelligence category define the Path Intelligence (PI) feature.
To use Path Intelligence

1. Make sure the cutter is idle.


2. Open the Parameter Manager.
3. Edit one or more of the following Path Intelligence parameters in the
Knife and Path Intelligence category.
Turn on PI:FR Faster - Shp Knife to have PI increase cut speed
immediately after a knife sharpen, decrease over a period of time,
and return to standard until the next knife sharpen.
Turn on PI:FR Slowdown - Low Vac to have PI decrease cut
speed when vacuum level is low and return to standard when
vacuum level rises again.
Turn on PI:FR Control - XY Force to have PI check the
Optimum Force setting and increase/decrease cut speed to
optimum. Additional parameters must be set to define the
Optimum Force.

4 Optimizing Cutter Performance

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Knife Intelligence
Knife Intelligence (KI) is a GERBERcutter feature that:

Senses deflection of the knife (lateral force) caused by cutting difficult


materials or high ply spreads

Changes knife angle to compensate for this deflection

Setup parameters in the Knife and Path Intelligence category define Knife
Intelligence (KI) for cutters equipped with this feature.
KI is not applicable for S-3200, GT 3250, and GTxL GERBERcutters.

Note:

To use Knife Intelligence

1. Open the Parameter Manager.


2. Turn ON the KI:On/Off parameter in the Knife and Path Intelligence
category.
3. Edit additional KI parameters to define how Knife Intelligence
compensates for lateral force.
To turn Knife Intelligence on or off

1. From the Cutter menu, select Knife Intelligence On/Off.


Controlling KI Settings
The table below explains Knife Intelligence parameters that can be adjusted:

For current conditions using the KI Settings feature.

As defaults in the setup using Parameter Manager.

Knife Intelligence Setting

Use To

KI Gain

Set the amount of force available for


adjusting the knife heading to correct for
lateral forces on the knife.

KI Deflection Angle

Set the greatest angle Knife Intelligence can


turn the C-axis to compensate for lateral force
on the knife.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Optimizing Cutter Performance 5

Using KI Settings
Use the KI Settings feature to adjust Knife Intelligence for current cutting
conditions.
To adjust Knife Intelligence settings

1. Do one of the following:


Click the Knife Intel. gauge button.
From the Cutter menu, select KI Settings.
2. Type to change the value of either parameter. Values must be within
the acceptable ranges.
3. When finished, press Enter or click the OK button.
Setting Knife Intellligence Defaults
To set default settings for one or more setups, use the Parameter Manager and
Knife and Path Intelligence parameters.
Nulling Knife Intelligence Sensor
Use the Null KI command in the Cutter menu to reset (to zero) the Knife
Intelligence sensor. If your cutter can utilize this feature, this command should
be used:

When KI is first turned on

Daily after the cutter is initialized (when using KI)

For each new spread (when using KI)

6 Optimizing Cutter Performance

C-200MT Software Users Guide

To null Knife Intelligence

1. At the beam control panel, use Trim Cut and the slew buttons to move
the cutter head until the knife blade is just off the edge of the spread.
Refer to the GERBERcutter operator's manual.

2. Turn on the knife motor.


3. Turn on vacuum.
4. From the Cutter menu, select Null KI. This is the same as pressing the
F1 button on the beam control panel twice.
5. In the KI Warning box, press Enter or click the OK button.
WARNING!

The knife blade is very sharp. Refer to the


GERBERcutter operator's manual or System Service
manual for specific procedures to inspect, adjust,
remove, and install a knife blade.

The knife plunges and then rises. The System Messages box prompts
when the Null procedure is completed.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Optimizing Cutter Performance 7

Controlling Vacuum Levels


The Vacuum Settings dialog box displays a series of Vacuum System
parameters that you can modify. You can also set these parameters from the
Parameter Manager. See the table below for vacuum settings available in this
dialog box.
Note:

Actual parameters shown in this dialog box depend on the model of your
cutter. Items that are grayed out can not be adjusted due to the current
setting of the Vacuum Control Type parameter.

Setting

Use To

Vacuum Error Reporting


Vacuum Low Error Level

Turn this feature on/off.


Set the pressure (inches Hg) when an error
will be reported.

Energy Savings Mode


Time until ESM

Turn this feature on/off.


Set the time when ESM will be take effect
after the cutter has been idle.

Vacuum Zoning
Vacuum Zone Overlap

Turn this feature on/off if cutter is equipped


with Vacuum Zoning.
Set the amount of overlap between vacuum
zones on the cutter table.

Vacuum Control

Select a vacuum control type that permits


customized vacuum level settings
(see below).

Vacuum Level Settings:

Set the vacuum level when the cutter is


performing a specific function.

Vacuum Level - Cut


Vacuum Level - Idle
Vacuum Level - Bite

8 Optimizing Cutter Performance

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Using Vacuum Settings


Use the Vacuum Settings feature to adjust vacuum levels for current cutting
conditions.
To adjust vacuum levels

1. On the Main Cutter Control screen, click the Vacuum gauge button.
The Vacuum Settings dialog box displays.
Note:

Actual parameters shown in this dialog box depend on the


model of your cutter. Items that are grayed out can not be
adjusted due to the current setting of the Vacuum Control
Type parameter.

2. To change settings temporarily, type new value(s) within the acceptable


range in the appropriate field(s). Then press Enter or click OK.
3. If a field can not be edited, click the Parameter Manager button to make
changes to the setup.
Setting Vacuum Level Defaults
Use the Parameter Manager to set defaults for one or more setups.
To setup default vacuum levels

1. Open the Parameter Manager.


2. Edit any of the following parameters in the Vacuum System category.
Enable Vacuum Zoning. Then set the overlap distance between
the cutter head and the next zone.
Turn on Vacuum Error Reporting to display vacuum error
warnings.
Set Vacuum Control Type to BUTTERFLY or VFD
ENHANCED (if cutter is equipped with Vacuum Level Control
system). Then set additional parameters to define the vacuum
level used for biting, cutting, and when idle.
Enable Energy Savings Mode. Then use the Time Until ESM
parameter to set the number of seconds the cutter is idle before
Energy Savings Mode begins.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Optimizing Cutter Performance 9

Turning on Energy Savings Mode


To turn on Energy Savings Mode

1. Make sure the Energy Savings Mode (ESM) parameter in the Vacuum
System category is enabled and the vacuum is turned on.
2. From the Cutter menu, select Energy Savings Mode.
The Vacuum Level gauge is now labeled Energy Savings Mode.
3. Select again to turn off ESM.

10 Optimizing Cutter Performance

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Diagnostics
Choose commands in the Diagnostics menu to access diagnostics. Diagnostics
included in the C-200MT program ensure cutter performance. Diagnostics may
need to run when mechanical parts have been replaced or new software has been
loaded.
CAUTION:

Diagnostics should be used only by the person in your company


who has received GERBERcutter maintenance training or
by Field Service.

Input Output Test (DG 23)


This diagnostic can be used to test individual motors, switches, lights, and other
components. Only use this diagnostic when told to by Field Service or in the
C-200MT Software Users Guide or GERBERcutter operator or system service
manual (for example, to diagnose MCC error messages).
To run the diagnostic

1. Turn on the GERBERcutter and run the C-200MT program.


2. Optional Enable servo power and initialize the cutter.
3. From the Diagnostics menu, select Input Output Test (DG 23) to
open the DG 23 screen (example shown below).

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Diagnostics 1

WARNING!

Stand away from moving parts on your cutter


when you use this diagnostic. Injury or death may result
if you are in the path of cutter parts when they move.
Depending on which control you are testing, part of the
cutter may move. This can be, but is not limited to, the
knife blade, drill, conveyor, and other mechanical parts.

4. To test an output signal, use the arrow keys or pointing device to


highlight the signal that you want to test. Hold down the Ctrl key and
press the Space bar.
Note:

Some GERBERcutters provide a second, loopback bit that


reports the actual state of output. When the system is
communicating correctly, output command and loopback
signal show the same result (for example, 00).

In the left half of the screen:


Active output shows as green
Loopback signal that does not match active output choice shows
as yellow (see note above).
Inactive output shows as red
5. To test an input signal, you will need to use a cutter component. For
example, press a button.
The listed signal changes either from 0 to 1 or 1 to 0. The actual
component on the cutter you are testing becomes active or inactive.
In the right half of the screen:
Active input shows as green
Inactive input shows as red
6. After you finish testing the components, press Esc or click the Exit I/O
Diagnostic button.

2 Diagnostics

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Servo I/O Test (DG 16)


The Servo I/O Test diagnostic can be used to test X, Y, C servo motors and the
Knife, Drill, and Conveyor drives. Only use this diagnostic when told to by Field
Service.
How It Works
Servo motion results by the MCC board sending command voltage signals to the
motor drives and receiving position information from the encoders. In this
diagnostic, the MCC can output a pre-selected command voltage to a selected
drive depending on whether the EStop loop is:

OPEN Full command voltage is available and can be monitored at


various test points in the control.

CLOSED Limited command voltage is available and can be used to


drive the motors at a reduced speed.

In addition to testing the outputs, the diagnostic can read from the conveyor
tachometer and X, Y, and C encoders. On some cutters, the KI sensor and knife
speed can also be read.
To run the diagnostic

1. Turn on the GERBERcutter and run the C-200MT program.


2. From the Diagnostics menu, select Servo I/O Test (DG 16).
3. The system opens the EStop loop and displays the Servo Diagnostic
screen.
4. Use this screen to:
Test Outputs
Test Inputs
Test Encoders
5. When finished testing, press Esc or click the Exit Servo Diagnostics
button.
6. Clear any error message and then enable servo power.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Diagnostics 3

Testing Outputs with Servo I/O Diagnostic


You can test outputs with the EStop loop either OPEN or CLOSED.
To test outputs with EStop loop OPEN

1. In the Output section of the Servo Diagnostic screen, use the Arrow
keys or pointing device to select the output you want to test.
2. Type a value for the desired output voltage (valid range is -10.00 to
+10.00 volts).
3. Press the Ctrl key to apply the voltage.
4. Monitor the output voltage at test points on the transition board or
directly on the selected drive board. Refer to the service schematics for
your cutter.
To test outputs with EStop loop CLOSED

1. Double-click on the Toggle E-Stop State button.


2. When prompted, type the Field Service level password and press
Enter.
3. Enable servo power.
EStop STATUS is now Closed.

4 Diagnostics

C-200MT Software Users Guide

4. Notice the position of the beam and head on the table.


WARNING!

Be aware of the direction the beam and head will


move when a command voltage is applied or injury
could result. Refer to the chart below.

Device/Polarity

Result

X1 drive / Negative voltage

Beam moves +X

X1 drive / Positive voltage

Beam moves -X

Y drive / Negative voltage

Beam moves +Y

Y drive / Positive voltage

Beam moves -Y

C drive / Negative voltage

C axis rotates CCW

C drive / Positive voltage

C axis rotates CW

X2 drive / Negative voltage

Beam moves -X

X2 drive / Positive voltage

Beam moves +X

Knife drive / Positive voltage

Knife rotates (if knife switch is in


ON position)

Conveyor drive/ Negative


voltage

Conveyor moves forward

Conveyor drive / Positive


voltage

Conveyor moves reverse

Hvy Drill speed / Positive


voltage

Drill rotates (if knife switch is in ON


position)

CTOT drive / Negative voltage

CTOT moves forward

5. In the Output section of the Servo Diagnostic screen, select the output
you want to test.
6. Type a value for the desired output voltage (valid range is -3.00 to
+3.00 volts).
7. Press the Ctrl key to apply the voltage. As long as this key is held
down, the motor will turn.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Diagnostics 5

Testing Inputs with Servo I/O Diagnostic


To test inputs with EStop loop CLOSED

1. Apply a command voltage to the knife and conveyor drives.


2. In the Input section of the Servo Diagnostic screen, monitor the
feedback voltage that displays in the corresponding field.
3. To test the Knife Intelligence sensor:
Make sure the Knife motor is turned OFF before applying lateral
pressure to the lower guides to move the sensor.
Monitor the feedback voltage.
Testing Encoders with Servo I/O Diagnostic
To test encoders with EStop loop OPEN

1. Double-click on the Reset Encoder Counts to 0 button.


2. At the cutter, physically move one of the servo axes or rotate an
encoder while monitoring encoder counts in the Encoder section of the
Servo Diagnostic screen.
To test encoders with EStop loop CLOSED

1. Double-click on the Reset Encoder Counts to 0 button.


2. Apply a command voltage to move the conveyor or servo axis.
3. Monitor encoder counts in the Encoder section of the Servo Diagnostic
screen.

6 Diagnostics

C-200MT Software Users Guide

KI Calibration (DG 20)


This diagnostic is used to calibrate the Knife Intelligence deflection voltage
sensor (if the cutter can utilize KI).
Note:

To check if calibration is required, first use the Null KI


command.

To run the diagnostic

1. Turn on the cutter and run the C-200MT program.


2. Enable servo power.
3. From the Diagnostics menu, select KI Calibration (DG 20) to open
the DG 20 screen.
4. Use Trim Cut to lower the knife.
5. On the presser foot bowl assembly, loosen the clamping screw that
locks the transducer adjusting screw.
6. Adjust the transducer screw until the output voltage is at, or near, zero.
7. Tighten the clamping screw to lock the transducer adjusting screw.
8. When finished, press Esc or click the Exit DG20 button.
9. Use the Null KI command to null Knife Intelligence.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Diagnostics 7

C Axis Angle
Use this diagnostic to check C-axis rotation. A C-axis that is fully functional,
both electrically and mechanically, can turn to any heading (angle).
To run the diagnostic
1. Turn on the GERBERcutter and run the C-200MT program.
2. Enable servo power.
3. Initialize the cutter.
4. From the Diagnostics menu, select C Axis Angle.
5. In the C Axis Angle Diagnostic dialog box, type the desired angle.
Press Enter or click the Apply button.
The C-axis rotates to the angle you entered.
6. Repeat step 5 to try another C-axis angle.
7. When finished, press Esc or click the Done button.

Sharpen Angle
The Sharpen Angle diagnostic, which is used on S-3200 and GT 3250 cutters,
allows you to:
= Adjust the sharpen angles
= Sharpen one or both sides of the knife
Settings made using this diagnostic can be saved to all system setup files.
To run the diagnostic
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select Sharpen Angle.
2. In the dialog box, type to enter new angles for sharpening side one or
side two.
3. Type to enter the number of times you want to sharpen both sides.
4. Press the appropriate Sharpen button to test your changes.
5. When finished, press Enter or click the OK button.

8 Diagnostics

C-200MT Software Users Guide

6. When prompted, you can choose to save changes to all setups.


7. If you clicked Yes in step 6, the system prompts that x number of
setups were changed. Press Enter or click the OK button.

Calibrate Conveyor Move


This diagnostic can be used to calibrate conveyor movement over small
distances in order to improve precision. Use this diagnostic only when C-200MT
software is first installed or when conveyor parameters are reset.
When selected, the conveyor begins by moving 20 inches. This initial movement
resets the value of the Ramp Down Dist Auto Bite parameter. Additional small
movements (beginning at 0.1 inches, increasing in 0.1 inch increments up to a
move of 8.0 inches) are used to create a reference table that is utilized and
updated during normal cut processing.
To run the diagnostic

1. Before starting, do all of the following:


Clear the table surface of material
Turn the CTOT off
2. From the Diagnostics menu, select Calibrate Conveyor Move.
The Ramp Down Dist Auto Bite parameter is reset.
WARNING!

C-200MT Software Users Guide

To prevent injury, stand clear of the beam during this


procedure. As needed, the cutting head is repositioned
to the take-on end of the table until all movements are
completed.

Diagnostics 9

C Home to System Zero


The C Home to System Zero diagnostic allows you to adjust this knife setting
and command the system to plunge the knife four times in a straight line.
Settings made using this diagnostic can be saved to all system setup files.
Note:

The Supervisor or Field Service password must be entered in


Parameter Manager before using this diagnostic.

To run the diagnostic

1. Place a large square of paper on the cutting surface. Position the head
over the paper.
2. From the Diagnostics menu, select C Home to System Zero.
3. Press the Plunge Knife 4 Times button.
4. After the knife has plunged four times, compare the cuts to the example
shown in the dialog box. Make any necessary adjustments.
5. In the dialog box, type the number of degrees to adjust the knife setting.
6. Reposition the head over the paper. Repeat steps 3 through 5 until
satisfied with results.
7. When finished, press Enter or click the OK button.
8. When prompted, you can choose to save changes to all setups.
9. If you clicked Yes in step 9, the system prompts that x number of
setups were changed. Press Enter or click the OK button.
10. Initialize the cutter to make your changes effective.

10 Diagnostics

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Single Step Diagnostic


Use this diagnostic to turn Single Step mode on or off. When Single Step mode
is on, you can process cut file data one block at a time. This is useful when
recovering from a FEP error.
Note:

During Single Step mode, the cutter head rises if more than three
seconds elapse without your initiating a command. This keeps
material from fusing. The cutter head lowers when you initiate a
command again.

To turn on the Single Step diagnostic


1. Do one of the following:
From the Diagnostics menu, select Single Step.
Right click in the gray area next to the gauges to display Settings
Options. Click Enable Single Stepping.
A button displays on-screen, indicating that Single Step is ON.
2. When finished processing in this mode, select Single Step again or
click on the Single Step button to turn off the diagnostic.
To process a cut file/marker using Single Step mode

1. Turn on Single Step mode.


2. Initialize the cutter.
3. Open a cut file/marker.
4. Set the marker origin.
5. Start processing the cut file/marker. The monitor displays the first line
of data in the file and the cutter performs the specified command.
6. Press Ctrl + S to display the next line of data code and issue that
command to the cutter.
7. Repeat step 6 until the end of the cut file/marker.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Diagnostics 11

8. If the system finds an error, an error message displays. Use the line of
data code and the error message to discover the error in processing the
file.
9. When finished, press Esc to stop processing the cut file/marker in
Single Step mode.

Continuous Run
Use this diagnostic to test the mechanical, electrical, and electronic functions of
the GERBERcutter. When this feature is turned on, any cut file/marker that you
process runs continuously until you press the Stop button. When the cutter
reaches the end of the file, cutting starts again at the beginning.
To use Continuous Run

1. From the Diagnostics menu, select Continuous Run.


2. The Settings window indicates that Continuous Run is ON.
3. Open a marker and start processing.
4. To stop processing, you have to press the Stop button.
5. When finished using this mode, select Continuous Run again to turn off
the diagnostic.

Display Bite Adjust Values


Use this diagnostic to display the Bite Adjustment value, which is calculated at
the end of every bite. The default range is +/- 38.1 mm (+/- 1.5 in.) and can be
changed by your service representative.
To run the diagnostic

1. From the Diagnostics menu, select Display Bite Adjust Values.


2. Process a bite. The Bite Adjustment value displays.
3. Note the value. Then press Enter or click the OK button.
4. When finished using this mode, select again to turn off the diagnostic.

12 Diagnostics

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Conveyor/CTOT Speed Calibrate


This diagnostic can be used on S-3200/5200/7200, GT 3250/5250/7250, and
GTxL GERBERcutters to calibrate conveyor speed to Conveyorized Take-Off
Table (CTOT) speed. Only use this diagnostic if told to by Field Service.
To change speed settings, use Field Service level parameters in the
Conveyor and CTOT category.

Note:

To run the diagnostic

1. From the Diagnostics menu, select Conveyor/CTOT Speed


Calibrate.
A dialog box prompts that calibration has started.
2. To stop calibrating, press Esc or click the OK button.

Stepsize Setup
This diagnostic can be used to calculate new stepsize settings for the X and
Y-axes and save these settings to system setup files.
To run the diagnostic

1. Use the Move Absolute command in the Cutter menu to move the
X-axis a specific distance. Do this twice, marking the exact location of
each move. Then measure the actual distance moved.
2. From the Diagnostics menu, select Stepsize Setup.
The Current stepsize shows in the dialog box.
3. Enter values for:
= Desired move distance
= Actual distance moved
4. Click the Calculate button.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Diagnostics 13

5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for the Y-axis.


6. When finished, click either the Save or Save to All button to save this
setting to one or more setup files.
Note:

The system must be re-initialized before the new setting will


go into effect.

Edge Sensor Diagnostic


Use this diagnostic as part of the setup procedure for the Automatic Tube
Centering option. For information on setting up and using this option, refer to
document part number 83806000.
To run the diagnostic

1. Place a piece of underlay paper over the cutting table. Turn on the
vacuum to hold the paper in place.
2. While the Edge Finders are retracted, hold a pencil against the inside
edge of each of the two Edge Finders and mark two lines on the paper.
3. From the Diagnostic menu, click Edge Sensor. Click the Test button in
the Edge Finder Diagnostic dialog box. This engages both edge finders,
moving them the maximum allowed distance toward each other.
4. Mark the positions of the edge finders when engaged as explained in
step 3. There should now be four lines on the paper.
5. Click OK to retract the Edge Finders and then click Exit to leave the
diagnostic.

14 Diagnostics

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Position Info
Use this diagnostic to have the system calculate and display the change in X and
Y distances from the current position to the current origin.
To run the diagnostic

1. From the Diagnostics menu, select Position Info. Or press Ctrl + P.


2. Note the Distance From Origin values reported.
3. Press Esc or click the Close button.

Move Head To
Use the Move Head To command in the Cutter menu to move the cutter head to
an absolute (X,Y) position on the table. This command can be useful when
performing diagnostics.
To move the head to a specific location

1. From the Cutter menu, select Move Head To.


2. In the Move Head To dialog box, type the X position to move to and
then type the Y position to move to. Press Enter or click the OK
button.
The new coordinates display in the System Status window.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Diagnostics 15

Zone Valve Exerciser


The Zone Valve Exerciser diagnostic aids in testing, setting up, or
troubleshooting hardware for the vacuum zone control.
To run this diagnostic

1. From the Diagnostics menu, select Zone Valve Exerciser.


2. In the dialog box, click to select whether you want to exercise all zones
or only one zone.
3. If you selected all zones in step 2, go to step 4.
Or if you selected one zone in step 2, enter the zone number you want.
4. Click the Start button.
A check mark displays in the appropriate box as each zone is being
exercised.
5. When finished, click the Stop button.

16 Diagnostics

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Cut Tests
Running Cut Tests
A Cut Test is actually just a marker designed to check a specific cutter operation.
Run Cut Tests as you would any marker, replacing the spread with a piece of
paper. Specific steps required for a Cut Test diagnostic and the expected results
are explained in each topic. Also refer to the GERBERcutter operator's manual.
To run Cut Tests

1. Start the C-200MT program.


2. Enable servo power.
3. Initialize the cutter.
4. Position paper and plastic on the table. See each diagnostic for the
specific paper size to use.
5. Turn on the vacuum.
6. Slew the cutter head to the lower left corner of the paper.
7. On the beam control panel do all of the following:
= Press the ORIG button.
= Set CUTTING SPEED to 10, unless otherwise noted.
= Set KNIFE to ON.
8. From the Diagnostics menu, choose Cut Tests. Then select the
appropriate diagnostic.
9. Press the Start button to run the diagnostic. The GERBERcutter
displays the status screen while the diagnostic is running.
10. When processing is complete, at the beam control panel do all of the
following:
= Set KNIFE to OFF.
= Press the VAC ON/OFF button.
11. Slew the cutter head out of the way, unless otherwise noted.
12. Check the results as explained in the topic for each diagnostic.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Diagnostics 17

Multiple Horizontal Lines


This Cut Tests diagnostic was used on early model GERBERcutters to check the
C-axis for proper mechanical alignment relative to the X-axis. During this
diagnostic, the cutter cuts five horizontal lines in a piece of paper. The knife cuts
three lines in a +X direction, and two in a -X direction. If all lines are evenly
spaced, the knife is centered in the C-axis. If the lines are unevenly spaced, the
knife is offset from the center of the C-axis.
To run the diagnostic

1. Run the Cut Tests diagnostic as normal except:


Place a piece of paper 0.5 m (20 in.) square or larger on the table.
Set Cutting speed to 5.
2. To check results, measure the distance between the lines cut in the
paper. The lines should be 12.7 mm (0.5 in.) apart. Call Field Service if
the lines are unevenly spaced.

18 Diagnostics

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Multiple Vertical Lines


This Cut Tests diagnostic was used on early model GERBERcutters to check the
C-axis for proper mechanical alignment along the Y-axis. During this diagnostic,
the cutter cuts five vertical lines in a piece of paper. The knife cuts three lines in
a +Y direction, and two in a -Y direction. If all lines are evenly spaced, the knife
is centered in the C-axis. If the lines are unevenly spaced, the knife is offset from
the center of the C-axis.
To run the diagnostic

1. Run the Cut Tests diagnostic as normal except:


Place a piece of paper 0.5 m (20 in.) square or larger on the table.
Set Cutting speed to 5.
2. To check results, measure the distance between the lines cut in the
paper. The lines should be 12.7 mm (0.5 in.) apart. Call Field Service if
the lines are unevenly spaced.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Diagnostics 19

Multiple 45 degree Lines


This Cut Tests diagnostic was used on early model GERBERcutters to check the
C-axis for proper mechanical alignment relative to the X and Y-axes. During this
diagnostic, the cutter cuts five 45 degree lines in a piece of paper. If all lines are
evenly spaced, the knife is centered in the C-axis. If the lines are unevenly
spaced, the knife is offset from the center of the C-axis.
To run the diagnostic

1. Run the Cut Tests diagnostic as normal except:


Place a piece of paper 0.5 m (20 in.) square or larger on the table.
Set Cutting speed to 5.
2. To check results, measure the distance between the lines cut in the
paper. The lines should be 12.7 mm (0.5 in.) apart. Call Field Service if
the lines are unevenly spaced.

Good

20 Diagnostics

Bad

Bad

C-200MT Software Users Guide

50" Square Test


This Cut Tests diagnostic can be used to check that the beam is square with the
cutting table. The beam is square when neither end leads the other as the beam
travels along the cutting table. In this diagnostic, the GERBERcutter cuts a 1.27
m (50 in.) square from a piece of paper. If corner-to-corner measurements are
the same, the beam is square.
Note:

The Beam Square Test is currently used instead of this


diagnostic.

To run the diagnostic

1. Run the Cut Tests diagnostic as normal except:


Place a piece of paper 1.5 m (60 in.) square or larger on the table.
Before initializing the cutter, turn Run Time Biting OFF.
2. To check results, first measure a diagonal line from the upper left
corner to the lower right corner. Then repeat from the upper right
corner to the lower left corner to get the second measurement.

3. Compare the measurements with those in the table below.


Measurement

Indication

Action

Equal to within 0.8 mm (0.03


in.)

The beam is square.

None

First is greater than second

The beam is not square.


The +Y end of the beam
leads the -Y end.

Use the difference between


these measurements to adjust
beam alignment.
Refer to the GERBERcutter
operator's manual.

Second is greater than first

C-200MT Software Users Guide

The beam is not square.


The -Y end of the beam
leads the +Y end.

Same as above

Diagnostics 21

Concentric Circles
This Cut Tests diagnostic can be used to check for proper alignment of the X, Y,
and C-axes to ensure accurate cutting. In this diagnostic, the cutter cuts eight
concentric circles from a piece of paper.
To run the diagnostic

1. Run the Cut Tests diagnostic as normal, except place a piece of paper
0.5 m (20 in.) square or larger on the table.
2. To check results, make sure that each circle is perfectly round and
exactly 2.54 cm (1 in.) larger than the one inside it. If so, the X, Y, and
C-axes are properly aligned. Call Field Service if circles are not
concentric.

22 Diagnostics

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Beam Square Test


Use this Cut Tests diagnostic to check that the beam is square with the cutting
table. In this diagnostic, the cutter plunges the knife at each corner of a square. If
corner-to-corner measurements are the same, neither end leads as the beam
travels along the table and the beam is square.
To run the diagnostic

1. Run the Cut Tests diagnostic as normal except:


Place a piece of paper at least 1.5 m (60 in.) square and
preferably larger on the table. This diagnostic must be rerun after
making any adjustments.
Before initializing the cutter, turn Run Time Biting OFF.
2. To check results, first measure a diagonal line from top right tip to
bottom left tip of the knife plunges. Then repeat from top left tip to
lower right tip to get the second measurement. Each line should be 160
cm (63 in.).

3. Compare the measurements with those in the following table.


Measurement

Indication

Action

Equal to within 1.0 mm


(0.03 in.)

The beam is square.

None

First is greater than


second

The beam is not square.


The +Y end of the beam
leads the -Y end.

Use the difference between


these measurements to adjust
beam alignment.
Refer to the GERBERcutter
operator's manual.

Second is greater than


first

C-200MT Software Users Guide

The beam is not square.


The -Y end of the beam
leads the +Y end.

Same as above.

Diagnostics 23

Heel to Heel Test


Use this Cut Tests diagnostic to check the mechanical alignment of the knife in
the C-axis. The knife must be properly aligned for accurate cutting. In this
diagnostic, the system plunges the knife twice so that alignment can be checked.
To run the diagnostic

1. Run the Cut Tests diagnostic as normal except:


Place a piece of paper 0.5 m (20 in.) square or larger on the table.
After initializing the cutter set Knife speed to:

10,500 rpm for the S-3200 and GT 3250 only

2,500 rpm for all other cutters

CAUTION:

Knife speed must be set to one of the above values to


simulate the knife load caused by cutting a spread and
ensure that results of this diagnostic will be accurate.

Set Cutting speed to 1.


2. To check results, compare your test knife cuts with the graphic below.
3. If correct, go to step 5.
4. If the knife is out of alignment, your trained GERBERcutter
maintenance person can adjust knife alignment using the Gerber Knife
Adjustment box. Otherwise, call Field Service.
Note:

A slight negative offset is beneficial under certain cutting


applications. Contact Field Service for recommendations and
limitations.
Heel-to-heel Measurement

Zero Offset

24 Diagnostics

Negative Offset

Positive Offset

C-200MT Software Users Guide

5. When alignment is correct, measure the heel-to-heel distance. If this


measurement falls outside the proper range, call Field Service. See the
table below.
GERBERcutter*

Range for High Ply Knife

Range for Low Ply Knife

S-3200, GT 3250

11.0 to 11.5 mm
(0.43 to 0.45 in.)

4.6 to 5.1 mm
(0.18 to 0.20 in.)

S-5200, GT 5250

Fixed at 12.7 mm +/- 0.80


(0.5 in. +/- 0.03)

N/A

S-7200, GT 7250

12.7 to 14.3 mm
(0.5 to 0.56 in.)

N/A

S-91 ZVC
Static S-91
S-91 TCW

* Not applicable for GTxL GERBERcutter

Yaw in X Test
Use this Cut Tests diagnostic to check the knife for yaw in the X-axis. X-axis
yaw is the angle of the knife relative to the X-axis. For most applications, there
should be no yaw; the knife should be parallel to the X-axis. In this diagnostic,
the cutter head travels in a straight line parallel to the X-axis. As it travels, the
cutter head plunges the knife four times. The angle of knife plunges relative to
the line of travel indicates the current yaw value.
To run the diagnostic

1. Run the Cut Tests diagnostic as normal except:


= Place a piece of paper 0.5 m (20 in.) square or larger on the table.
= After initializing the cutter, set Knife speed to:
= 10,500 rpm for the S-3200 and GT 3250 only
= 2,500 rpm for all other cutters
CAUTION:

Knife speed must be set to one of the above values to


simulate the knife load caused by cutting a spread and
ensure that results of this diagnostic will be accurate.

= Set Cutting speed to 1.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Diagnostics 25

2. To check results, draw a line through the first cut from the center of the
heel through the center of the tip. Extend the line past the last cut. The
extended line must pass through all additional cuts in order to have
perfect alignment (shown in the bottom example).

3. If extended lines do not pass through all cuts, the knife is out of
alignment in X. Enter a new value in the C Home to System 0 Degrees
parameter to correct the condition.
Note:

Increasing this value moves toward a positive yaw angle;


decreasing the value moves toward a negative yaw angle.

4. Repeat the diagnostic to check results of your changes. When correct,


save changes to your setup files.

26 Diagnostics

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Yaw in Y Test
Use this Cut Tests diagnostic to check the knife for yaw in the Y-axis. Y-axis
yaw is the angle of the knife relative to the Y-axis. For most applications, there
should be no yaw; the knife should be parallel to the Y-axis. In this diagnostic,
the cutter head travels in a straight line parallel to the Y-axis. As it travels, the
cutter head plunges the knife four times. The angle of knife plunges relative to
the line of travel indicates the current yaw value.
To run the diagnostic

1. Run the Cut Tests diagnostic as normal except:


Place a piece of paper 0.5 m (20 in.) square or larger on the table.
After initializing the cutter, set Knife speed to:

10.500 rpm for the S-3200 and GT 3250 only

2,500 rpm for all other cutters

CAUTION:

Knife speed must be set to one of the above values to


simulate the knife load caused by cutting a spread and
ensure that results of this diagnostic will be accurate.

Set Cutting speed to 1.


2. To check results, draw a line through the first cut from the center of the
heel through the center of the tip. Extend the line past the last cut. The
extended line must pass through all additional cuts in order to have
perfect alignment (example at right). If extended lines do not pass
through all cuts, go to step 3.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Diagnostics 27

3. If the knife is out of alignment in Y, enter a new value in the C Home


to System 0 Degrees parameter to correct the condition.
Note:

Increasing this value moves toward a positive yaw angle;


decreasing the value moves toward a negative yaw angle.

4. Repeat the diagnostic to check results of your changes. When correct,


save changes to your setup files.
10" Square, Center Drill Hole
This diagnostic can be used to check that the current drill offset value allows the
GERBERcutter to place drill holes accurately. Drill offset is the location of the
drill bit relative to the origin light. The system cuts a 25.4 cm (10 in.) square and
then places a drill hole in the square. If the hole is in the exact center of the
square, the system is using the proper value for drill offset.
Note:

Note: Drill 1 Offset Setup and Drill 2 Offset Setup are


currently used instead of this diagnostic.

To run the diagnostic

1. Run the Cut Tests diagnostic as normal, except place a piece of paper
that is 0.5 m (about 20 in.) square or larger on the table.
2. To check results, draw diagonal lines from opposite corners of the
square. The lines should cross over the drill hole.
3. If the lines do not cross, the drill offset is incorrect. Call Field Service
to correct the condition.

28 Diagnostics

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Geometric Shapes
Use this Cut Tests diagnostic to test for proper functioning of GERBERcutter
components with the C-200MT program. In this diagnostic, the cutter processes
a cut file consisting of several different geometric shapes. The system is
functioning correctly if it cuts all the pieces without any problems.
To run the diagnostic

1. Run the Cut Tests diagnostic as normal, except pull paper from a
spreading table onto the cutting table. Make sure you cover the entire
table.
2. To check results, compare the cut pieces with the pattern below. Call
Field Service if the results are not as expected.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Diagnostics 29

5' Bite Test


Use this Cut Tests diagnostic to test the conveyor for proper bite feeding by
processing two squares (5 ft or 1.524 m) in three bites. If the conveyor is not set
up correctly, the common line shared by the squares does not cut properly.
To run the diagnostic

1. Run the Cut Tests diagnostic as normal except:


Make sure Run Time Biting is OFF.
Pull paper from a spreading table onto the cutting table. Make
sure you cover the entire table.
The system cuts square 1, advances 1.524 m (5 ft) to bite 2, cuts square
2, advances 1.524 m (5 ft) to bite 3, and stops cutting.
2. To check results, compare with the pattern below. The conveyor is
properly adjusted if the common line between square 1 and square 2
has been cut only once. Call Field Service if results are not as expected.

30 Diagnostics

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Knife Offset Setup


Use this Cut Tests diagnostic to check that the cutter is using the correct value
for knife offset. Knife offset is the location of the knife blade relative to the
origin light. If the system is using the wrong value for knife offset, cuts will not
be made in the correct location.
Note:

This diagnostic should be used whenever the laser light or


head is changed.

To run the diagnostic

1. Run the Cut Tests diagnostic as normal except, place a piece of paper
1.5 m (60 in.) square or larger on the table.
The cutter positions the knife at, or near, the origin and executes a knife
down cycle. After it stops cutting, the Systems Message box prompts
that processing is complete.
2. Use the Move to Origin command.
3. To check results, make sure that the origin light shines exactly on the
intersection of the horizontal and vertical lines. If it does not, do one of
the following:
Continue with steps 4 through 6.
Call Field Service.
4. Use the Position Info diagnostic to determine the exact location.
5. Make appropriate changes to the Offset in X - Knife and Offset in Y Knife parameters in the System Setup category.
6. Reorigin and repeat this diagnostic to check your changes.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Diagnostics 31

Drill 1 Offset Setup


Use this Cut Tests diagnostic to check that the cutter is using the correct value
for the main drill offset. Drill offset is the location of the drill bit relative to the
origin light. If the system is using the wrong value for drill offset, it can not cut
accurately.
Note:

This diagnostic should be used whenever the laser light or head is


changed.

To run the diagnostic

1. Run the Cut Tests diagnostic as normal except place a piece of paper
1.5 m (60 in.) square or larger on the table.
The cutter drills a single drill hole. The Systems Message box prompts
that processing is complete.
2. Use the Move to Origin command.
3. To check results, make sure that the origin light shines exactly onto the
drill hole. If it does not, do one of the following:
Continue with steps 4 through 6.
Call Field Service.
4. Use the Position Info diagnostic to determine the exact location.
5. Make appropriate changes to the Offset in X - Drill 1 and Offset in Y Drill 1 parameters in the System Setup category.
6. Reorigin and repeat this diagnostic to check your changes.

32 Diagnostics

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Drill 2 Offset Setup


Use this Cut Tests diagnostic to check that the cutter is using the correct value
for the auxiliary drill offset. Drill offset is the location of the drill bit relative to
the origin light. If the system is using the wrong value for drill offset, it can not
cut accurately.
Note:

This diagnostic should be used whenever the laser light or head is


changed.

To run the diagnostic

1. Run the Cut Tests diagnostic as normal except place a piece of paper
1.5 m (60 in.) square or larger on the table.
The cutter drills a single drill hole. The Systems Message box prompts
that processing is complete.
2. Use the Move to Origin command.
3. To check results, make sure that the origin light shines exactly onto the
drill hole. If it does not, do one of the following:
Continue with steps 4 through 6.
Call Field Service.
4. Use the Position Info diagnostic to determine the exact location.
5. Make appropriate changes to the Offset in X - Drill 2 and Offset in Y Drill 2 parameters in the System Setup category.
6. Reorigin and repeat this diagnostic to check your changes.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Diagnostics 33

Pen Offset Setup


This Cut Tests diagnostic can be used to check that the GERBERcutter is using
the correct value for pen offset. Pen offset is the location of the pen relative to
the origin light.
To run the diagnostic

1. Run the Cut Tests diagnostic as normal except place a piece of paper
1.5 m (60 in.) square or larger on the table.
A vertical and a horizontal line are drawn in an L shape. The Systems
Message box prompts that processing is complete.
2. Use the Move to Origin command.
3. To check results, make sure that the origin light shines exactly on the
intersection of the horizontal and vertical lines. If it does not, do one of
the following:
Continue with steps 4 through 6.
Call Field Service.
4. Use the Position Info diagnostic to determine the exact location.
5. Make appropriate changes to the Offset in X - Pen and Offset in Y Pen parameters in the System Setup category.
6. Reorigin and repeat this diagnostic to check your changes.

34 Diagnostics

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Beam Square Diagnostics


Beam Squareness
This diagnostic is used along with Beam Square Test to square the beam for
cutters, such as GTxL, with two, independent X motors. Use this diagnostic to
have the system set a Beam Square Adjustment value based on x1 and x2 index
distances. This value needs to be reset whenever:

Mechanical part(s) affecting x1 and x2 index distances have been


replaced or modified

Beam has been mechanically squared

FEP software has been loaded

Once this diagnostic has been run, the beam is automatically squared when you
initialize the cutter, including after EStop or error conditions.
Parameters for Beam Squareness Diagnostic
Two Field Service level parameters in the System Setup Parameters category are
used along with the Beam Squareness diagnostic: Beam Square Adjustment and
Beam Squared.
To set Beam Square Adjustment value

1. Mechanically square the beam as explained in the Maintenance manual


for the GERBERcutter.
2. Make sure that the Beam Squared parameter in the System Setup
Parameters category is set to NO.
3. Initialize the cutter.
The cutter performs normal Home routine, then the beam moves one
inch and back to initial position.
4. Square the beam as explained on next page.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Diagnostics 35

To square beam after value is set

1. Position paper and plastic on the cutter table.


2. From the Diagnostics menu, choose Cut Test and then select Beam
Square Test.
The diagnostic file (diag9.int) is opened.
3. From the Cutter menu, select Move Head To. In the dialog box enter
X5.0, Y5.0. Press Enter or click OK.
4. On the beam control panel do all of the following:
Press the ORIG button.
Turn the VACUUM on.
Set KNIFE to on.
5. Cut the marker.
The knife plunges at each corner of the square.
6. Measure diagonals (about 160 cm).
7. From the Diagnostics menu, select Beam Squareness.
8. In the dialog box, enter the exact measurements for Diagonal 1 and
Diagonal 2.
The system modifies the Beam Square Adjustment parameter and sets
the Beam Squared parameter to YES. Click OK.
To automatically square beam

1. Make sure the Beam Squareness diagnostic has been run at least once.
2. Initialize the cutter. During initialization, the x2 position is adjusted
(click) to the new Beam Square Adjustment value.

36 Diagnostics

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Path Intelligence Diagnostics


Use diagnostics in the Path Intelligence submenu to:

Calibrate PI

Optimize PI

Calibration
Use this Path Intelligence diagnostic to set up Path Intelligence (PI) for your
system. Also use this diagnostic to test the current draw of your cutter head and
beam. You should use this diagnostic:

Daily when using PI

For each new spread

This diagnostic checks the amount of electrical current required to move the
cutting head with the knife up in a square pattern. It starts at feed rate 2,
incrementing one feed rate as it moves through each square up to feed rate 15.
After it has finished testing current draw, data is stored for use by Path
Intelligence.
To run the diagnostic

1. From the Diagnostics menu, select Path Intelligence.


2. Select Calibration.
The system moves the cutter head and beam, in a square pattern 14
times. After it stops, respond to the system message as explained in the
following table.
System Message

Appropriate Action

PASS - X and Y currents within normal ranges

Begin cutting.

WARNING - X or Y current increased since last test

Call Field Service.

WARNING - X or Y current higher than normal

Call Field Service.

FAIL - X or Y current unacceptably high

Call Field Service.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Diagnostics 37

Watch Forces
Use this diagnostic to optimize Path Intelligence (PI). To do this, first measure
the force needed to cut different materials at different feed rates and ply heights.
Then for each material type, use this data along with the PI: Optimum Force
parameter to determine the appropriate maximum speed setting and the
maximum number of plies to cut.
To run the diagnostic

1. From the Diagnostics menu, select Path Intelligence.


2. Then select Watch Forces.
The following parameter setting displays in the Settings window:
Force:x.xxx (z.zzz)
where x.xxx is a real- time measure of the force the cutter is using and
z.zzz is the maximum force that has been measured since you turned on
the Watch Forces diagnostic.
Note:

To reset the maximum measured force to zero, you must turn


off this diagnostic and turn it back on.

3. When finished optimizing PI, select Watch Forces again to turn off the
diagnostic.

38 Diagnostics

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Software Diagnostics
Diagnostics in this menu are used during software development and
may be used by Field Service when troubleshooting.
Restorable Info
This diagnostic provides information that can be used to restore values after a
system shut down. The types of information include:

Knife Wear

Origin

Setup

Marker Info

Queue Info

To run the diagnostic:

1. From the Diagnostics menu, choose Software Diagnostics and then


select Restorable Info.
2. View information about the current state.
3. To close the window, click the button marked by an X at the top right
corner.
Debug Window Diagnostic
Use this diagnostic to open a window to display internal diagnostic and
communication information. Event Logging in the Software Parameters category
must be enabled.
To run the diagnostic:

1. From the Diagnostics menu, choose Software Diagnostics and then


select Debug Window.
2. To close the window after viewing debug data, repeat step 1.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Diagnostics 39

Servo Data Logging Diagnostic


Use this diagnostic to copy the most recent communication data between motion
control board and operator console to hard disk or to a 3.5 inch disk for analysis.
To run the diagnostic:

1. From the Diagnostics menu, choose Software Diagnostics and then


select Servo Data Logging.
2. To copy to a 3.5 inch disk, type a:\datalog.dat in the File Name field.
3. To change the sample interval, click the up or down arrow buttons and
then click the Set Mask button.
4. Click the Upload Data button.
5. To close the window, click the button marked with an X at the top right
corner.
Error Simulation Diagnostic
Use this diagnostic to simulate:

Actual error message and evaluate cutter error handling

Dr. Watson error for Windows NT

To run the diagnostic:

1. From the Diagnostics menu, choose Software Diagnostics and then


select Error Simulation.
2. To evaluate cutter error handling, type in the error number you want to
simulate and click OK.
Note:

Errors 4000 and 4001 occur when the system identifies a


situation and then calls a shut down. Errors 4002 and 4003
are invoked without any prior warning to the system. When
simulating errors 4002 or 4003, a marker must be opened and
run. The error will occur at piece #2 in the marker.

3. To evaluate a Dr. Watson error, click the Dr Watson Error Simulation


button. When the warning displays, click OK to continue or Cancel to
return to the diagnostic. Click OK to save the unhandled exception to
the c:\bin\c200mt.rpt file.

40 Diagnostics

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Communications Statistics
Use this diagnostic to view how many attempts were made to establish:

Communication between the controller and the operator console.

Why communications failed.

To run the diagnostic:

1. From the Diagnostics menu, choose Software Diagnostics and then


select Communications Statistics.
2. To close the window, click the button marked by an x at the top right
corner.

Dual Beam Diagnostics


GERBERcutters that have the dual beam option have additional diagnostics to
check the secondary beam. Refer to the online help for your GERBERcutter.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Diagnostics 41

42 Diagnostics

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Diagnostic Addendum
Dynamic Offset / Yaw Cut Test
Offset

Use this Cut Tests diagnostic as follows to check offset whenever maintenance is
performed on the sharpener or roller guide or if a cut quality or sizing condition
exists.
1. From the Diagnostics menu, choose Cut Tests and select Dynamic
Yaw / Offset.
2. Select 1 inch to open the YAW 1in. cut file or select 3 cm to run the
YAW 3cm cut file.
3. Place a 4 inch x 8 inch stack of a typical material being cut on the
cutting surface. Use underlay paper and overlay plastic.
Note:

Best results are obtained with medium to high ply test cuts of
harder materials.

4. Select the appropriate knife speed and feed rate for material to be cut.
Run the cut test.
5. Measure the distance between the points of the two knife plunges
(distance A). The measurement should be 1 inch or 3 cm, depending on
the specific cut test run.

6. If the measurement is correct, go to step 9. Or to check Yaw also, go to


step 6 in the Yaw procedure.
7. If the measurement is incorrect, refer to presser foot roller guide
adjustments for adjustment.
8. After adjustment, repeat steps 2 through 7 until it is corrected.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Diagnostic Addendum 1

9. Exit the diagnostic.


Yaw

Use this diagnostic as follows to check yaw whenever maintenance is performed


on C-axis components or the sharpener.
1. From the Diagnostics menu, choose Cut Tests and select Dynamic
Yaw / Offset.
2. Select 1 inch to open the YAW 1in. cut file or select 3 cm to run the
YAW 3cm cut file.
3. Place a 4 inch x 8 inch stack of a typical material being cut on the
cutting surface. Use underlay paper and overlay plastic.
Note:

Best results are obtained with medium to high ply test cuts of
harder materials.

4. Select the appropriate knife speed and feed rate for material to be cut.
Run the cut test.
5. Measure the distance between the points of the two knife plunges
(distance A). The measurement should be 1 inch or 3 cm based on the
specific cut test run.
6. Measure the distance between the two cut lines (distance B) midway
from the ends of the lines. The measurement should be equal to the
offset measurement. Any CW Piece deviation (refer to graphs on
next page) is described as B A.

7. If the measurements are correct, go to step 10.


8. If the measurement is incorrect, perform the C Home to System Zero
diagnostic using the value determined from graph 1 (in inches) or graph
2 (in centimeters) to modify the C Home to System 0 Degrees
parameter. See graphs on next page.
9. Repeat steps 2 through 8 until the measurements are correct.
2 Diagnostic Addendum Dynamic Offset/Yaw Cut Test

C-200MT Software Users Guide

10. Exit the diagnostic.

+ Yaw

- Yaw

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Diagnostic Addendum 3

4 Diagnostic Addendum Dynamic Offset/Yaw Cut Test

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Error Messages
Field Service
If a condition still exists after using this appendix to troubleshoot, call your in-house
service representative or Gerber Field Service. In North America, call 800-321-2448.
Outside North America, call your local service office. Have your service contract
number ready.

Error Messages
The GERBERcutter displays an error message dialog box when it detects an error
condition. The system numbers these error messages for easy reference. The first digit
of the error number defines the error class. The error classes range from 1 to 4, with
class 1 being the least severe. Preprocess errror messages do not have an error number.
Tables in this appendix list error messages, their causes, and possible solutions.
Note:

For the most current information on error messages,


refer to the C-200MT online help. If necessary, this help
file can be accessed from another PC, by searching the
C-200MT software CD and double-clicking on the
C200MT.hlp file.

Error Message
Type

Error Number
Range

Page #

Class 1 FEP

1002-1606

Class 1 MCC

1000-1701

11

Class 2

2000-2552

19

Class 3

3000-3810

24

Class 4

4600

28

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Error Messages 1

Class 1 FEP Errors


The following table lists class 1 FEP errors. These errors relate to conditions
with the cut file. When a class 1 error occurs, the system stops cutting.
To resume cutting, see the Recovery chapter. Also, refer to the GERBERcutter
operators manual.

Class 1 FEP Errors


Error
Code

Description

Possible Cause or Effect

Possible Solutions

1002

Illegal character in
logical block

System found a character other


than X, Y, Z, Q, D, M, S, H, or
N in the cut file.

Edit the cut file for the illegal


character. Remove the illegal
character or change it to a legal
character.

1003

Block of data in file too


big

In the cut file, the end of


block character is missing or
the block exceeds the number
of characters allowed.

Use Single Step mode to check


the cut file. Insert an end of block
character (*), if needed.

1004

Invalid tool code

The system found a tool code


it does not support in the cut
file.

Use Single Step mode to check


the cut file. Remove or change
the invalid tool code.

1005

Move greater than


maximum allowed

Data point separation in the


cut file exceeds the value set
in the setup.

Increase the Maximum Segment


Length parameter in the setup.

1006

Point separation not


sufficient

In the cut file, distance


between data points is less
than 0.025 mm (0.001 in.).

Redigitize the piece.


Regenerate the cut file.

1007

Unexpected end of file


encountered

The system found an


unexpected M00 (end of file)
code in the cut file.

Use Single Step mode to check


the cut file for the incorrect end
of file code (M00). Remove the
incorrect code.
Regenerate the cut file.

1008

Invalid bite size in file

In the cut file, bite size


Regenerate the cut file with a bite
exceeds the limits of the table. size that fits the table.

1009

Error converting ASCII


to integer

Bad cut file.

1010

Invalid non-tool code

The system found a non-tool


Same as 1009.
code in the data in the cut file.

1011

Block of M20 data in file


too big

A message stop (M20) has


more than 40 characters in the
cut file.

Edit data for message stop.


Regenerate the cut file.

1012

M31 data block expected

Label data is missing in the


cut file.

Same as 1009.

2 Error Messages

Regenerate the cut file.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Class 1 FEP Errors (Contd)


Error
Code

Description

Possible Cause or Effect

Possible Solutions

1013

Invalid clipping window


limits

Clipping option is enabled,


but upper and lower Y
boundaries are not within
limits.

In the setup, set the Clipping Low


Boundary and Clipping High
Boundary parameters within
specified limits.

1014

Clipping boundaries not


set

Clipping is enabled, but you


did not set the upper and
lower Y boundaries.

Same as 1013.

1015

Too many optional stops


in the marker

The system found more than


100 OPSTOPs in the cut file
or bite.

Regenerate cut file with fewer


than 100 OPSTOPS per cut file or
bite.

1016

Illegal fetch preset


optional stop table

The Preset Optional Stop


Table is corrupt.

Quit the C-200MT program, turn


off the power, and restart. Try
processing the cut file again.

1017

Offtable +X

You told the cutter head to go


farther than the cutting table
limits.

Move the origin.


Check cut file format.
Check that the cutter head and
beam are not too close to the limit
switches.

1018

Offtable - X

Same as 1017.

Same as 1017.

1019

Offtable +Y

Same as 1017.

Same as 1017.

1020

Offtable - Y

Same as 1017.

Same as 1017.

1021

M20 Message was not


found

Marker Size: Use M20 Code


parameter is ON, but there is
no M20 code in the cut file.

Set the Marker Size: Use M20


Code parameter to OFF.

1022

File not found for AAMA


conversion

System could not find this


file. The file has been deleted
or renamed.

Find or rename the missing file.

1023

AAMA conversion init


failed

Bad AAMA cut file.

Same as 1009.

1024

Incorrect file format

AAMA date conversion is


turned on but the cut file is
not AAMA data.

Turn off AAMA Data Conversion


parameter.

1086

M19 found without a


notch

Improper use of M19 code in


the cut file.

Same as 1009.

1100

Wrong number of
parameters : ER

Communication error
between the FEP and the
MCC.

Quit the C-200MT program, turn


off the power, and restart. Call
Field Service if condition persists.

1101

Wrong number of
parameters : LS, FS

Same as 1100.

Same as 1100.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Error Messages 3

Class 1 FEP Errors (Contd)


Error
Code

Description

Possible Cause or Effect

Possible Solutions

1102

Wrong number of
parameters : OA

Communication error
between the FEP and the
MCC.

Quit the C-200MT program, turn


off the power, and restart. Call
Field Service if condition persists.

1103

Wrong number of
parameters : OI

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1104

Wrong number of
parameters : PG

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1105

Wrong number of
parameters : TR

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1106

Wrong number of
parameters : OR

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1107

BGL string not recognized Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1108

Character not recognized


in string

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1109

Error number not valid

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1110

Status item number not


valid

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1111

Parameter number not


valid

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1112

Status value out of range

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1113

Parameter value out of


range

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1114

Reached max number of


BGL strings

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1115

Wrong number of
parameters: OS

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1116

Wrong number of
parameters: IS

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1117

The Labeler is not


supported

System found an M31 (labeler)


code in the cut file.

Set the Ignore Label Cycle (M31)


Codes parameter to ON.

1118

The Auxiliary Drill is not


supported

System found an M44


(auxiliary drill) code in the
cut file.

Set the Ignore Aux Drill (M44)


Codes parameter to ON.

1119

Wrong number of
parameters: DO

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1120

Wrong number of
parameters: DI

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

4 Error Messages

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Class 1 FEP Errors (Contd)


Error
Code

Description

Possible Cause or Effect

Possible Solutions

1121

Wrong number of
parameters: BS

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1122

Wrong number of
parameters: YO

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1200

Message queue overflow

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1201

PC Error queue overflow

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1202

Pathmod queue overflow

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1203

ANSI sequence sent too


long

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1204

Controller Error queue


overflow

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1300

Timeout error on serial 2


line

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1301

Too many bad buffers or


rejects

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1302

Overrun on serial 2 line

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1303

Parity error on serial 2


line

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1304

Framing error on serial 2


line

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1305

Break interrupt on serial


2 line

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1306

OR attempt has failed (no


buffers)

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1308

Char thrown away from


protocol

Same as 1102.

Same as 1102.

1311

I/O Error reading cut file

Disk drive failure while


accessing the cut file.

Check that a disk is in the drive or


that the disk controller has failed.
From the SYSTEM: prompt, run
CHKDSK or SCANDISK to see
if the disk is damaged.

1312

File Copy: Error reading


file

Same as 1311.

Same as 1311.

1313

I/O Error During Piece


Search

Same as 1311.

Same as 1311.

1314

I/O Error During Bite


Search

Same as 1311.

Same as 1311.

1315

Network I/O Error

Network failure while


accessing the cut file.

Check the network file server and


cables.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Error Messages 5

Class 1 FEP Errors (Contd)


Error
Code

Description

Possible Cause or Effect

1316

File Copy Memory


Allocation Error

Not enough FEP memory to


run the C-200MT program.

Remove memory-resident FEP


programs that do not relate to the
C-200MT.

1317

File Copy: Error Writing


File

Disk drive failure while


writing the cut file.

Check that a disk is in the drive or


that the disk controller has failed.
From the SYSTEM: prompt, run
CHKDSK or SCANDISK to see
if the disk is damaged.
Close the cut file and open again.

1318

Adjust and re-origin


before continuing

Error during bite caused a


loss of position.

Close the cut file. Reorigin at the


bite edge clip. Use the Piece
Search command to find the piece
being cut. Press F12.

1319

Bite adjust value out of


range

Difference between actual


conveyor move and desired
conveyor move was greater
than Maximum Bite
Adjustment parameter.

Check the bite encoder and the


conveyor drive motor and
transmission. Call Field Service.
Increase Maximum Bite
Adjustment parameter.

1320

Controller not responding

Internal communication
connection not established.

Quit the C-200MT program, turn


power off, and restart.

1321

Cannot initialize comm


port

Unable to initialize
communication line.

Set the communications port in


the setup.

1400

File not open in cut


processor

You did not ask the system to


open a cut file.

Press F1 to find and open a cut


file.

1401

Error closing PC file

The cut file cannot be closed.

Same as 1317.

1402

Error seeking to file


position

System cannot access the cut


data file.

Same as 1317.

1403

Error locking destination


file

Occurs when copying files on


a network system.

The network locks the file


because another operator is
accessing the same file. Try again
when the file is not being
accessed.

1404

Error locking source file

Same as 1403.

Same as 1403.

1405

Error unlocking
destination file

Same as 1403.

Same as 1403.

1406

Error unlocking source


file

Same as 1403.

Same as 1403.

1407

Error flushing file

Same as 1403.

Same as 1403.

6 Error Messages

Possible Solutions

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Class 1 FEP Errors (Contd)


Error
Code

Description

Possible Cause or Effect

Possible Solutions

1408

Origin not reset since bad


bite

Message appears if error code


1318 is ignored.

Close the cut file. Reorigin at the


bite edge clip. Use the Piece
Search command to find the piece
being cut. Press START.

1409

\SYSFILES\ENGLISH\
DG23.INT not found

System could not find this


file. The file has been deleted
or renamed.

Quit the C-200MT program and


reload the C-200MT software.
Call Field Service if condition
persists.

1410

Timeout Error requesting


input status

Communication error
between the FEP and the
MCC.

Quit the C-200MT program and


reload the C-200MT software.
Call Field Service if condition
persists.

1411

Timeout Error requesting


output status

Same as 1410.

Same as 1410.

1412

Timeout Error requesting


BCC status

Communication error
between the MCC and BCC.

Same as 1410.

1413

\SYSFILES\ENGLISH\
DG16.INT not found

System could not find this


file. The file has been deleted
or renamed.

Same as 1410.

1414

Inv text
\sysfiles\english\dg16.int

The file has been corrupted.

Same as 1410.

1415

Error: Timeout waiting


for DO data

Same as 1410.

Same as 1410.

1416

Error: Timeout waiting


for DI data

Same as 1410.

Same as 1410.

1417

Error: Timeout waiting


for LS49 status

Same as 1410.

Same as 1410.

1418

\SYSFILES\ENGLISH\
DG23.INT not found

Missing or bad message file.

Same as 1410.

1420

Inv text
\sysfiles\english\dg29.int

Same as 1418.

Same as 1410.

1421

Error: Timeout waiting


for sharpen status

Same as 1410.

Same as 1410.

1422

SBITE: Not enough


memory for sbite

Not enough FEP memory.

Same as 1316.

1423

SBITE: Invalid bite data


detected

System could not understand


bite commands in the cut file.

Regenerate the cut file or use a


static bite marker.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Error Messages 7

Class 1 FEP Errors (Contd)


Error
Code

Description

Possible Cause or Effect

Possible Solutions

1424

SBITE: Bad
tablesize/bitesize

Maximum Bite Length


parameter must be greater
than Minimum Bite Length
parameter.

Check the Maximum Bite Length


and Minimum Bite Length
parameters.

1425

SBITE: Premature EOF

Bad cut file.

Regenerate the cut file.

1427

SBITE: Cant read input


file

Bad or missing cut file.

Check the source disk drive or


regenerate the cut file.

1428

SBITE: Cant write


output file

Hard disk drive may be full


or bad.

Use the DIR command to see if


the hard disk drive is full.

1429

SBITE: Cant bite


without reorder

Run time biting could not


process the cut file.

Check the Run Time Biting


parameter or regenerate the cut
file.

1430

SBITE: Last position not


in last bite

Head Park command in the


cut file is not correct.

Correct the cut file.

1431

SBITE: Advance needed


to cut pieces

Invalid bite parameters.

Same as 1424.

1432

SBITE: Deadend segment Piece contains a long internal


piece not cut
line that does not fit in one
bite.

Change the bite parameters or


eliminate/change the piece in the
cut file.

1433

SBITE: Piece requires


too many splits

More than 16 splits are


required for one piece.

Increase the length of the bite by


increasing the Minimum Bite
Length and Maximum Bite
Length parameters.

1434

SBITE: Error opening


temp output file

Same as 1428.

Same as 1428.

1435

SBITE: Invalid error


number

FEP internal software error.

Quit the C-200MT program and


reload the C-200MT software.
Call Field Service if condition
persists.

1436

SBITE: Cant open


SBITE.DSP

System could not find this


file. The file has been deleted
or renamed.

Quit the C-200MT program, turn


off the power, and restart. Try
processing the cut file again.
If unsuccessful, reload the
C-200MT software.

8 Error Messages

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Class 1 FEP Errors (Contd)


Error
Code

Description

Possible Cause or Effect

Possible Solutions

1437

Create error
C:\SYSFILES\
RESSTATE.INT

1438

Seek error C:\SYSFILES\ Same as 1437.


RESSTATE.INT

Same as 1437.

1439

Write error
C:\SYSFILES\
RESSTATE.INT

Same as 1437.

Same as 1437.

1440

Read error
C:\SYSFILES\
RESSTATE.INT

Same as 1437.

Same as 1437.

1441

SBITE: Min first bite size


too small

Minimum size of first bite is


set too low (contiguous cut
feature only).

Increase the size of first bite to at


least twice the difference between
the maximum and minimum bite
sizes.

1443

SBITE: Improper number


of markers

FEP internal software error.

Call Field Service.

1444

SBITE: The two markers


overlap

You are cutting two markers


and the markers overlap.
You are cutting two markers
and tubular goods are being
cut. Cut lines extend beyond
actual goods.

Separate the spreads. Set


Selvage/Web cutting to OFF.

1445

SBITE: Cant write


binary file

Problem accessing internal


application file.

Check whether the hard disk


drive or drive controller has
failed. Quit the C-200MT
program and restart.
Run Scandisk.

1446

SBITE: Cant read binary


file

Same as 1445.

Same as 1445.

1447

SBITE: Binary file


checksum error

Same as 1445.

Same as 1445.

1448

SBITE: Cant find piece


with matching ID

Same as 1445.

Same as 1445.

1449

SBITE: Cant bite


OPSTOP sections

OPSTOP section processing


is Enabled and expects only
one opstop per section.

Correct file so that only one


opstop per section exists.
Call Field Service.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Error occurred while


accessing the STATE SAVE
file.

Check whether the hard disk


drive or drive controller has
failed. Quit the C-200MT
program and restart.
Run Scandisk.

Error Messages 9

Class 1 FEP Errors (Contd)


Error
Code

Description

Possible Cause or Effect

Possible Solutions

1450

Auto-Scale Y value is out


of range

Automatic Tube Centering


System is installed and
enabled. The system will
scale the file in Y to fit the
measured tube width. The
scale factor has exceeded the
allowable range.

Verify that the correct file has


been selected for the width of
material to be cut.

1600

In procedure failed

Communication error
between the FEP and the
Motion Control Computer.

Quit the C-200MT program, turn


off the power, and restart. Call
Field Service if condition persists.

1601

Error: The controller is not


initialized

You did not home the beam


before trying to process a cut
file.

Initialize the cutter.

1602

Error: K.I. not nulled

You did not reset Knife


Intelligence.

Use the Null KI command to null


Knife Intelligence.

1603

Error: K.I. not turned on

KI: On/Off parameter is


turned OFF and the Disallow
Cutting with KI Off
parameter is enabled.

Enable the KI: On/Off parameter.

1604

Not allowed while cutting

You attempted to use a


command not permitted while
the cutter is in Auto Mode.

Wait until cutting is finished.


Stop cutting.

1605

OPSTOP and PreDrill


options cant both be
selected at one time

Both options are enabled.

Disable one of the options.

1606

SBITE: Too many bites

The file has exceeded the


total number of allowed bites.

Increase the Maximum Bite size.


Reduce the overall size of the file
by removing some of its length.

10 Error Messages

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Class 1 MCC Errors


The following table lists class 1 MCC errors. These errors relate to conditions with the
commands that the Motion Control Computer (MCC) sends to the cutting table. When a
class 1 MCC error occurs, the system stops cutting. To resume cutting, see the Recovery
chapter. Also refer to the GERBERcutter operators manual.

Class 1 MCC Errors


Error
Code

Error message

Cause or Effect

Possible Solution

1000

MCC Servo Processor


failed to report version
number

MCC Servo Processor boot


prom does not support
version number reporting.
Servo program failed to
initialize properly.

Restart program. Call Field


Service if condition persists.
Check version level of MCC
Servo Processor boot prom and
upgrade if necessary.
Reload C-200MT software.

1001

Beam Control Panel 1


Failed

Keypad #1 not functional.

Check that the cable to the BCC


is connected. Turn off the power
and restart the system.

1002

Beam Control Panel 2


Failed

Keypad #2 not functional.

Same as 1001.

1003

Beam Control Panel 3


Failed

Keypad #3 not functional.

Same as 1001.

1004

XY Axes stopped
initialization not
completed

X and/or Y limit switch was


not reached during beam
initialization.

Make sure limit switches are


functioning properly.

1005

C Axis stopped
initialization not
completed

C home switch not reached


during beam initialization.

Make sure home switch is


functioning properly.

1006

Error occurred while


homing

Beam stops during


initialization.

Subsequent error should follow.

1007

XY Axes could not get


off limit switches

Limit switches did not


disengage after beam moved
maximum distance from
switches.

Increase the X Home to System 0


and Y Home to System 0
parameters.

1008

C Axis could not get off


limit switch

Limit switch did not


disengage after head rotated
maximum distance from
switch.

Increase C Home to System 0


Degrees parameter.

1009

Encoder reset failure

Servo controller failed to


reset encoders.

Quit the C-200MT program, turn


off the power, and restart. Call
Field Service if condition persists.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Error Messages 11

Class 1 MCC Errors (Contd)


Error
Code

Error message

Cause or Effect

Possible Solution

1021

Bite Sensor not down

Bite sensor down limit switch


not activated after sensor was
commanded down.

Use Input Output Test (DG23)


diagnostic to make sure sensor
can drop and that limit switch
light comes on properly.

1022

Bite Sensor not up

Bite sensor up limit switch


not activated after sensor was
commanded up.

Same as 1021.

1023

MCC Servo Processor


Rejected Jog command

Servo program failed to


perform command.

Same as 1021.

1024

MCC Servo Processor


Rejected Manual Bite
command

Same as 1023.

Same as 1021.

1025

MCC Servo Processor


Rejected Automatic Bite
command

Same as 1023.

Quit the C-200MT program, turn


off the power, and restart. Call
Field Service if condition persists.

1100

Knife not up

The beam does not move


when you press the slew keys
or when under control of the
system.

Check that there is enough air


pressure (about 60 psi).
Check that up limit switch is
made.
Check for loose connections or
broken wires to up limit switch.

1101

Knife not down

Same as 1100.

Check that there is enough air


pressure (about 60 psi).
Check that down limit switch is
made.
Check for loose connections or
broken wires to down limit switch.

1102

Knife motor not on

The knife motor does not


operate.

Check for loose or broken wires.


Check fuses on knife drive panel.
Check knife motor.
S-3200 On the beam control
panel, check that KNIFE is set to
ON.
S-91 Make sure you fastened
the cutter head cover securely.
Check the head interlock switch.

1103

Knife motor not


responding

The knife motor is not


reciprocating, especially after
an EStop occurs.

Turn the knife motor ON before


starting the cutter. After an EStop
occurs, turn it OFF and then ON.

The knife speed sensor may


be non-functional.

Call Field Service.

12 Error Messages

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Class 1 MCC Errors (Contd)


Error
Code

Error message

Cause or Effect

1105

Knife not up for sharpen

The knife did not come up for


sharpening.

Check that there is enough air


pressure (about 60 psi).
Check that up limit switch is
made.
Check for loose connections or
broken wires to up limit switch.

1107

Drill not up

On systems without a drill,


the Lm Switch Status - Drill1
parameter is set to UP,
DOWN, or BOTH.

On systems without a drill, set the


Lm Switch Status - Drill1
parameter to NONE.

Lm Switch Active State Drill1 is set incorrectly for


cutter hardware.

Reverse the setting for this


parameter.

Drill up limit switch not


activated after drill was
commanded up.

Use Input Output Test (DG23)


diagnostic to make sure drill can
rise and that limit switch light
comes on properly.

On systems without a drill,


the Lm Switch Status - Drill1
parameter is set to UP,
DOWN, or BOTH.

On systems without a drill, set the


Lm Switch Status - Drill1
parameter to NONE.

Lm Switch Active State Drill1 is set incorrectly for


cutter hardware.

Reverse the setting for this


parameter.

Drill down limit switch not


activated after drill was
commanded down.

Use Input Output Test (DG23)


diagnostic to make sure drill can
drop and that limit switch light
comes on properly.

On systems without an
auxillary drill, the Lm Switch
Status - Drill2 parameter is
set to UP, DOWN, or BOTH.

On systems without a drill, set the


Lm Switch Status - Drill2
parameter to NONE.

Lm Switch Active State Drill2 is set incorrectly for


cutter hardware.

Reverse the setting for this


parameter.

Auxillary drill up limit switch


not activated after drill was
commanded up.

Use Input Output Test (DG23)


diagnostic to make sure auxiliary
drill can rise and that limit switch
light comes on properly.

1108

1109

Drill not down

Auxillary Drill not up

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Possible Solution

Error Messages 13

Class 1 MCC Errors (Contd)


Error
Code

Error message

Cause or Effect

Possible Solution

1110

Auxillary Drill not down

On systems without an
auxillary drill, the Lm Switch
Status - Drill2 parameter is
set to UP, DOWN, or BOTH.

On systems without a drill, set the


Lm Switch Status - Drill2
parameter to NONE.

Lm Switch Active State Drill2 is set incorrectly for


cutter hardware.

Reverse the setting for this


parameter.

Auxillary drill down limit


switch not activated after drill
was commanded down.

Use Input Output Test (DG23)


diagnostic to make sure auxiliary
drill can drop and that limit
switch light comes on properly.

1118

Knife not oriented in


C-axis direction

System can not tell the


orientation of the C-axis.

Quit the C-200MT program, turn


off the power, and restart. Call
Field Service if condition persists.

1119

TOOL switch in UP
position

You pressed Start but did not


set TOOL to AUTO.

On the beam control panel, set


TOOL to AUTO. Press Start to
resume cutting.

1120

Knife speed above


maximum

Knife speed exceeded


maximum set in the setup.

Call Field Service.

1121

C-axis change too large


with knife

System detects a C-axis move


with the knife down that
exceeds the parameter values
in the setup.

Check the cut file, and if necessary,


regenerate it.

1122

Tool position uncertain

The system does not know


the tool location.

Use Input Output Test (DG23)


diagnostic to make sure knife and
drill can rise and that limit switch
light comes on properly.
Check that the knife and drill are
up and limit switches are made.

1124

Not a bite feed system

You tried to process a cut file


containing bite data.

Regenerate the cut file without


bite data or set Ignore Move
Conveyor (M69) codes to ON.

1219

Controller in uninitialized
state

You tried to move the cutter


head or beam or start cutting
before initializing the cutter.

Initialize the cutter.

1220

Normal command path


disabled

Bad command from the MCC


to the PC.

Quit the C-200MT program, turn


off the power, and restart. Call
Field Service if condition persists.

14 Error Messages

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Class 1 MCC Errors (Contd)


Error
Code

Error message

Cause or Effect

Possible Solution

1311

Error Invalid BCC byte


number

FEP told controller to act on a


BCC not numbered 0-3.

Quit the C-200MT program, turn


off the power, and restart. Call
Field Service if condition persists.

1312

Error Invalid PIA byte


number

FEP told controller to act on a


PIA (I/O chip) not numbered
0-1.

Same as 1311.

1313

Error Invalid MFP byte


number

FEP told controller to act on a


MFP (I/O chip) not numbered
0.

Same as 1311.

1314

Error Invalid I/O device


number

FEP told controller to act on


an I/O device not numbered
0-2.

Same as 1311.

1315

Bad piece number

FEP sent a bad piece number


to the controller.

Same as 1311.

1316

Unable to communicate
with PC

Controller failed telling the


FEP it is done initializing
itself.

Same as 1311.

1317

IN sent during auto mode

FEP told controller to initialize


during automatic mode.

Same as 1311.

1318

Cannot allocate memory


block

Memory error on the MCC


board.

Same as 1311.

1319

Bad argument with PW


command

FEP sent a bad PW (power


ON/OFF) command to the
controller.

Same as 1311.

1320

Still logging data

Second request for data


logging submitted before first
request was finished.

Same as 1311.

1321

Still sending logged data

Data is still being transmitted


to the PC.

Same as 1311.

1322

No logged data available

Data logging was requested


for motor that was not active.

Perform cutting as instructed by


Field Service and then request
data logging.

1333

Invalid BGL command

FEP sent bad command to


controller.

Same as 1311.

1412

Table vacuum too low or


not on

Vacuum not on when


expected.

Use Input Output Test (DG23)


diagnostic to verify that the
vacuum system works.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Error Messages 15

Class 1 MCC Errors (Contd)


Error
Code

Error message

Cause or Effect

Possible Solution

1415

Max. cut speed not less


than dry haul speed

Path Intelligence expects cut


speed to be less than dry haul
speed.

Set the Maximum Cut Velocity


parameter lower than the
Maximum Dry Haul Velocity
parameters.

1416

Excessive resistance to
head movement

Excessive current is required


to move the cutter head.

Check the mechanical condition


of the system.
Reduce ply height.

1417

Table vacuum not off

The vacuum took too long to


drop below value set by
vacuum sensor.

Call Field Service.

1421

Unable to Home

Initialization unable to start.

Subsequent error message should


follow.

1422

X Limit Switch Active

Beam is on X limit switch.

Slew in +X direction at least 0.5


in.

1423

Y Limit Switch Active

Beam is on Y limit switch.

Slew in +Y direction at least 0.5


in.

1424

Unable to move

Move unable to begin.

Same as 1421.

1427

Adjust and re-origin


before continuing

Bad bite occurred previously.

Set the origin.

1428

Unable to sharpen

Sharpen unable to begin.

Same as 1421.

1429

Unable to select tool

Tool selection failed.

Same as 1421.

1431

Cant jog during file


processing

Jogging the conveyor while


processing a cut file would
cause a loss of position.

Use manual bite or close the cut


file before jogging the conveyor.

1432

Cleaner head not retracted Mechanism physically


jammed by debris. Limit
switch not working.

Inspect the cleaner head for


damage or debris. Inspect the
limit switch. Reinitialize the
controller. Exit and restart the
C-200MT program, if necessary.

1433

Edge sensor not retracted

Misalignment of limit switch.

Check limit switch. Check


cylinder for binding.

1434

Edge sensor not fully


engaged

Same as 1433.

Same as 1433.

1435

X-axis edge alignment


sensor not initialized

Sensor failure.

Adjust sensor position.


If not resolved, shut down
C-200MT, fix or replace sensor,
and run C-200MT.

16 Error Messages

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Class 1 MCC Errors (Contd)


Error
Code

Error message

1450

Slat advance timeout

Same as 1432.

Same as 1432.

1451

Cleaner head home


timeout

Same as 1432.

Same as 1432.

1452

Cleaner head away


timeout

Same as 1432.

Same as 1432.

1453

Cleaner head plunge


timeout

Same as 1432.

Same as 1432.

1616

Sharpener solenoid not


fully disengaged

Sharpener limit switch


indicates sharpener not in
safe position to continue.

Use Input Output Test (DG23)


diagnostic to verify that sharpener
solenoid is functional and limit
switch light comes on properly.

1617

Invalid Encoder ID to be
Zeroed

FEP told C-200MT to zero a


non-existent encoder.

Quit the C-200MT program, turn


off the power, and restart. Call
Field Service if condition persists.

1618

Invalid Servo signal to be


set

FEP told controller to zero a


non-existent Servo signal.

Same as 1617.

1619

Error setting X Dynamic


coefficients

Servo coefficients sent during


initialization were rejected.

Restart program. Call Field


Service if condition persists.

1620

Error setting Y Dynamic


coefficients

Same as 1619.

Same as 1619.

1621

Error setting C Dynamic


coefficients

Same as 1619.

Same as 1619.

1622

Error setting X Static


coefficients

Same as 1619.

Same as 1619.

1623

Error setting Y Static


coefficients

Same as 1619.

Same as 1619.

1624

Error setting C Static


coefficients

Same as 1619.

Same as 1619.

1625

Error setting Bite-X


coefficients

Same as 1619.

Same as 1619.

1626

Error setting Bite-Y


coefficients

Same as 1619.

Same as 1619.

1627

Error setting Stop


Parameters

Servo stop parameters sent


during initialization were
rejected.

Same as 1619.

Cause or Effect

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Possible Solution

Error Messages 17

Class 1 MCC Errors (Contd)


Error
Code

Error message

Cause or Effect

Possible Solution

1628

Error setting XYC scale

Servo X, Y, and C scale


parameters sent during
initialization were rejected.

Same as 1619.

1629

Error enabling Servo


Loops

Servo program failed to


initialize properly.

Same as 1619.

1630

Error setting XYC step

Servo stop parameters sent


during initialization were
rejected.

Same as 1619.

1633

Requested X position is
unavailable

1) Performed Manual Jog


1) Initialize system.
in -X during AccuMatch.
2) Opstop position cant be
2) Jog table in -X a small amount;
reached due to bite correction. and Restore State to that bite.

1700

Excessive force used


during static friction test

Same as 1630.

Same as 1619.

1701

Test aborted

Same as 1630.

Same as 1619.

18 Error Messages

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Class 2 Errors
The following table lists class 2 communication and data processing errors.
When a class 2 error occurs, the system displays an error message.
To resume cutting, see the Recovery chapter. Also, refer to the GERBERcutter
operators manual.
Class 2 Errors

Error
Code

Description

Cause or Effect

Possible Solution

2000

X following error

Commanded motion not


followed quickly enough by
servo controller.

Quit the C-200MT program, turn


off the power, and restart. Check
the mechanical condition of the
system. Call Field Service if
condition persists.

2001

Y following error

Same as 2000.

Same as 2000.

2002

C following error

Same as 2000.

Same as 2000.

2003

Conveyor beam
following error

Same as 2000.

Same as 2000.

2004

Vacuum following error

Same as 2000.

Quit the C-200MT program, turn


off the power, and restart. Call
Field Service if condition persists.

2005

Knife following error

Same as 2000.

Same as 2004.

2006

K.I. sensor failure

Knife Intelligence sensor is


not returning the proper
values.

Use the KI Calibration (DG20)


diagnostic to check that KI sensor
is working. Call Field Service if
condition persists.

2007

K.I. calibration failure

Knife Intelligence sensor


calibration off by more than
1.5 volts.

Use the KI Calibration (DG20)


diagnostic to recalibrate KI sensor.

2020

Conveyor table following


error

Conveyor did not move when


commanded.

Same as 2004.

2021

Bite gap > 1"

Conveyor coasted more than


1 inch from the beam.

Same as 2004.

2022

X commanded position
error

Commanded motor positon


cannot be attained.

Decrease cut speed (feed rate) by


10% and retry. Call Field Service
if condition persists.

2023

Y commanded position
error

Commanded motor positon


cannot be attained.

Same as 2022.

2024

C commanded position
error

Commanded motor positon


cannot be attained.

Same as 2022.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Error Messages 19

Class 2 Errors (Contd)

Error
Code

Description

2030

X2 following error

X2 motor commanded motion Same as 2004.


not followed quickly enough
by servo controller.

2031

X/X2 follwing error

X1 and X2 motor positions


are not follwing each other
closely enough.

Verify that the beam is


mechanically square. Call Field
Service if condition persists.

2302

Illegal tool command

FEP sent invalid command


during automatic mode.

Same as 2004.

2304

Conveyor bite size not


read

Automatic bite requested


without FEP having sent bite
size to Motion controller.

Same as 2004.

2305

Bite encoder off table

Bite encoder is not over the


Slew the cutter head away from
cutting table for a manual bite. the edge of the table.

2307

BGL command error

Communication error between


MCC and FEP.

Quit the C-200MT program, turn


off the power, and restart. Call
Field Service if condition persists.

2308

Tool select during tool


down

Same as 2307.

Same as 2307.

2310

Non-numeric char in
ASCII to integer
conversion

Same as 2307.

Same as 2307.

2311

Overflow converting
ASCII to integer

Same as 2307.

Same as 2307.

2312

Bad character in ASCII to


Bool conversion

Same as 2307.

Same as 2307.

2313

Invalid normal BGL


command

Same as 2307.

Same as 2307.

2314

BGL message command


(MS) not enabled

Same as 2307.

Same as 2307.

2315

Too many parameters for


BGL command

Same as 2307.

Same as 2307.

2316

Invalid BGL parameter ID Same as 2307.

Same as 2307.

2317

BGL parameter for


unknown command

Same as 2307.

Same as 2307.

2318

Invalid BGL tool select

Same as 2307.

Same as 2307.

20 Error Messages

Cause or Effect

Possible Solution

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Class 2 MCC Errors (Contd)

Error
Code

Description

Cause or Effect

Possible Solution

2319

Invalid BGL format for


tool select

Same as 2307.

Same as 2307.

2321

Non-existent command in
contour builder

Same as 2307.

Same as 2307.

2322

Too few params for


Normal command

Same as 2307.

Same as 2307.

2330

Non-numeric char in
ASCII to integer
conversion

Same as 2307.

Same as 2307.

2331

Overflow converting
ASCII to integer

Same as 2307.

Same as 2307.

2332

Bad character in ASCII to


Bool conversion

Same as 2307.

Same as 2307.

2333

Invalid immediate BGL


command

Same as 2307.

Same as 2307.

2334

BGL message command


(MS) not enabled

Same as 2307.

Same as 2307.

2335

Too many parameters for


BGL Command

Same as 2307.

Same as 2307.

2336

Invalid BGL parameter ID Same as 2307.

Same as 2307.

2337

BGL parameter for


unknown command

Same as 2307.

Same as 2307.

2338

Invalid BGL tool selected

Same as 2307.

Same as 2307.

2339

Invalid BGL format for tool Same as 2307.


select

Same as 2307.

2341

Invalid immediate BGL


command

Same as 2307.

Same as 2307.

2342

Too few params for


Immediate command

Same as 2307.

Same as 2307.

2350

Knife down move length


exceeds max

Knife down move length too


large.

Change cut file so the separation


between data points is less than
value in setup, then regenerate.
Increase length for Max Distance
With Knife Down.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Error Messages 21

Class 2 MCC Errors (Contd)

Error
Code

Description

Cause or Effect

Possible Solution

2351

Undefined parameter in
PARAM_GET

Same as 2307.

Same as 2307.

2352

Knife down command


with no moves

Too many digits found in data


file.

Correct the cut file for too many


digits. Regenerate the cut file.

2354

PC sent bad parameter ID

FEP sent controller


unexpected setup parameter
ID.

Same as 2307.

2355

Undefined parameter
found in PARAM_SET

Internal system error.

Same as 2307.

2356

Bad parameter index

Same as 2355.

Same as 2307.

2357

Bad parameter table

Same as 2355.

Same as 2307.

2358

Bad BGL data in CB

Same as 2355.

Same as 2307.

2359

DETERMINANT is 0 in
ARC FIT

Same as 2355.

Quit the C-200MT program, turn


off the power, and restart. Call
Field Service if condition persists.

2360

No more SEGMENTs in
pool

Same as 2355.

Same as 2359.

2361

No more DSP_MOVEs
in pool

Same as 2355.

Same as 2359.

2362

Too many SEGMENTS


freed

Same as 2355.

Same as 2359.

2363

Too many DSP_MOVEs


freed

Same as 2355.

Same as 2359.

2364

Residual Distance less


than 0

Same as 2355.

Same as 2359.

2365

Bad unget of last segment

Same as 2355.

Same as 2359.

2366

Error occurred during


rebuild

Same as 2355.

Same as 2359.

2367

Excessive decel generated Same as 2355.

Same as 2359.

2368

Bad segment_id in rebuild Same as 2355.

Same as 2359.

2369

Bad contour status in


rebuild

Same as 2355.

Same as 2359.

2370

GGT/OS error in rebuild

Same as 2355.

Same as 2359.

22 Error Messages

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Class 2 MCC Errors (Contd)

Error
Code

Description

Cause or Effect

Possible Solution

2371

Internal math error ^M

Same as 2355.

Same as 2359.

2430

Invalid task ID

Task within controller


identified itself improperly.

Same as 2359

2432

Invalid parameter size

Internal parameter passing


error.

Same as 2359.

2550

Error status returned from Failure to communicate with


ProMux
ProMux vacuum zone
controller (S-91 ZVC only).

Quit the C-200MT program, turn


off the power, check cabling, and
restart. Call Field Service if
condition persists.

2551

Timeout sending data to


ProMux

Same as 2550.

Check cabling to ProMux.

2552

Vacuum level too high to


bite

Vacuum level did not drop


enough to let the conveyor
move (S-91 ZVC only).

Check vacuum dump valve and


vacuum sensor. Call Field
Service, if condition persists.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Error Messages 23

Class 3 Errors
The following table lists class 3 errors. A class 3 error is a serious hardware
error. Cutting halts. To resume cutting, see the Recovery chapter. Also, refer
to the GERBERcutter operators manual.
NOTE:

The list below does not include all possible class 3 errors.
If an error other than those listed below occurs, call Field
Service.
Class 3 Errors

Error
Codes

Description

Cause or Effect

Possible Solution

3000

X Max Following Error

Commanded motion not


followed quickly enough by
Servo controller. Difference
between commanded and
actual position exceeds max
allowable.

Quit the C-200MT program, turn


off the power, and restart. Check
the mechanical condition of the
system. Call Field Service if
condition persists.

3001

Y Max Following Error

Same as 3000.

Same as 3000.

3002

C Max Following Error

Same as 3000.

Same as 3000.

3003

Conveyor Beam Max


Following Error

Same as 3000.

Same as 3000.

3004

Vacuum Max Following


Error

Commanded vacuum level


not followed quickly enough
by Servo controller.
Difference between
commanded and actual level
exceeds max allowable.

Quit the C-200MT program, turn


off the power, and restart. Call
Field Service if condition persists.

3005

Knife Max Following


Error

Commanded knife speed not


followed quickly enough by
Servo controller. Difference
between commanded and
actual speed exceeds max
allowable.

Same as 3004.

3006

Invalid number of sides


to sharpen

C-200MT commanded that


more than 2 sides of the knife
be sharpened.

Same as 3004.

3007

Error sending servo


command to MCC Servo
Processor

Communication error between


Motion controller and Servo
controller.

Same as 3004.

3008

No reply from MCC


Servo Processor to Servo
command

Communication error between


Motion controller and Servo
controller.

Same as 3004.

24 Error Messages

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Class 3 Errors (Contd)


Error
Codes

Description

Cause or Effect

Possible Solution

3009

Unable to enter Servo


program

Servo controller failed to


enter Servo Mode.

Quit the C-200MT program, turn


off the power, and restart. Call
Field Service if condition persists.

3010

Unknown BCC error


detected by 68K

A Beam Control Computer


reported an unknown error.

Check cabling going to BCC.

3011

Beam Control Panel 0


(main) failed

Keypad #0 not functional.

Check that the cable to this BCC


is connected.

3012

Unknown error detected


by controller ISR

The controller Interrupt


Service Routine reported an
unknown error.

Quit the C-200MT program, turn


off the power, and restart. Call
Field Service if condition persists.

3013

Error sending Boot


command to MCC Servo
Processor

Internal system error.

Same as 3012.

3014

No reply from MCC


Servo Processor to Boot
command

Same as 3013.

Same as 3012.

3015

Unable to re-enter boot


program

Same as 3013.

Same as 3012.

3016

MCC Servo Processor


reports tests failed

Same as 3013.

Same as 3012.

3017

MCC Servo Processor


reports Self-Test failed

Same as 3013.

Same as 3012.

3018

Error sending Diag


command to MCC Servo
Processor

Same as 3013.

Same as 3012.

3019

Unable to enter
Diagnostics mode

Same as 3013.

Same as 3012.

3020

Conveyor Table Max


Following Error

Same as 3000.

Same as 3012.

3022

X MAX commanded
position error

Commanded motor positon


cannot be attained.
Commanded motor position
exceeds max allowable.

Decrease cut speed (feed rate) by


10% and retry. Call Field Service
if condition persists.

3023

Y MAX commanded
position error

Commanded motor positon


cannot be attained.
Commanded motor position
exceeds max allowable.

Same as 3022.

3024

C MAX commanded
position error

Commanded motor positon


cannot be attained.
Commanded motor position
exceeds max allowable.

Same as 3022.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Error Messages 25

Class 3 Errors (Contd)


Error
Codes

Description

Cause or Effect

Possible Solution

3025

MCC Master/Servo
Handshake Error

Master processor did not


follow proper protocol in
communicating with servo
processor.

3026

Square Beam Error

An error occurred while


Perform beam mechanical
attempting to square the beam. alignment procedure. Call Field
Service if condition persists.

3030

X2 Max Following Error

Same as 3000.

Same as 3012.

3031

X/X2 MAX following


error

X1 and X2 motor positions


are not following each other
closely enough. Difference
between the two motor
positons exceeds max
allowable.

Verify that the beam is


mechanically square. Call Field
Service if condition persists.

3125

Unable to stop X and/or


Y axis

Unable to stop beam after


slewing.

Same as 3012.

3235

X Servo Drive Failed

Unable to enable Servo drive.

Check power to drive.

3236

Y Servo Drive Failed

Same as 3235.

Same as 3235.

3237

C Servo Drive Failed

Same as 3235.

Same as 3235.

3238

XYC drives never came


on

After applying servo power,


X, Y, and C drives did not
come on within a reasonable
time.

Same as 3012.

3239

Power lost during XYC


enable

Immediately after pushing the


Servo Power Enable button,
power was lost. For example,
someone pressed EStop.

Same as 3012.

3240

Software detected
overspeed condition

Internal system error.

Same as 3012.

3241

X2 servo drive

Hardware failure on servo


drive.

Call Field Service.

3318

Cannot allocate available


block

Internal error in queue


memory.

Same as 3012.

3400

Offscale +X

There is a command in the


cut file to move off the table
in +X.

Check the cut data format, correct


the data, then regenerate the cut
file.
Reorigin closer to the
initialization point of the table.

3401

Offscale -X

There is a command in the


cut file to move off the table
in -X.

Same as 3400.

26 Error Messages

Quit the C-200MT program, turn


off the power, and restart. Call
Field Service if condition persists.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Class 3 Errors (Contd)


Error
Codes

Description

Cause or Effect

Possible Solution

3402

Offscale +Y

There is a command in the


cut file to move off the table
in +Y.

Same as 3400.

3403

Offscale -Y

There is a command in the


cut file to move off the table
in -Y.

Same as 3400.

3404

Emergency stop
condition occurred

You pressed the EStop button


or a Class 3 error condition
occurred.

Move the beam off the cam for


the AC limit switch. After
correcting error, press the Servo
Power button.

3500

PC did not request


version number

FEP failed to request


controllers version number
during initialization.

Same as 3012.

3600

Conveyor driver failed

Unable to enable drive.

Same as 3235.

3601

MCC Servo Processor


rejected Stop
Conveyor command!

Servo controller failed to


execute Stop Conveyor
command.

Same as 3012.

3602

Conveyor didnt stop!

Time-out occurred waiting


for Servo controller to stop
conveyor.

Same as 3012.

3800

XY/C Loader Error

Servo controller reported an


internal error in its XY/C
loader.

Same as 3012.

3801

68010 sent MCC Servo


Processor a Bad
Command

MCC sent bad command to


Servo controller.

Same as 3012.

3802

XY Loader error

MCC reported an error in the


Servo controllers XY loader.

Same as 3012.

3803

C Loader error

MCC reported an error in the


Servo controllers C loader.

Quit the C-200MT program, turn


off the power, and restart. Call
Field Service if condition persists.

3804

Bad Boot command echo

Servo controller failed to


acknowledge command from
MCC.

Same as 3803.

3805

Unknown MCC Servo


Processor Error detected
by MCC Servo Processor

Servo controller reported bad


error to MCC.

Same as 3803.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Error Messages 27

Class 3 Errors (Contd)


Error
Codes

Description

Cause or Effect

Possible Solution

3806

Unknown MCC Servo


Processor Error detected
by 68010

MCC reported bad error


about Servo controller.

Same as 3803.

3807

Error commanding MCC


Servo Processor

MCC unable to command


Servo controller.

Same as 3803.

3808

Error programming
FEPROM

There has been an MCC


board failure.

Same as 3803.

3809

Error Stopping

Internal system error.

Same as 3803.

3810

Excessive Knife Current

Too much electrical current is


needed to achieve the current
knife speed.

Check the cutting surface for


obstructions then sharpen the
knife blade. Call Field Service if
condition persists.

Class 4 Errors
The following table lists class 4 errors. A class 4 error is serious
nonrecoverable C-200MT controller error caused by either a hardware or
software condition. Power down the system, then power up again. If the error
appears again, call Field Service. To resume cutting, see the Recovery
chapter. Also, refer to the GERBERcutter operators manual.

Class 4 Errors

Error
Codes

4600

Description

Illegal motion mode in


first pass

28 Error Messages

Cause or Effect

Possible Solution

Internal contour building mode


uncertain.

Quit the C-200MT program,


turn off the power, and
restart. Call Field Service if
condition lasts.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Input Codes
Input codes are put into a cut file by a CAD marker making system. These
codes trigger GERBERcutter functions when the system cuts the data. For
example, the system plunges the drill when it sees a drill hole input code.
The following table lists the input codes recognized by the GERBERcutter.
If you are using a cut file made for another system, it may contain other
input codes which cause an error when you process the marker. Keep input
codes in mind if a marker causes problems when processing.

Input Codes

Code

Command

Description

D1

Pen down

Lowers pen for plotting.

D2

Pen up

Raises the pen.

D4

Light source

Selects the origin light as the tool and changes the offsets.

G04 Set Origin

Sets origin to values specified in the cut file.

G70 Select 3.3 English Data


Format

Selects the 3.3 English format for displaying data (see chapter 6).

G71 Select 5.1 Metric Data


Format

Selects the 5.1 metric format for displaying data (see chapter 6).

G91 Select 4.2 English Data


Format

Selects the 4.2 English format for displaying data (see chapter 6).

M00 End of File

Tells the system to stop after executing cut data.

M01 Optional Stop

The system executes the cut data, but stops at predetermined


points (usually for plaid/stripe matching).

M14 Knife Down

Lowers the knife for cutting.

M15 Knife Up

Raises the knife.

M17 Maximum Advance


(Zero Heel Cut)

Causes a maximum advance (zero heel cut). The system restores the
advance to normal after every M17 code.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Input Codes 1

Input Codes (Contd)

Code

Command

Description

M18 Inhibit Next Overcut

Disables Overcut, but retains Advance Before Plunge. The system


enables Overcut when it encounters the next M14 (knife down) code.

M19 No Overcut, No Advance

Disables Overcut and Advance Before Plunge until it encounters


the next M14 (knife down) code or an N sequence number block.

M20 Message Within Data

A set of instructions entered by the marker maker that appear on the


monitor for the GERBERcutter operator.

M25 Parts Slow Down

Makes the GERBERcutter run slower until it sees an M26 code or


an N sequence number. M25 usually follows the N sequence
number block of the piece to be cut and should be in its own block.

M26 Resume Normal Speed

Restores cutting velocity to normal. If the system did not read an M25
code before the M26, it ignores the code.

M31 Labeler Data Follows

Supports a GGT labeler.

M40 Allow Auto Sharpen

Allows automatic sharpen cycles. M40 is the default for sharpening.

M41 Inhibit Auto Sharpen

Disables automatic sharpen cycles. Allows sharpening only by the


M42 code or by pressing the SHARPEN button on the beam
control panel.

M42 Sharpen

Triggers a sharpen cycle.

M43 Main Drill

Commands the main drill to plunge and drill a hole. (Same as R)

M44 Auxiliary Drill

Commands the auxiliary drill to plunge and drill a hole.

M46 Lift and Plunge Corner

Commands a lift and plunge corner at the next data point.

M47 Knife Intelligence Off

Turns off Knife Intelligence.

M48 Knife Intelligence On

Turns on Knife Intelligence.

M51 Null Knife Intelligence

Lets the cutter automatically zero the Knife Intelligence current


transducers.

M60 5% Reduction of Velocity

Makes the GERBERcutter run 5 percent slower until it sees an N


sequence number, another slowdown M code, or an M26 code.

M61 10% Reduction of Velocity

Makes the GERBERcutter run 10 percent slower until it sees an N


sequence number, another slowdown M code, or an M26 code.

M62 15% Reduction of Velocity

Makes the GERBERcutter run 15 percent slower until it sees an N


sequence number, another slowdown M code, or an M26 code.

M63 20% Reduction of Velocity

Makes the GERBERcutter run 20 percent slower until it sees an N


sequence number, another slowdown M code, or an M26 code.

2 Input Codes

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Input Codes (Contd)

Code

Command

Description

M64 25% Reduction of Velocity

Makes the GERBERcutter run 25 percent slower until it sees an N


sequence number, another slowdown M code, or an M26 code.

M65 30% Reduction of Velocity

Makes the GERBERcutter run 30 percent slower until it sees an N


sequence number, another slowdown M code, or an M26 code.

M66 35% Reduction of Velocity

Makes the GERBERcutter run 35 percent slower until it sees an N


sequence number, another slowdown M code, or an M26 code.

M67 40% Reduction of Velocity

Makes the GERBERcutter run 40 percent slower until it sees an N


sequence number, another slowdown M code, or an M26 code.

M69 Conveyor Move

Tells the C-200MT program that it found the end of a bite. The
system advances the material.

M70 Auto Origin

If used, this command should be the first data block of a marker.


M70 establishes the current X and Y position as the origin.

Knife Up

Raises the knife. (Same as M15)

Knife Down

Lowers the knife for cutting. (Same as M14)

Fn

Set Feedrate

Makes the GERBERcutter change feed rate, where n is the feed


rate in inches per minute (ipm). Valid feed rate range = 200 to
1800 ipm in increments of 100 ipm.

File Identifier

Identifies magnetic tape files, for example, H1, H2, H3.

Parts Slowdown

Makes the GERBERcutter run slower until it sees an O code or an


N sequence number. (Same as M26).

Sequence Number of Piece

Identifies the cut sequence number of the piece.

Resume Normal Speed

Restores cutting velocity to normal. If the system did not read an L


code before the O, it ignores the code. (Same as M26)

Main Drill

Commands the main drill to plunge and drill a hole. (Same as


M43)

Establish light as tool

Selects the origin light as the tool and changes the offsets. (Same as
D4)

Block Delete

If you turn on block delete in your configuration file, the system


ignores any codes between two block delete commands.

Precedes X coordinate data

Defines the data as X-axis data.

Precedes Y coordinate data

Defines the data as Y-axis data.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Input Codes 3

4 Input Codes

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Glossary
axis

An imaginary line used to describe movement and location on the cutting table. The GERBERcutter
utilizes three axes: X (parallel to table length), Y (parallel to table width), and C (knife direction).
beam

A support and carrier for the cutter head as it moves across the width and up/down the length of
the table.
beam control panel (BCP)

A terminal that lets you control the cutter head and beam assembly from the cutting table. The computer
which processes input from the beam control panel is called the BCC.
For specific controls available on the BCP for your cutter, refer to the GERBERcutter operator's manual
or Getting Started.
bite

A section of a marker that (a) fits on the cutting table and (b) can be cut at one time. Bite feeding
matches cutter head movement with conveyor movement, permitting automatic cutting of a long spread
of material. The spread is cut in sections that fit on the cutting table surface. Each section is called a
bite.
BRISTLE SQUARES

Squares of molded bristle that install into conveyor slats or into a fixed grid. They form a work surface
for cutting material.
C-axis

An imaginary, straight line that the knife rotates about.


Cutter Information Database (CIDB)

An optional C-200MT utility that uses a database to track time relative to cutter operation and reports
this information.
command

A request to perform a function that is entered at a terminal, such as the PC or FEP at the operator
console. Also, an item you can choose in a C-200MT menu in order to use a feature in the C-200MT
program.
conveyor

Moving work surface made from slats and covered with Gerber BRISTLE SQUARES.
CTOT

The Conveyorized Take-off Table (CTOT) is a device for moving cut pieces off the cutting table
surface. The CTOT is made of plastic links, that move in synch with the conveyor.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Glossary 1

cut file

A computer data file that tells the GERBERcutter how to cut particular patterns (a marker) out of a
spread of material. Also, see marker.
data

Information stored on a disk.


default

A setting that is programmed into the computer at the factory or set by Field Service when the cutter is
first installed. This is used until you or your supervisor override it by selecting another setting.
disk or disc

A computer storage medium. GERBERcutter systems can use 3.5-inch disks and CD-ROM discs.
disk drive

A device that lets a computer read and write data on a disk. Your cutter has 3.5-inch and CD-ROM
disk/disc drives.
drill

An optional unit that attaches to the cutter head for making drill holes.
dry haul

The distance traveled with the knife out of the material.


dry run

To execute a cut file without plunging the knife or drill into the material.
EStop

A red push button that can be pressed during an emergency to immediately stop all GERBERcutter
motion.
feed rate dial/slider

Control used to set the desired cut speed.


front end processor (FEP)

A computer in the operator console that relays your commands, cut file data, and setup file data to the
Motion Control Computer for processing.
hard disk drive

A device that holds the software that runs the GERBERcutter. A hard disk drive uses rigid metal disks
to store large amounts of data.
You need to manage your hard disk so it does not become too full and disorganized. For information on
managing files on the hard disk, see File Manager in the Cut File and Report Utilities chapter or refer to
documentation for AccuMark Explorer or Windows NT.
hardware

Physical elements of a computer, such as the monitor and keyboard.

2 Glossary

C-200MT Software Users Guide

heel cut

Cut made by the heel of the knife. The heel is the thickest edge (following edge) of the knife blade.
home

Cutting table's (X0,Y0) coordinates.


initialize

To set the cutting table's (0,0) coordinate after downloading the C-200MT software. The system uses
this coordinate as a reference when processing a marker.
Knife Intelligence

Knife Intelligence (KI) is a GERBERcutter feature that:

Senses deflection of the knife (lateral force) caused by cutting difficult materials or high ply
spreads

Changes knife angle to compensate for this deflection

Note: KI is not applicable for S-3200, GT 3250, and GTxL GERBERcutter systems.
job queue

A job queue contains multiple markers or cut files to be cut sequentially. Each marker and its
corresponding setup file is called a job. See Queue Manager chapter.
limit switch

A switch that sets boundaries (limits) for the travel of the cutting head or beam along the work surface
of the cutting table.
marker

Another name for a cut file being processed on the cutter. Also, an AccuMark file that identifies the
layout of pieces on a spread for cutting.
mast

A tower available with lateral drive GERBERcutter systems that holds the overhead power cables, shop
air hoses, and houses a flashing warning light and alarm to alert others when the cutting table is moving.
An exhaust stack for the vacuum system may also be located on the mast.
motion control computer (MCC)

A computer, or controller board, that responds to instructions sent from the front end processor to
control cutting table, beam, and head motion.
network

A set of computers connected together. For example, a GERBERcutter may be networked to a CAD
grading and marking system.
offset

A value by which one item is set or located differently relative to another item.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Glossary 3

operator console

The location on the GERBERcutter where the C-200MT program is accessed and marker processing is
initiated. The operator console includes a monitor, keyboard, and computer with a hard drive, disk
drive, and CD-ROM disc drive. See also Front End Processor FEP.
OpStop

A command in a cut file that causes the cutter to stop processing while the operator checks matching
points and slews the cutting head as necessary.
origin

The start position (X0,Y0) of a marker on the table. This is set at the corner of the marker closest to
the take-off end on the side of the cutting table where the operator console is located.
parameter

A setting defined in the setup file.


Path Intelligence

Path Intelligence (PI) completely or partially controls cut speed using built-in application knowledge
and by measuring one or more of the following:

Knife sharpness

Vacuum level

XY force

Use commands in the Diagnostics/Path Intelligence menu to ensure that the GERBERcutter is running
properly.
program

A set of instructions for a computer to execute. The programs that direct a computer are called software.
right side

The right side of the cutting table as seen from the take-on end.
servo motor

An electric motor used to move the beam along the X-axis or the cutter head along the beam in the Yaxis of the cutting table.
setup

A setup is a file containing parameters which enable or disable various features, options, and modes
depending on such considerations as ply height, material characteristics, or marker width.
software

Set of computer programs used to run the GERBERcutter and communicate with you. These include
the C-200MT program and Windows NT.
spread

One or more layers of material spread on the cutting table surface for cutting. May also be called a lay.

4 Glossary

C-200MT Software Users Guide

stack

A pipe, mounted vertically, that vents vacuum exhaust away from the GERBERcutter. This is usually
mounted on the mast.
take-off end

The end of the cutting table where cut pieces and scrap material leaves after being cut.
take-on end

The end of the cutting table that receives material for cutting from the spreading table.
utility

A program that helps you operate the cutter, such as Queue Manager, Preprocessor, or View Marker.
X-axis

A horizontal reference line in a coordinate system. For the GERBERcutter, the X-axis runs the length of
the table from the take-on end to the take-off end.
Y-axis

A vertical reference line in a coordinate system. For the GERBERcutter, the Y-axis runs the width of
the table from the left side to the right side.
zone (vacuum)

A vacuum feature that applies vacuum to a certain area of the cutting table. A cutting table with this
feature is divided into five or six zones. Vacuum can be applied to one or more zones at a time
depending on parameter settings.

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Glossary 5

6 Glossary

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Index
1, 5
10" Sq Center Drill Hole
5' Bite Test
50" Square Test

Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Diagnostics

A
AAMA
Accessing the Program
AccuMark Data
add to job queue
open
change parameter tables
AccuMatch
Access Levels
Auto Tube Centering
Edge Sensor diagnostic

Advanced Cut
Get Acquainted
Queue Manager
Basic Cut
Basic Cut
Get Acq/Options
Parameter Manager
Get Acq/Options
Diagnostics

B
Bar Code Reader
Beam Square Test
Beam Squareness
Bite/Biting
Bite Adjust Values
Bite Search
Bristle Cleaner Options
Bristle Cleaning

Get Acq/Options
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Advanced Cut
Diagnostics
Recovery
Get Acq/Options
Maintenance

C
C Axis Angle
C Home to System Zero
C-200B codes
C-200MT Software
main screen
Calibrate
Conveyor Move
CTOT/Conveyor speed
Calibration, PI
Center Line Origin
Change User Directory
Changing Parameters
Changing Passwords
Check Origin
CIDB Reports

Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Input
Get Acquainted
Get Acquainted
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Advanced Cut
Utilities
Parameter Manager
Utilities
Advanced Cut
CIDB

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Circuit Breaker
turn on
Basic Cut
locations
Safety
Cleaning Work Surface
Maintenance
Clipping Window
Advanced Cut
Closing
marker
Basic Cut
program
Get Acquainted
Colors for File Display
Get Acquainted
Communications Statistics
Diagnostics
Concentric Circles
Diagnostics
Config
See Setups
Contiguous Cutting
Advanced Cut
ContinuousCutting
Advanced Cut
Continuous Run
Diagnostics
Conveyor/CTOT Speed Calibrate Diagnostics
Conveyorized Take-off Table
(CTOT)
Get Acq/Options
CPI (Path Intelligence)
Optimize
Customer Support
Whats Inside
Cut File
open
Basic Cut
data supported
Get Acquainted
Cut Speed
Optimize
Gauge
Get Acquainted
Cut Tests
Diagnostics
Cutfile Information Button
Get Acquainted
Cutter Info Database
CIDB
Cutting
advanced features
Advanced Cut
basics
Basic Cut
optimizing
Optimize
CutView Utility
CutView

D
Data Format
Data Scale Factor
Debug Window Diagnostic
Diagnostics
Directory, Change Default
Display Bite Adjust Values
Documentation
Drill Offset Setup
Drill Options
Dry Run

Advanced Cut
Advanced Cut
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Utilities
Diagnostics
Whats Inside
Diagnostics
Get Aquainted
Advanced Cut

Index 1

Dual Beam
option
diagnostics

Get Aquainted
Diagnostics

E
Edge Sensor Diagnostic
Enabling Servo Power
Error Simulation Diagnostic
Energy Savings Mode (ESM)
Exit

Diagnostics
Basic Cut
Diagnostics
Optimize
Get Acquainted

F
Fabric Alignment
Advanced Cut
Feed Rate
setting
Basic Cut
slider
Get Acquainted
File Display Area
Get Acquainted
options
Get Acquainted
File Manager
Utilities
Frequently Used Parameters
Parameters
changing
Parameter Manager

G
Gauges
Geometric Shapes
GERBERcutter
Glossary

Get Aquainted
Diagnostics
Get Aquainted
Glossary

Diagnostics
Basic Cut

I
Initializing the Cutter
Input Output Test (DG 23)

Basic Cut
Diagnostics

J
Job Queues

Queue Manager

K
KI Calibration (DG 20)
Knife Sharpening
Knife Intelligence (KI)
gauge
settings
Knife Offset Setup

2 Index

Optimize
Get Aquainted
Maintenance
Get Aquainted

L
Laser
positioning
Lateral Drive
Lock File Manager
Locking Parameters

Safety
Basic Cut
Get Acq/Options
Utilities
Parameter Manager

M
Main Cutter Control Screen
Marker
open
data supported
Marker Flip/Flip Top
Marker Reports
Marker Stacking
Menu Bar
Mirroring Option
Move Head To
Move to Origin
Multiple 45 degree Lines
Multiple Horizontal Lines
Multiple Vertical Lines

Get Acquainted
Basic Cut
Get Acquainted
Advanced Cut
CIDB
Advanced Cut
Get Acquainted
Advanced Cut
Diagnostics
Recovery
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Diagnostics

H
Heel to Heel Test
Home

Knife Speed
gauge
Knife Wear
gauge

Diagnostics
Maintenance
Optimize
Get Aquainted
Optimize
Diagnostics

Nulling Knife Intelligence Sensor

Optimize

O
Opening Cut File/Marker
OPSTOPs
Optimizing cutter
Options for GERBERcutters
Origin

Basic Cut
Advanced Cut
Optimize
Get Acq/Options
Basic Cut

P
Parameter
Parameter Manager
Path Intelligence (PI)
diagnostics
pause between bites
Pen Offset Setup
PI diagnostic
Piece Recut
Piece Search

Parameters
Parameter Manager
Optimize
Diagnostics
Advanced Cut
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Recovery
Recovery

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Position Info
Positioning the First Bite
POWER Processor
Preprocess Drills
Preprocessing Cut Files
Preset OPSTOP
Preset Setup
Printing Current Setup
Processing Cut file/marker

Diagnostics
Basic Cut
Get Acq/Options
Advanced Cut
Utilities
Advanced Cut
Setups
Parameter Manager
Basic Cut

Q
Queue Information Button
Queue Manager
Quit

Get Acquainted
Queue Manager
Get Acquainted

R
Reassign Access Level
Recover
Regional OPSTOP
Reports
Rerun
Resealer Option
Resetting for New Knife
Restorable Info
Restore Origin
Restore State
manually
Right Side Option (RSO)
Run Time Biting

Parameter Manager
Recovery
Advanced Cut
CIDB
Basic Cut
Get Aquainted
Optimize
Diagnostics
Recovery
Recovery
Recovery
Get Acq/Options
Advanced Cut

S
Safety Precautions
Safety
Sbite
Advanced Cut
Searching for Parameters
Parameter Manager
Servo Data Logging Diagnostic
Diagnostics
Servo I/O Test (DG 16)
Diagnostics
servo power
Basic Cut
Setting the Marker Origin
Basic Cut
Settings Options
Get Acquainted
Setups
Setups
Sharpening the Knife
Maintenance
Single Step
Diagnostics
Software Diagnostics
Diagnostics
start
processing
Basic Cut
program
Get Acquainted
Static Length Biting
Advanced Cut
Stepsize Setup
Diagnostics
Supported by C-200MT
Diagnostics

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Support, Customer
System Setup Button

Whats Inside
Diagnostics

T
Testing Encoders with Servo I/O
Diagnostics
Testing Input/Output
with Servo I/O
Diagnostics
Trim Cut
Basic Cut
Tube Centering Option
Get Acq/Options
Turning on
Energy Savings Mode
Optimize
cutter
Basic Cut
knife motor
Basic Cut
parameters
Setups
vacuum
Basic Cut
Two Line Output Display
Get Acquainted

V
Vacuum
Variable Length Biting
View Cut File

Optimize
Advanced Cut
CutView

W
Watch Forces
Work Surface Cleaner
options

Diagnostics
Maintenance
Get Acq/Options

Y
Y Edge Alignment Option
Yaw in X Test
Yaw in Y Test

Get Acquainted
Diagnostics
Diagnostics

Z
Zone Valve Exerciser

Diagnostics

Index 3

4 Index

C-200MT Software Users Guide

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi